JP7260013B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine judges whether a game is successful or not when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, and executes an effect for suggesting and notifying the player of the judgment result. However, if the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit, there is a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

JP 2012-217766 A

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the entertainment of the game as an effect for suggesting the result of the win-or-fail judgment .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises determination means capable of executing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and specific a benefit giving means for giving a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the determination result of (1) is displayed, wherein the identification information can be dynamically displayed in a predetermined operation pattern. Dynamic display means, variable means capable of changing between a first state and a second state different from the first state, and variable control for varying the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern. and a variable control means, wherein the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means as an effect pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means can be determined based on at least the determination result of one of the determination means, and the one determination result is the specific pattern. In the case of the determination result, it is possible to determine the effect pattern in which the variable pattern is the specific variable pattern, and the case where the variable means is in the second state is better than the case where the variable means is in the first state. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and in the case of the specific determination result, the variable is higher than in the case of other than the specific determination result. A performance pattern for varying the means is easily determined, and the specific variable pattern varies the variable means from the first state to the second state while the identification information is dynamically displayed. In the gaming machine, the variable control means can be operated by a player in a situation where dynamic display of the identification information cannot be executed based on a predetermined operation pattern. By operating the possible operating means, it is possible to bring the variable means into a state in which the variable means can be varied in a variable mode included in the effect pattern.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a determination means capable of executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern. , variable means capable of changing between a first state and a second state different from the first state, and variable control means capable of executing variable control for varying the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern. , wherein the game machine has the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means as a performance pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and The effect pattern including the variable pattern of the variable means to be executed can be determined based on at least the determination result of one of the determination means, and the one determination result is the specific determination result. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the effect pattern in which the variable pattern is a specific variable pattern, and the dynamic display means is more effective when the variable means is in the second state than when the variable means is in the first state. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the dynamically displayed identification information , and when the determination result is the specific determination result, the variable means is changed more than when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A production pattern is easily determined, and the specific variable pattern is obtained by changing the variable means from the first state to the second state while the identification information is dynamically displayed. The variable pattern is a variable pattern capable of notifying the determination result, and the variable control means in the game machine has an operation means that can be operated by the player in a situation where the dynamic display of the identification information cannot be executed based on a predetermined operation pattern. By being operated, it is possible to bring the variable means into a state in which it is possible to vary the variable means in a variable mode included in the effect pattern.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board. It is a perspective front view of an operation unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the prize winning opening unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a base member and a first electric accessory; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. 10(a) and 10(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the prize winning unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18(b). be. (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). (a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 24(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27(a). 27(a) and 27(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in range XXIX of FIG. 2; FIG. (a) is a front view of the decorative design display device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device taken along line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative pattern display device. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device. (a) is a front view with the inner reel deployed, and (b) is a front view with the outer reel deployed. FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30(a); 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative design display device in range XXXV of FIG. 34; FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36(a). It is a front view of a segment display device. 1 is an exploded view of a segment display device; FIG. (a) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit; (a) is a front view of the second segment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second segment unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a second segment unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit; FIG. 42B is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a); It is a side view of a base member. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a); It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit; (a) is a front view of a displacement member, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member; FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line LIII-LIII of FIG. 51(a); It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. (a) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). (a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 66(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 4th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative design display device in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 73(a). (a) is a front view of a rotating member in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member. (a) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) to (c) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in an eighth embodiment; (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in a ninth embodiment; (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) is a front view of a displacement member in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a vertical displacement unit; 91 (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. 90. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit in the eleventh embodiment; It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). (a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and (c) is FIG. 98(b). is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a). (a) is a front view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross section of the first electric accessory and the drive unit 8530 along line CIb-CIb of FIG. 101(a). FIG. 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory and drive unit taken along line CIc-CIc of FIG. 101(b); (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit according to the seventeenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line CVb-CVb of FIG. 105(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative design display device according to an eighteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is the front view which expanded the inner reel. It is the front view which expanded the outer reel. (a) is the figure which showed an example of the reel display at the time of the normal time in the 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content during time saving. (a) is the figure which showed an example of the lottery result during working hours reduction in the 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content which shows the remaining time reduction frequency|count. It is the figure which showed the display content during the production|presentation of the special ready-to-win 1 in the 1st control example. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the reel display during the effect of the special reach 2 in the first control example, and (b) is the display contents of the reel display when the big win is established from the special reach 2. It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents when the condition of the special reach 3 is established in the first control example, and (b) shows the display contents of the reel stop display of the first variation of the special reach 3. It is a diagram. It is a diagram showing the display content of the reel display of the second variation of the special reach 3. FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing operation contents of various devices during a pseudo-continuous effect in the first control example; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a special symbol reserved ball storage area, a special symbol reserved ball execution area, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first winning random number table set in the ROM of main controller 110 in the first control example, and (b) is the ROM of main controller 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing a set first winning type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram showing a second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table, It is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for big hits, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a (normal) variation pattern table for loss, and (d) is a (probable variation) variation pattern for loss It is the figure which showed the table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the first control example, (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table , is a diagram schematically showing a fluctuation pattern table for long fluctuation. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol operation table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a special effect scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a pattern group storage area set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing stop setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing reel operation confirmation processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 8 is a flowchart showing state setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing a remaining count display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing an advance notice selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 7 is a flowchart showing operation control processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing outer reel control processing executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing inner reel control processing executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing displacement member control processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing stop symbol setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the normal stop design setting process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time reduction stop design setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in the second control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. FIG. 11 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in a second control example; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on a drawing list; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the variable display layer 1 in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the variable display layer 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the relationship between BGM and stop sound corresponding to variation pattern A in the second control example; FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing the relationship between BGM and stop sound corresponding to variation pattern B in the second control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table , is a diagram schematically showing a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a BGM type selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; (b) is a diagram showing the audio ramp control device in the second control example; is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a stop sound selection table set in a ROM of . (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio output device in the second control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the second control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; 9 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing display image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; 9 is a flowchart showing BGM correction processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in another example of the second control example;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 6
3, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine").
) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a game board 1 that shoots a ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a.
A firing rail (not shown) or the like is mounted to guide the front area of 3.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there are a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side.
and are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
2 is provided. This frame button 22 is used, for example, to change the aspect of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or to change the content of the Super Reach effect. operated by a person.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2)
A certificate stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized from the front. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the player, the ball is lent according to the operation. will be
Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium).
Lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance in the card or the like. return button 43
is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 .

Inside the operation handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, and a shooting stop switch 51 for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first
The prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 140, the variable prize winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). be done. The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player.
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 is formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 77 like the outer rail 77 . The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails.
area where the launched ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). first
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B provide displays corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As a jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variable jackpot,
4R probability variable jackpot and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. First pattern display device 37A, 3
In 7B, not only is it indicated whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is indicated in the case of a jackpot.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds,
Along with moving to a low probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a game state (
This is a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased.

During the probability change and the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning port 14
The time in which the first electric accessory 520 associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set than in normal. When the first electric role product 520 is in the open state (open state), compared with the case where the first electric role product 520 is closed (closed state), the second winning port 140
The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit may be changed to increase the number of times that the first electric accessory 520 is opened in . In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the time saving, and the second winning opening 1
At least one of the time during which the first electric accessory 520 associated with the 40 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the time when the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened,
The number of times the first electric accessary product 520 is opened in each win may not be changed, and only the win probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased compared to the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first winning port 64, a second
Triggered by any winning (starting winning) of the winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A,
A segment display device 600 and a decorative pattern display device 800 that perform variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in 37B, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 . The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86 .

The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 of this embodiment are the main control device 1
10 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. and displacement motion. Instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game state.

The second symbol display device displays a display symbol (second symbol (
A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" (not shown) for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Also, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is lost, the second symbol display device displays "
The symbol "x" is stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric accessory 52 attached to the second winning hole 140
0 is configured to be activated (released) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 . Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the variable or time saving, the first
If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second prize winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 520, the variable display of the second symbol The required time may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A lottery will be held for the design. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device,
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display,
If the result of the winning lottery is lost, the pattern of "x" is displayed as the stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second design reservation lamps are provided for the maximum number of reservations, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment.
37B, the segment display device 600 and a part of the decorative pattern display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the segment display device 600 and a part of the decorative pattern display device 800 may light up the second symbol reservation lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first prize winning port 64 in front view, a second prize winning port 140 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls put out when the balls enter the winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls put out when the balls enter the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same, but the balls enter the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize opening 140 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize opening 140, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first prize opening 64. are three,
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 520 is attached to the second prize winning port 140 . This first electric accessory 520
is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 140 . On the other hand, the first through gate 6
As a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to 6, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state). As a result, the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning hole 140 .

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened is also longer during the variable probability or the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. to shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed hitting”).
), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the first winning hole 64 .

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second prize winning opening 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. to open the first electric accessory 520, and by winning to the second winning port 140, 15
It is advantageous for the player to aim for the R probability variable jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). How to use "
You can switch between left-handed and right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a big win, the first winning lottery is designed to stop the big win after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning port 6 that is normally closed
5a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis.
and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are sent to the first out hole 7.
1 to a ball discharge passage (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114, payout controller 111 and launch controller 112, power supply 115, card unit connection board 1
16 are accommodated in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100~
Reference numeral 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). again,
A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing sticker,
It is possible to know whether the board boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
7A, 37B, segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800 display setting, and display result lottery in the second pattern display device.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. The work area where the values are stored (
working area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 and retains data (backup) even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 are backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B,
Solenoid consisting of a second pattern display device, a second pattern holding lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1 .
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 .
Various processes are executed based on the AM elimination signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, etc., and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is used for the pachinko machine 10
Data can be held (backed up) by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The ball launching control device 112 controls the ball launching unit 112 so that the ball launching strength corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
It controls a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
is not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation display) and a display control device 114 such as an advance notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 2
25 are connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on the various commands received from the main control device 110 (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.), determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, has been determined The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (variation pattern command for display, stop type command for display, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800
You can change the display mode with , or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach,
The display control device 114 is instructed. When the displayed mode is changed, in order to display the decoration corresponding to the changed displayed mode on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, the information on the changed displayed mode is included. A back image change command is sent to the display controller 114 . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800 . The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the audio ramp controller 113 receives signals from the display controller 114 to the segment display device 60 .
0 and a command (display command) representing the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 800 are received.
In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, according to the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, the audio corresponding to the display content is output from the audio output device 226 Also, it controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 corresponding to the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 It controls the display such as the variable effect of the third pattern. Moreover, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 and the audio from the audio output device 226 output can be matched.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig. 3
), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are generated. Necessary voltage is supplied to each of the controllers 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 . The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. In addition, the power supply unit 2
51 maintains the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, to the normal value for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. configured to maintain Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 shows the game board 1
3 is an exploded perspective front view of FIG. Note that FIG. 13 shows a state in which the winning port unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the prize winning unit 500 is a game board formed by partitioning two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. It is inserted from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the region. A detailed configuration of the prize winning unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG.
FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG.

8 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair above and below the segment display device 600 are respectively retracted to both upper and lower sides, in FIG. A state in which the provided displacement member 670 protrudes to the upper and lower central positions is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a rear case 40 formed like a box.
0, and a decorative pattern display device 800, a segment display device 600 and a decoration unit 700 are accommodated in the inner space of the back case 400. - 特許庁

The rear case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 402 that stands upright from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall portion 401 has an opening 401a which is rectangular when viewed from the front at its center.
00 is arranged from the rear side of the rear case 400 .

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400. As shown in FIG. The decorative pattern display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that rotate and displace in the vertical direction. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the manner in which the symbols fluctuate (rotate). A detailed description of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be given later.

The segment display device 600 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400 and
The decorative pattern display device 800 is covered. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative pattern display device 800, and by disposing the decorative pattern display device 800 in the gap, , the decorative pattern display device 800 can be visually recognized.

Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the facing base members 660 described above. By displacing it forward, it is possible to form an effect form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 cannot be visually recognized from the player side. A detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decoration unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front.
A pair is arranged above and below the The decoration unit 700 is made of a transparent resin material and has a shape that imitates the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10 . In addition, an LED board that emits light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700 so as to be able to emit light to the player side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29, a detailed description of the prize winning port unit 500 will be given. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, the structure of the prize winning port unit 500 will be described.

10(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear view of the prize winning unit 500. FIG. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500,
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. FIG. 13 shows the base member 510
and an exploded perspective view of the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the prize winning unit 500 is arranged on the front surface of the game board 13 (
5), a first electric accessory 520 rotatably pivotally supported inside the base member 510, and a drive that applies a driving force to the first electric accessory 520. A unit 530 is mainly provided.

The base member 510 includes a front base 511 arranged on the front side, and a front base 511
and a rear base 512 arranged at a predetermined interval.

The front base 511 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is formed of a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first protrusion 511a protruding rearward from the upper end of the central portion in the lateral direction, and a second protruding portion 5 protruding rearward from the lower end of the central portion in the lateral direction.
11b and a third protruding portion 511b protruding at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction from the second protruding portion 511b.
The projection 511c is mainly provided.

again. The front base 511 is arranged at a position where the front surface thereof can be visually recognized from the player side, and a pattern is formed on the front surface side by unevenness.

The first projecting portion 511a is configured so that the first electric accessory 520, which will be described later, is in a closed state (feather members 520L, 520L, 520L, 520L).
A plate member for preventing a game ball from being thrown into a second winning hole 140 formed in the rear base 512 when the tip of 20R is positioned above its rotating shaft (shaft member JB1). is.

That is, the first projecting portion 511a is formed in the upper portion between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R facing each other in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first projecting portion 511a is equal to the diameter of the game ball. is set smaller than

Further, the upper surface of the first projecting portion 511a is formed so as to be inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right end portions. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the first projecting portion 511a can roll on its upper surface and drop (flow down) downward.

The second protruding portion 511b is formed to protrude from the rear side of the front base 511 in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the position of the upper end surface in the vertical direction is lower than the bottom surface of the second prize winning opening 140 of the rear base 512. set. The second protruding portion 511b includes a standing portion 511b1 standing in front of the second prize winning opening 140 of the rear base 512, engaging portions 511b2 protruding from both left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom portion. It is mainly formed with a recessed portion 511b3 that is recessed in the .

A base member 511f including an LED for emitting light is arranged on the second projecting portion 511b below the standing portion 511b1. The LEDs of the base member 511f are arranged so as to emit light upward. Therefore, the surroundings of the second prize winning opening 140 can be illuminated by the LED.

The standing portion 511b1 is formed to stand upward from the upper end of the second protruding portion 511b, and two of them are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the leading ends of the standing portions 511b1 are connected to each other. The upright portion 511b1 is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is the second winning opening 140. is set to a height that coincides with the bottom of the Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can be rolled toward the second winning hole 140 side. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 is the second winning hole 1
40 can be entered.

In addition, the connection portion of the standing portions 511b1 arranged side by side is formed in a shape in which the central position in the circumferential direction is recessed downward. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 is moved to the standing portion 511b1.
It is possible to easily stay at the center position in the left-right direction of b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the standing portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning hole 140 side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with the game ball thrown later and being pushed out, and the game ball is easily made to enter the second winning hole 140. can.

The engaging portions 511b2 are portions that engage left and right feather members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and project from both left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of the shaft support portion 511d, which will be described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512 together. As a result, the concave portion 511b3
A screw can be inserted through a through hole 511b4 that is formed through the side surface on the back side of the .

The third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball to the first out port 71 formed in the back base 512, and is formed in two places on the back base 512 with the second winning port 140 interposed therebetween. It is formed adjacent to both laterally outer sides of the 1-out port 71 . In other words, the third projecting portion 511c is formed at a position separated in the horizontal direction by the dimension of the second projecting portion 511b and the first out port 71 in the horizontal direction.

The bottom surfaces of the third protruding portions 511c are inclined downward toward the respective adjacent first outlets 71 (toward the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a))), The lowest position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first out port 71 . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the 3rd protrusion part 511c can be rolled toward the 1st out port 71, and can be made to enter the 1st out port 71. FIG.

The shaft supporting portion 511d is formed so as to protrude from the back side of the front base 511 in an annular shape, and two shaft supporting portions 511d are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10(a)) with the standing portion 511b1 interposed therebetween. . The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1, which will be described later.
Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted inside the shaft support portion 511d.

The rear base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body that is larger than the front base 511 in front view. Therefore, the player can directly see the front surface of the rear base 512 that does not overlap the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

Also, since the front base 511 is made of a transparent material, the front base 511 is positioned forward.
The rear base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511 at the overlapping portion. Furthermore, the player can visually recognize game balls thrown between the rear base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511 .

The rear base 512 includes a first prize winning port 64 formed at the upper end of the front side, a second prize winning port 140 formed below the first prize winning port 64, and formed on both sides of the second prize winning port 140. and a general winning hole 63 formed above the first out hole 71 on the right side when viewed from the front.
and are formed mainly.

The first prize winning opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end portion of the front base 511 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 10(a)) at a substantially central position, and protrudes in both the front and rear directions along the recessed edge portion. It is formed. In addition, the projecting tip on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 10A) is closed by a plate member.

The recessed shape of the first winning hole 64 is formed with a size that allows a game ball to pass through the inside,
The bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball entering the first winning hole 64 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13. - 特許庁

The second prize winning port 140 is formed through the first prize winning port 64 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 10(a)). The second prize winning opening 140 is formed in a square shape having a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加In addition, the second prize winning port 140 includes recesses 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, projections 523L and 523R of left and right blade members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, can be accommodated inside. That is, inside the second winning hole 140, the game ball is allowed to pass through, and the protrusions 523L and 523R are inserted therethrough.

The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front side to the back side on both left and right sides of the second prize winning opening 140 of the back base 512 . The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting a shaft member JB1, which will be described later.
It is formed in a circular shape with a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out port 71 is formed through both left and right sides of the second prize winning port 140 . 1st outlet 7
Reference numeral 1 denotes a hole for collecting game balls that have flowed down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13. It is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the vertical direction (lateral direction) is the same as that of the game ball. is set larger than the diameter of Further, the first outlet 71 is formed such that its bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball entering the first out port 71 is moved to the game board 1
You can throw the ball to the back side of 3.

The first outlet 71 is formed with a guide wall 512b that connects with the bottom surface and protrudes toward the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area on its upper surface and throwing the ball to the first out port 71, and its upper surface is formed so as to slope downward toward the back side.

In addition, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall 512b from being damaged when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

The fastening between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 is performed by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c formed through the rear base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, in a state in which the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are combined in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the concave portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and the screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. can be done by

The first electric accessory 520 is a left wing member 520L arranged on the left side of the second prize winning opening 140 in front view.
and the right wing member 520R arranged on the right side in front view are formed as one unit.

In addition, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R have bulging portions 524L and 524R, which will be described later.
, and the other members are formed symmetrically with respect to the second winning hole 140. Therefore, only the left wing member 520L will be described except for the bulging portions 524L and 524R, and the right wing member 520L will be described. A detailed description of the member 520R is omitted.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are driven by a solenoid 531 of the drive unit 530, which will be described later. It can be displaced between a second state (open state) in which the corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize winning opening 140, and the first state unless otherwise specified. shall be explained. Also, in the first state, the side surfaces of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R facing each other will be described with reference numerals of side surfaces 526L and 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed in a generally triangular shape in a front view, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a back surface from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. 523 L of protrusions protruding on the side and the through hole 5
525L recessed in the radial direction of the through-hole 521L in the end surface on the 21L side, and a side surface 526L.
It mainly includes a bulging portion 524L protruding from and a shaft member JB1 inserted into the through hole 521L. A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be given later.

The shaft member JB1 is a columnar rod member made of a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right feather members 520L and 520R.
is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the

Further, the axial length of the shaft member JB1 is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the separation distance from the recessed front end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the rear side of the front base 511. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the rear base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the rear base 51
2 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a, and the other side (the end on the front base 511 side) is inserted into the shaft support portion 511d. 512.

The left wing member 520L has a dimension in the front-rear direction of the front base 511 and the rear base 512.
is set to be smaller than the distance dimension between the opposing sides. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are assembled, by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L, the feather member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. .

The recessed portion 522L is recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the dimension of the recessed portion is set smaller than the projection distance of the shaft support portion 511d. Also, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner peripheral surface is set to be larger than the radial dimension from the axis of the shaft support portion 511d to the outer peripheral surface.

Therefore, when the blade member 520L is arranged between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, the front surface of the blade member 520L and the rear surface of the front base 511 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, and the blade member 520L and the front surface can be prevented from contacting each other. The contacting portion with the base 511 is the concave portion 522L and the shaft support portion 5.
11d. Therefore, the blade member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially grounded. As a result, when the blade member 520L is rotated by driving a solenoid 531, which will be described later, the resistance acting on the blade member 520L can be reduced, making it easier to rotate the blade member 520L.

In addition, since the shaft support portion 511d can be accommodated inside the recess 522L, the front base 5
11 and the rear base 512 can be made smaller. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

Here, conventionally, there has been a game machine in which the shaft member JB1 is internally fitted into the through hole 521L of the feather member 520L.

However, in the conventional game machine, in order to fit the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L,
When the blade member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the blade member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing parts. Therefore, there is a problem that the parts cost is high.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shaft member JB1 extends through the through hole 5 formed in the feather member 520L.
21L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 can be arranged in the prize winning opening unit 500 as separate bodies. Therefore, when the feather member 520L is damaged, only the feather member 520L can be replaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component cost.

Further, as described above, the fastening of the front base 511 to the rear base 512 can be performed from the front side of the front base 511 . Therefore, when the feather member 520L is damaged, the front base 5 can be removed from the back base 512 with the winning opening unit 500 attached to the game board 13.
11 can be removed. As a result, it is possible to easily replace the parts of the feather member 520L.

That is, when the front base 511 is removed from the rear side of the rear base 512, the game board 1
Although it is necessary to remove the front base 511 from the rear base 512 after removing the prize winning unit 500 from 3, the front base 511 is formed to be removable from the front side, so the front base 511 can be easily removed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily replace the parts of the feather member 520L.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the rear base 512, the heads of the screws or the like that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side), and the player can , the player's interest may be spoiled by visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the fastening between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 is performed using the space of the concave portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511 . That is, by obliquely inserting a screwdriver into the concave portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, the through hole 5 can be opened.
A screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via 11b4. Therefore, the through hole 511
Even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of b4, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be fastened by obliquely inserting a screwdriver into the concave portion 511b3. Therefore, the head of the screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be made difficult to see from the player's side (front side). As a result, the player can use the front base 511 and the rear base 512
By visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the and, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

Also, usually, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 that can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13 are set at the eye level of the player. Therefore, the prize-winning unit 500 is arranged below the line-of-sight height of the player. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512, and the player can visually recognize the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512. can be suppressed from being damaged.

Since the front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, the screw heads can be seen through the front base 511. However, as described above, the front base 511 has unevenness on the front side. Since the pattern is formed, light can be emitted in other directions due to the difference in the thickness of the plate. This obscures the screw heads that are visible through the front base 511 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

A detailed description of the drive unit 530 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 14-16. Figure 1
4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. FIG. 15(a) and 15(b) are
5 is a side view of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 16(a) and 16(
b) is a front view of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

15(a) and 16(a) show the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b) show the first electric A state in which the accessory 520 is positioned in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531 and its solenoid 5
31, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, and a first case member 534 in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are displaceably disposed. and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534 .

The solenoid 531 includes a main body portion 531a that has an electric wire inside and generates an electromagnetic force when electric power flows through the electric wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body portion, and the movable body. and an engaging portion 531c attached to the tip of the .

The main body portion 531a is formed in a prism shape elongated in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is arranged inside. A concave portion is formed on the front side of the main body portion 531a, and a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed inside the concave portion.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide to the rear side (inside the body 531a) by generating an electromagnetic force when electric power is applied to the wires of the body 531a.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite to the body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in the shape of a disk having an outer diameter larger than that of the movable body 531b, and is arranged so that its axis is substantially collinear with the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of the sliding member 532, which will be described later. As a result, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 15(a)) as the movable body 531b is displaced.

The sliding member 532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from the top, and is attached to the connecting portion 5 extending in the left-right direction.
32a and two first protrusions 532 protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a to the front side.
and a second projection 532c located between the two first projections 532b and protruding on the front side.

The sliding member 532 is formed so that the lateral dimension of the connecting portion 532a is smaller than the lateral dimension of the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534, which will be described later. This will
The sliding member 532 can be housed inside the first case member 534 .

The connecting portion 532a is formed on both sides of the proximal end of the second protrusion 532c, a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engaging groove 532a2 recessed from the top side connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the second projection 532c. The cut portion 532a3 is mainly provided with the cut portion 532a3.

As described above, the concave portion 532a1 fits the engaging portion 5 of the solenoid 531 into the engaging groove 532a2.
31c is inserted, it is a dent which suppresses that the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 abuts on the connection part 532a. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arcuate shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. As a result, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531
can be suppressed from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed so as to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c. The engagement groove 532a2 has a lateral width larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c and a longitudinal width substantially equal to or engaged with the longitudinal thickness of the engaging portion 531c. It is formed to be larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the portion 531c. Therefore, the engagement groove 532a
2, the engaging portion 531c can be inserted.

The cutout portion 532a3 is a cutout for facilitating elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when connecting the first projection 532b (to be described later) to the rotation member 533.
It is formed on both sides of the proximal end of 2c and is cut toward the back side.

The first projection 532b has an engagement hole 532d penetrating in the left-right direction. engagement hole 53
2d is formed in the shape of an elongated hole elongated in the front-rear direction, and is recessed downward in the gravity direction from the end on the front side and the first opening 532d1 recessed from the end on the back side in the gravity direction. second opening 53
2d2. A detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be given later.

The engagement hole 532d is set so that the vertical width of the central portion in the front-rear direction (the portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the vertical width of the projection 533b of the rotating member 533, which will be described later. be done. As a result, the protrusion 5 is formed inside the engagement hole 532d.
33b can be placed.

The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above and protrudes toward the front side. In addition, the second projection 532c has an upright wall 532c1 erected downward on the distal end side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. Note that the standing wall 532c1
will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 533 is composed of two plate-like bodies, which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side, separated by a predetermined width in the left-right direction.
are arranged side by side, and the opposing portions on the one end side are connected by a connecting portion 533a. The gap between the two plate-shaped bodies of the rotating member 533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can pass through the inside of the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. be. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 .

The rotating member 533 has a rotating shaft 533 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side.
, a projection 533b protruding to both sides in the left-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a driving portion 533d recessed at the tip of the other end of the substantially L-shaped side view. formed in preparation for

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to protrude from both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance dimension between the protruding end surfaces thereof is set substantially equal to the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Also, the projection dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, by receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside a recessed portion 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotating member 533 can be configured as the first case member 534 and the second case member 534. 2 It can be held in a rotatable state with respect to the case member 535 .

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude from both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces of the protrusions 533b is equal to the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. It is set to be approximately the same as the dimension. Also, the projection dimension of the projection 533b is set larger than the width dimension of the first projection 532b in the horizontal direction. Therefore, by inserting the projection 533b into the engaging hole 532d of the first projection 532b, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected.

The connection between the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be performed by elastically deforming the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the space between the two first projections 532b. can. In this case, as described above, the cut portion 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, so that the space between the two first projections 532b can be easily widened. As a result, the rotary member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Furthermore, the distance dimension between the opposing inner surfaces of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is the first
Approximately the same as the distance between the outer surfaces of the protrusions 532b facing each other, or the first protrusions 532
It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of b. Accordingly, in a state in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress elastic deformation of the first protrusion 532b outward in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

The driving portion 533d is formed by recessing from the front side toward the back side. drive unit 533d
can accommodate the protrusions 523L and 523R of the feather member 520L inside. That is, the drive unit 533
d is set to a dimension larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L and 523R. drive unit 533
By housing the protrusions 523L and 523R in the d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state in accordance with the displacement of the driving portion 533d. In addition, the first electric accessory 52
A detailed description of the zero displacement will be given later.

The first case member 534 is formed to have a substantially square shape with an open interior when viewed from the front, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 has a cutout formed on the lower side of the back side, and the second case member 535 can be arranged in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 mainly includes a concave portion 534a recessed on the front side in the notch portion on the back side, and a standing portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess for accommodating the rotating shaft 533c of the rotating member 533 inside, and is recessed to have a shape larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, rotating shaft 53
By assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 in a state in which 3c is housed inside, the rotating member 533 can be arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The erected portion 534b is formed such that the lower inner peripheral surface of the second prize winning opening 140 of the back base 512 and the erected leading end surface thereof are set at the same height, and the erected portion 534b extends toward the back side and is inclined downward. be done.
As a result, in a state where the drive unit 530 is arranged on the back surface of the back base 512, the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 rolls on the upper surface of the standing portion 534b, thereby causing the second case member 5 to move.
You can throw the ball to 35.

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 has a through hole 535a formed through it in the vertical direction.
Prepare.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball.
The ball can be thrown downward through 35a. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the game area and entered the second winning hole 140 can be recovered.

Next, displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 16A, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is arranged around the movable body 531b. At the same time, it projects to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the rear side of the engagement hole 532d (second opening 53).
2d2 side). Further, the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 in a side view is positioned between the driving portion 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. That is, the rotary member 533 has the rotary shaft 53
A rotational force is constantly applied around the axis 3c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d.

Therefore, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the rear side of the engagement hole 532d (second opening 533).
d2 side), it can remain above the second opening 533d2 without being guided inside the second opening 533d2 (below the engaging hole 532d (lower side in FIG. 15(a))).

Further, since the driving portion 533d is pushed downward, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R accommodated inside the driving portion 533d are pushed downward. As a result, the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are placed in a state (first state (see FIG. 16A)) in which the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are located above the through holes 521L and 521R. be.

As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when power is applied to the body portion 531a of the solenoid 531, the movable body 531b moves toward the body portion 53 due to the electromagnetic force generated in the body portion 531a.
It is drawn into the interior of 1a.

Therefore, with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 connected to the tip side of the movable body 531b is slid rearward (to the right in FIG. 15(b)). As described above, the rotating member 533 is always in a state in which a rotating force is applied around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d. The protrusion 533b accommodated inside the second opening 533d2 slides inside without being caught by the base end portion of the second opening 533d2.

The protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 abuts on the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) at the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, (b) to the right); In this case, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1 because the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 533c. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the rotating shaft 533c, the driving portion 533d can be displaced upward (upward in FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the feather member 520L is formed through the through holes 521L,
It is rotated about the axis of 521R to displace the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R to the left and right outwards (second state (see FIG. 16(b))).

On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the power supply to the body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. FIG. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the body portion 531a disappears, so that the body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a are disposed around the movable body 531b.
Due to the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the movable bodies 531b, the front side (Fig. 1
5(a) left side). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the projection 533b, the depth of the recess toward the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 15(b)) of the first opening 532d1 is It is formed deeper toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 15(b)).

As a result, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 collides with the projection 533b of the rotating member 533, and the projection 533b moves in the direction of gravity. can be easily displaced.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the operation of the second projection 532c will be described. Fig. 17(a)
And FIG. 17(b) shows the winning opening unit 50 on line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10(a)
0 is a sectional view of FIG. 17(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 in the first state, and FIG. 17(b) shows the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are aligned with the first protrusions 511a. placed in the vicinity. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the left and right feather members 5
It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between the opposing 20L and 520R.

In addition, as described above, the solenoid 531 moves the movable body 531 from the inside of the body portion 531a.
b is projected. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17A). That is, the erected wall 532c1 of the second projection 532c is arranged near the second winning opening 140. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the erected tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17(a)))
to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534,
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected forward, the game ball can flow between the left and right feather members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 and rolling. That is, the sliding member 5 moves the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534.
The rolling of the game ball can be stopped by colliding with the 32 erected walls 532c1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, even if the player continues playing the game, it is possible to prevent the store from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, a sensor device SE1 for detecting that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 140 is arranged in the second case member 535 along the game ball flow-down path. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning hole 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball up to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534 , it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 140 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R are more inclined than in the first state. is also separated from the first projecting portion 511a, and the separated distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball.
As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area are
It can be received by 6L and 526R and rolled to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁That is, the first
When the electric accessory 520 is set to the second state, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 has the movable body 531b inside the main body 531a.
is pulled in. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the rear side (right side in FIG. 17(b)). That is, the erected wall 532c1 of the second projection 532c is arranged at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17(b)))
to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534,
It is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right feather members 520L,
By displacing the 520R, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily entered into the second winning opening 140, and the game ball entered into the second winning opening 140 can be easily pushed into the first case member 534. A ball can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the installation portion 534b.

Furthermore, the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slidably displaced in a direction substantially coinciding with the rolling direction of the game ball entered into the second winning hole 140, so that the feather member 520L, When 520R is broken (or tampered with) and opened, standing wall 53
The game ball stopped by colliding with 2c1 can be suppressed from being pushed out in the direction opposite to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is connected to the solenoid 53
When opening by driving 1 and allowing a game ball to enter the second winning hole 140, clogging of the second winning hole 140 with the game ball can be suppressed. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning hole.

Next, referring to FIGS. 18 and 19, the first electric role product 520 is
A case where the first state is displaced to the second state will be described. 18(a) and 18(b) are front views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 19(a) and 19(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), for ease of understanding, the front base 51
1 is shown transparently. 19(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state, and FIG. 19(b) shows the case where only the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state. is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when only the first electric role product 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state due to the player's fraudulent act. , the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R are the second openings 53 of the engagement holes 532d.
It is displaced inside 2d2. That is, since a space is formed in which the projections 523L and 523R can be displaced, it is possible to suppress damage to the first electric accessory 520 when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20(a) and 11(b), the displacement of the standing portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to the player's cheating will be described. Figure 20(a)
18(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXa-XXa, and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18(b). .

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's urging action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 531
And the position of the sliding member 532 is not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the standing wall 532c
1 (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(a))) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534. set smaller than the diameter.

Here, conventionally, a second winning hole 140 formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members 520L and 520R arranged across the second winning hole 140, and a pair of feather members 5
Driving means (solenoid 531
) and the driving force of its driving means (solenoid 531), the pair of blade members 520L and 520
When R is opened, it is arranged at the allowable position for allowing the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140, and when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). A gaming machine is known which includes a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted,
For example, after the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, the regulation means can be displaced from the regulation position to the allowable position, so that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning hole 140. There was a problem that the effect of regulating the

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the standing wall 532
Since the arrangement of c1 is formed so as to be able to be maintained at the regulated position, it is possible to suppress displacement of the standing wall 532c1 to the allowable position. Therefore, illegal entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be easily regulated.

That is, the state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of feather members 520L
, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to move the standing wall 532c.
1 (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(b))) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed in the first case member 534. set smaller than the diameter. Therefore, if the first electric accessory 520 is mishandled by the player, the second winning port 140
Even if the game ball can be thrown to the second opening 140, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning hole 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate being entered.

Also, in this case, the standing wall 532c1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. A separate member for regulating illegal entry of a ball into the winning hole 140 is not required.
Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, so an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the case where the second projection 532c is further pushed into the rear side when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state by the player's cheating will be described. . 21(a) and 21(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. FIG. 22(a) shows the drive unit 530 in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a).
22(b) is a partially enlarged side view of drive unit 530 in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b).

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, inside the second opening 532d2, the front side (FIG. 22(a)
) left side) is formed with a protrusion 532d3 protruding from the inner surface thereof. A notch portion 533b1 is formed in the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 by cutting the outer peripheral surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed in a shape corresponding to their outer diameters. That is, the projecting shape of the projection 532d3 and the cut shape of the notch portion 533b1 in side view are substantially the same.

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(a) in which only the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to fraud, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed toward the rear side. Then, the protrusion 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch portion 533b1, and the displacement of the erected wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the rear side is restricted. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the player's cheating, the game ball enters the second winning hole 140, and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 It can be suppressed that the ball is thrown by rolling.

Further, in the present embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed so as to incline upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22(a)). As a result, the protrusion 532d3
When inserted inside 33b1, projection 532d3 can be made difficult to come off from notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is inclined upward toward the back side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further inclined toward the back side while the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch 532b1. The direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the projection 532d3 and the notch 532b1 when a pushing force acts on the projection 532d3 can be the direction in which the projection 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put in the second state due to the player's cheating, the game ball is placed in the second state.
It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the winning hole 140 and rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 to be thrown.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of blade members 520L and 52
A transmission mechanism for transmitting to 0R is provided, and the transmission mechanism moves between the open slide position (the position shown in FIG. 17(b)) and the closed slide position (the position shown in FIG. 17(a)) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). and the pair of feather members 520L, 520L, 520L, 520L, 520L, 520L, 520L and 520L.
20R and is rotated to the closing rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closing slide position to close the pair of blade members 520L and 520R, and the standing wall 532c1 is the sliding member. 532, when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is arranged at the allowable position, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the closing slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is closed. When the rotating member 533 is placed in the open rotating position with the 532c1 placed in the restricting position and the sliding member 532 placed in the closing slide position, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged. As a result, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is regulated, so that the game ball can enter the second winning hole 14
It is possible to easily regulate illegally entering the ball to 0.

That is, when the closed pair of feather members 520L and 520R are illegally opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotating position while the sliding member 532 is arranged at the closing slide position. be done. In this state, since the sliding member 532 is restricted from sliding to the open slide position by the engagement between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532,
It is possible to maintain the restricting means at the restricting position (it is possible to prevent the restricting means from being illegally forcibly displaced to the allowable position from the outside). As a result, even if the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside and the game ball is passed through between the pair of feather members 520L and 520R,
The entry of such a game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be regulated by the regulating means.

Further, one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 has an engaging hole 532d extending therefrom and a protrusion 533b protruding from the other. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the regulation to be lifted while achieving miniaturization.

That is, means for restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position by utilizing the engagement hole 532d and the projection 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 to rotate it. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, it is possible to reduce the size accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the projection 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the regulation (engagement) can be released accordingly. It can be difficult.

Next, referring to FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portions 52 of the left and right blade members 520L and 520R
4L and 524R will be described in detail. FIG. 23(a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23(b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 500, and FIG. 24(b) is XXIVb-XXI of FIG. 24(a).
It is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line Vb.

23(a) and 23(b), the left and right direction when viewed obliquely is reversed between FIG. 23(a) and FIG. 23(b). In addition, in FIG. 24(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently. Furthermore, in FIG. 24(b), the front base 511 that was seen transparent in FIG. 24(a) is illustrated as being opaque. Moreover, in FIG.24(b), side 526L, 526R
The rolling direction of the game ball rolling is indicated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the through hole 521L side, and is formed on the front side (FIG. 24(b) arrow F
side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end on the through hole 521R side and
It is formed continuously with the end face of the arrow B side).

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Further, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with first regions that are continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the feather members 520L, 520R, and are sized so as not to contact the game balls guided in the first regions. Bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, and side surfaces 526L and 526L and 526L of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L and 520R) of the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are formed.
The first area of 26R and the first areas of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. They are arranged in different positions in different directions.

Further, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L is the front side (FIG. 24(b)).
(lower side) toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 24(b)) toward the through hole 521L side. On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed such that the end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R side from the back side toward the front side.

Next, referring to FIGS. 25 and 26, side surfaces 526 of left and right feather members 520L and 520R
A case where a game ball is thrown to L, 526R will be explained. 25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

In addition, FIG.25(a), FIG.25(b), FIG.26(a) and FIG.26(b) are FIG.24(b).
corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in . Moreover, FIG.25(a) and FIG.25(b)
), the transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 are illustrated in order. FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b) sequentially illustrate the transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when the game ball is thrown to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, it rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R. The game ball to be played can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L, thereby rolling to the back side.

25 (
b) Since it is inclined from the bottom side) toward the back side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the through hole 521L side, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L contacts the bulging portion 524L, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R rolls on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulging portion 524R, thereby rolling toward the front side.

25 (
b) Since it is inclined from the upper side) to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the through hole 521R side, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R contacts the bulging portion 524R, It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

Therefore, while the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be moved to the rear side, the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be moved to the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on.

Here, conventionally, it has a ball entrance (second winning hole 140) formed so that a game ball can enter, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) that guides the game ball to the ball entrance and is displaceable. A gaming machine is known that includes a guide member (first electric accessory 520) that can be formed. As the guide member, for example, a pair of feather members (feather members 520L, 520R ) are exemplified.

In addition, a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one blade member (one of the blade members 520L, 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the other blade member is provided. A technique is disclosed in which a second groove is provided on each of the entire surfaces of the . According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in mutually different directions, the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 52
6R) and one of the feather members (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R). It can be biased in one direction (one on the side of the glass plate and the other on the side of the game board). Therefore, each game ball can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, the game ball entering from one side of the guide member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) and passes through the other side of the guide member (
wing members 520L, 520R), and in this case,
Since the game ball is not entered into the ball entry hole (second prize entry hole 140), there is a problem that the interest of the player is spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is a pair of bulging portions that protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R and are formed to be able to come into contact with the game balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R. 524L, 524R, and the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are connected to the side surface 526L.
, 526R along the direction in which the game ball is guided, so that the game ball guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L, 526R is placed in the bulging portions 524L, 524.
By making contact with R, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so that the pair of feather members 52
A game ball entering from one side of 0L and 520R can be brought into contact with the swelling portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, one side of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (the feather members 520L and 520R
), the game ball entering from the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (feature member 52
0L, 520R) can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of feather members 520L and 520R arranged on both sides of the second prize winning port 140 and rotatably supported at the proximal end side.
524R protrude from side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R, respectively, and bulge portions 524L, 524R of one of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R and the other wing. Bulging portion 52 in members 520L and 520R
4L and 524R are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, so that the game ball guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R can be By contacting the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

In addition, the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the blade members 520L, 520R on one side and the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the blade members 520L, 520R on the other side overlap the side surfaces 526L, 526
By arranging different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along R (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the feather members 520L and 520R), one feather member 520L
, 520R side surfaces 526L, 526R, the other feather member 520L,
When reaching the side surfaces 5.26L, 526R of 520R, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other feather members 520L, 520R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one feather member 520L and 520R from passing through the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other feather member.
As a result, the game ball is made to enter the second winning hole 140, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In other words, the left and right feather members 520L, 520R are formed with the bulging portions 524L, 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, respectively, so that the game ball rolling from the left and right can be rolled at different positions in the front-rear direction. can be moved. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the time it takes for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140 .

That is, by making the positions at which the game ball collides with different positions in the front-rear direction on the left and right, FIG.
), the game ball on the left that has been pushed to the back side moves to the back side (Fig. 25 (
b) It becomes easier to bounce upward). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side, which has been brought to the front side, tends to rebound to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) due to the collision.

Therefore, one (in the present embodiment, rolling the left wing member 520L) game ball can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140, and the other game ball is bounced back to the front side, so that a collision It is possible to suppress the game ball from being too far away from the second winning hole 140 when the game ball is played. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the entry of the second game ball into the second winning hole 140 later. As a result, when the game balls are thrown to the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time required for the game balls on both sides to enter the second prize winning opening 140 can be shortened, and the progress of the game can be made smooth. can proceed.

In addition, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the proximal side (through hole 521 side) than the tip side of the feather members 520L and 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L and 526R. A rolling area can be secured until the game ball to be played contacts the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, the decrease in rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed accordingly, and the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L and 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the base end side than the distal end sides of the feather members 520L and 520R.
The path of the game ball biased in contact with 24R can be suppressed from returning to the path before bias until it reaches the front of the ball entrance (the terminal end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entrance in the biased state.

In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with the first regions that are continuous from the tip side to the base end side of the feather members 520L and 520R, and the game balls guided in the first regions do not come into contact with each other. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed with the size of
When the game ball that entered the game ball rolls in the first area, it is possible to prevent the rolling speed of the game ball from being lowered, and the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

In this case, one of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (the feather member 520L,
520R) and the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R and the other feather member (
The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the feather members 520L and 520R are arranged in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. , one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R)
The first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the second region and the other feather members (the feather members 520L and 52
0R), each of the side surfaces 526L and 526R is guided (rolled) at the same time, the game balls can be biased in different directions. The ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), left and right feather members 520L and 520R
When the game ball is thrown to either one of the other, the other left and right feather members 520L, 520R
By bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging part 524L or the bulging part 524R, the game ball rolls on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left and right feather members 520L, 520R and is suppressed from falling from the tip. can.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed so as to be connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L, thereby rolling to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be moved toward the bulging portion 524R formed in the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulging portions 524L, 524 formed on the left and right blade members 520L, 520R
Since the R is formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520
Left wing member 520L or right wing member 5 with a game ball that rolls either one of R to the second winning opening side
20R can be rolled (pushed) to a position that coincides with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other side in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled to the back side (pulled together), and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. can be positioned. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball rolls (pulls) to the front side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. can be positioned.

As a result, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is fast, the game ball rolls on the side surface 52 of the other left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R.
Riding on 6L and 526R can be suppressed.

Here, the conventional prize winning port unit 500 includes the side surfaces 526L and 526 of the first electric accessory 520.
Since R is formed on a smooth surface, a game ball thrown from one of the first electric accessories 520 rides on the other feather member 520L, 520R, and flows down from the tip of the other feather member 520L, 520R. There was a problem that the ball was thrown to .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction on the first electric accessory 520, so that the game ball rolling from one feather member is It can be rolled to a position substantially coinciding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other blade member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by making the game ball rolling on one of the feather members 520L and 520R collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other feather member 520L and 520R, the game ball rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526L of the other feather member 520L and 520R. 526R and the feather members 520L, 5
It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown from the tip of 20R to the game area.

Next, the concave portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27(a). Figures 28(a) and 28(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in the range XXVIII of Figure 27(b). In addition, in FIG. 28(a), the first electric accessory 520
is in the first state, and FIG. 28(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portion 511b2 formed on the second projecting portion 511b of the front base 511 engages with the recessed portions 525L and 52 of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R, respectively.
Located inside 5R.

Further, in the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portion 524L of the recessed portions 525L and 525R
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are in contact with each other (see FIG. 28(a)). 524
L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side and the opposite end are in contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 contacts the ends of the concave portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L and 521R causes the corners far from the through holes 521L and 521R of the feather members 520L and 520R to move toward the second winning opening 140 due to their own weight. direction of rotation. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the concave portion 525L
, 525R are in contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the blade members 520L and 520R. It can be held in the first state.

Further, in the first state, the bulging portion 524L of the concave portions 525L and 525R is attached to the engaging portion 511b2.
, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are brought into contact with each other.
The side surfaces of the 20R bulging portions 524L and 524R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, since the rigidity of the abutting portions can be increased by the amount of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, it is possible to prevent the blade members 520L and 520R from coming into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 and being damaged.

That is, in this embodiment, the base member 5 that rotatably supports the feather members 520L and 520R
10, the base member 510 is provided with an engaging portion 511b2 that restricts the rotation of the feather members 520L and 520R by contacting the feather members 520L and 520R, and the base member 5
Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the feather members 520L and 520R are brought into contact with the ten engaging portions 511b2, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, the bulging portions 524L, 5
24R is a portion projecting from the blade members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R).
0, the blade member 52
Damage to 0L and 520R can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the bulging portions 524L and 524R have side surfaces substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the blade members 520L and 520R, and in the closed state, substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the blade members 520L and 520R. The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on one side are at least the base member 510
Since the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 contacts the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (side surface of the bulging portion 524L, 524R) far from the rotation shaft (through holes 521L, 521R)
, the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the blade members 520L and 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Further, for example, the protruding end surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R may be attached to the engaging portion 511 of the base member 510.
The engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is positioned closer to the second winning port 1 than when it is brought into contact with b2.
40, and a space that serves as a flow path to the second winning port 140 can be secured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the proximal side surfaces of the feather members 520L and 520R may also be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 . In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced, and damage to the feather members 520L and 520R can be further suppressed.

When the feather members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged below the standing portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (lower in FIG. 28(a)).
In other words, the erected portion 511b1 is arranged between the opposing bulging portions 524L and 524R.

Here, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L and 524R project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portions 52 are arranged so that the game ball is not caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R.
The pair of blade members 520L and 520R need to be spaced further apart by the height of the projections 4L and 524R, increasing the space required for arranging the pair of blade members 520L and 520R.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the erected portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposed bulging portions 524L and 524R in the closed state, and the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are arranged so that the bulging portion 524L is positioned as viewed in the direction of the rotation shaft. , 524R are not formed, the interval between the side surfaces 526L and 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between the bulging portions 524L and 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

That is, in a state in which the game ball is guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L, 526R, even if the pair of feather members 520L, 520R begin to close (even if they start to shift to the closed state), the bulging portion 524
By positioning the erected portion 511b1 between the opposing L and 524R, the game ball
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R by ejecting the game ball from the opposing space of the 524R. The game ball discharged from between the facing portions of the swelling portions 524L and 524R by the standing portion 511b1 is placed on the side surfaces 526L and 526L in the area where the swelling portions 524L and 524R are not formed.
26R, the facing distance at such position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, so the game ball is not caught (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the facing interval between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for disposing the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of feather members 520L, 520R can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for arrangement of conventional products that do not protrude the bulging portions 524L, 524R from the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L521R rotates the corners of the blade members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R downward in the gravity direction due to their own weight. be done. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portions 525L and 525R
By abutting the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) and the opposite end, the blade members 520L, 520R can be prevented from rotating under their own weight, and the blade members 520L, 520R can be prevented from rotating by their own weight. can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the displacement of the feather members 520L and 520R is restricted by the driving portion 533d and the protrusion 5 described above.
23L, 523R, so that the driving portion 533d and the projection 523L
, 523R can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the rotating member 533 because there is no need to increase the size of the parts in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533 . As a result, the size of the drive unit 530 can be reduced.

In the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is positioned below the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the second prize winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. The game ball guided to 526R can be thrown to the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 (FIG. 28(b)). )reference).

Furthermore, as described above, the second protruding portion 511b has the feather members 520L and 520R side (second
A base member 511f having an LED for emitting light is arranged on the winning opening 140 side. Figure 28
As shown in (a), in the first state, the concave portions 525L and 525R are positioned downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f is transmitted to the blade members 520L and 520R.
can be easily incident on the inside of the

That is, by irradiating the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R with LED light, the feather member 5
It is possible to suppress the reflection of the LED light on the outer surfaces of 20L and 520R. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for light to enter the interior of the feather members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the feather members 520L, 52
It is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the inside of 0R to the player side. As a result, it is possible to make the feather members 520L and 520R easily visible to the player even when the front base 511 made of a transparent material is interposed.

Further, when the feather members 520L and 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. 28(b), the concave portions 525L and 525R are positioned substantially at the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole 140 can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned substantially at the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, so that the gap between the opposed first electric accessories 520 can be increased. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole is moved to the base member 511
It is possible to make it easier to irradiate with the LED of f. As a result, the player can easily see the game ball entering the second winning hole 140 even through the front base 511 made of a transparent material.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the winning opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the prize winning unit 500 is arranged with a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76 .

Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first out port 71 is formed for recovering game balls flowing down the conventional game area. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is curved with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to facilitate gathering of game balls.
6a is formed.

Therefore, the prize winning port unit 500 and the inner rail 76 are the lower end portion of the inner reel (the curved portion 76).
The gap is increased at the portion where a is formed). As described above, the winning opening unit 5
00, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are connected by obliquely inserting a screwdriver or the like into the concave portion 511b3 from below the front base 511. As shown in FIG.

The through-hole 511b4 is formed in the second protruding portion 511b that is formed substantially in the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 is positioned above the curved portion 76a (upper part of FIG. 29).
can be positioned at Therefore, when a screwdriver or the like is obliquely inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511, the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a
Since the gap between the front base 511 and the rear base 51
2 can be easily attached and detached.

In addition, since the inner rail 76 makes it difficult for the player to see the inside of the recessed portion 511b3, the player's interest is reduced when the player sees the screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the rear base 512. can be suppressed.

Next, the decorative design display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36. FIG.

First, the configuration of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. FIG. 30(a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG. 30(b) is a
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device 800 taken along line XXXb-XXXb of (a); Figure 31
is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG.
0 is an exploded perspective rear view of FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a front view in which the inner reel 811 is developed,
FIG. 33(b) is a front view in which the outer reel 821 is developed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative pattern display device 800 includes a rotatable inner reel unit 810, an outer reel unit 820 accommodating part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. and an accommodation unit 880 that accommodates an outer reel unit 820 therein; a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the accommodation unit 880 and drives the inner reel unit 810;
0 and a backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel unit 810. As shown in FIG.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed on one end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (left side in FIG. 30(a)), and an annular member 813 arranged on the other end side of the opening (on the right side in FIG. 30(a)).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a strip-shaped sheet made of transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 has its longitudinal direction oriented vertically, and decorative patterns are arranged at regular intervals. The inner reels 811 of the three decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side have different decorative patterns.

The rotating member 812 includes a hub 812a formed in a substantially disk shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape having a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and connecting the outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and the inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. It is formed primarily with spokes 812c that engage.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have their respective axes formed in the same straight line, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are axially inclined toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812 b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached on its outer peripheral surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the inner reel 811 . In other words, the circumferential dimension of the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set substantially equal to the longitudinal dimension of the unfolded inner reel 811 . Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) to the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without gaps.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811 . That is, hub 812a and rim 81
The spokes 812c connecting with 2b are formed so as to be inclined toward the other end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (annular member 813 to be described later) as it goes radially inward. This will
A hub 812 a can be placed inside the inner reel 811 . In addition, spoke 812c
are formed from a plurality of rods extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and have inner openings 812c1 that open between circumferentially adjacent spokes 812c.

The position of the hub 812a in the axial direction is substantially the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Thereby, a space on the side of the annular member 813 can be secured from the hub 812a. A driving motor KM1 that imparts rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

The drive motor KM1 has a thickness dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 that is approximately half the axial dimension of the inner reel 811 . As described above, the hub 812a is located at substantially the same position in the axial direction as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Since the space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be arranged inside the inner reel 811 . As a result, the inner reel unit 81
0 and the dimension of the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotary shaft arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a.
That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As mentioned above,
Since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the drive motor K
The rotation of M1 allows the inner reel 811 to rotate about the axis of the inner reel 811 . As a result, the pattern decorated on the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized by the player as being displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape with an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (the right side in FIG. 30(a)) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin sheet as described above,
Relatively low stiffness. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force, wind pressure, etc. of the rotation, and the player may not be able to accurately recognize the patterns decorated around it.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inner reel 811 has the rim 81 of the rotating member 812 on one end side.
2b is connected, and the annular member 813 is connected to the other end side, so that when the inner reel unit 810 rotates, it becomes difficult to displace due to the centrifugal force and wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the pattern decorated around the inner reel 811 .

In addition, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the inner reel 811
1 can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when rotating the inner reel unit 810 can be reduced. As a result, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be started smoothly.

The outer reel unit 820 includes a cylindrical outer reel 821 and an outer reel 82 .
A disc-shaped hub 823 with a diameter smaller than 1, spokes 82 connecting the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 on one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left side in FIG. 30(a)) and the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.
2.

The outer reel 821 has an inner diameter larger than the outer shape of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811 . The inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. The outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the description of the decoration mode will be given later.

The hub 823 has its axis arranged coaxially with the outer reel 821 and
is arranged at a substantially central position in the axial direction of the . Further, the hub 823 is connected with a driving motor KM2 that imparts rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 .

The spokes 822 are formed so as to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823 .
0(a) left side). Also, the spokes 822 are
23 to an edge 824, and has an opening 822a between adjacent spokes 822 in the circumferential direction.

The drive motor KM2 has a thickness dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 that is approximately half the axial dimension of the outer reel 821 . As described above, the hub 823 is axially positioned at
It is positioned substantially at the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction, and a space is formed on one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left in the left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)). can be placed inside the As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the lateral direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The accommodation unit 880 is formed in a box-like body with an open front side, and can accommodate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The accommodation unit 880 includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 881 and an upper wall portion 8 disposed at the edge portion between the pair of side wall portions 881 facing each other.
82 , a lower wall portion 883 and a rear wall portion 884 .

The side wall portion 881 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side. lateral direction) is smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum.

In the side wall portion 881, a drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is arranged on the right side (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)).
A drive motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is arranged on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the a) right side. That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are
It is rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881 .

Further, the side wall portion 881 has a bulging portion 881 a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. As a result, light emitted from a backlight unit 830 (to be described later) can be prevented from escaping from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811 .

Moreover, the side wall portion 881 is formed of a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the housing unit 880 can be increased. In addition, the heat generated inside the housing unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the housing unit 880 by forming the housing unit 880 from a metal material that generally has a higher thermal conductivity than a resin material. As a result, heat accumulates inside the housing unit 880,
Prevents parts from breaking.

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the housing unit 880. The upper portion (FIG. 30(b) upper portion) of the side wall portion 881 and the lower portion (FIG. 30(b) bottom) edge and along each edge.

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is formed smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). As a result, the distance dimension between the opposed side wall portions 881 can be ensured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposed sides.

In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 so as to penetrate in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821 . Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and the outside of the housing unit 880 can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from accumulating inside the housing unit 880 and to prevent the parts from being damaged by the heat of the housing unit 880 .

The rear wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface of the accommodation unit 880 on the rear side, and is arranged along the edge of the side wall portion 881 on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)).

The rear wall portion 884 has an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position that intersects the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 30(b)). and a standing portion 884b that is bent and erected toward the front side.

The width of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. This can prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the rear wall portion 884 when the outer reel 821 moves (rocks) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, or the like.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is moved (swayed) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, etc., a part of the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the outer reel 821 is opened 884a can be inserted inside the As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884 .

In addition, the opening 884a can increase air flow between the inside and the outside of the storage unit 880 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat from remaining inside the housing unit 880 and to prevent the parts from being damaged by the heat of the housing unit 880 .

Here, an opening 884 larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is formed in the rear wall portion 884 .
If a is formed, the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a is lowered. As a result, the rear wall portion 884 may bend.

Further, in this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 adjacent to the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the side walls 881 facing each other.
There is a problem that the unit itself of the decorative pattern display device 800 becomes large.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, standing portions 884b are formed on both left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. Thereby, the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, bending of the rear wall portion 884 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rear wall portion 884 is made of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right ends of the opening 884a to the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 is sufficiently small. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 . As a result, rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inside of the inner reel 811 so that the player can easily recognize the pattern of the inner reel 811 , and is arranged inside the front of the inner reel 811 .

The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is the inner reel 8 .
11 and coaxially. Further, the axial width dimension of the backlight unit 830 is set to be substantially the same as the axial width dimension of the inner reel 811 .

In addition, the length dimension L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length corresponding to three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, which will be described later.

Further, the backlight unit 830 has a concave portion 831 formed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface.
are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction. Therefore, partition plates 832 are formed between the concave portions 831 so as to stand radially outward of the backlight unit 830 .

A base member 833 having an LED that emits light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each concave portion 831 , and the LED can emit light outward in the radial direction of the backlight unit 830 .

Power can be supplied to each base member 833 independently, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in an area (recessed portion 831) surrounded on four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 enters the area on the front surface of the other base member 833. can be suppressed. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be made easier to partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed, and FIG. 33(b)
4 is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 is provided with a plurality of patterns drawn at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). As described above, the circumferential dimension L5 of one pattern is set to one third of the circumferential dimension L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5×3=L4).

In addition, the inner reel 811 is made of a material that can transmit light as a whole. In particular, the pattern portion (for example, the display of "7") has a higher light transmittance than the surrounding blank portion. Therefore, the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811
By irradiating light from the inner reel 811, the light from the LED can be transmitted through the inner reel 811 and the pattern portion can be highlighted. Therefore, if the LED of the backlight unit 830 is in a light-emitting state, the inner reel 811 is illuminated even if the inner reel 811 is not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, 10 patterns of 5 types are continuously drawn in the circumferential direction, and up to 3 patterns can be visually recognized from the player side by the segment display device 600, which will be described later. As described above, each decorative pattern display device 800 is decorated with different patterns, and the player can see up to nine patterns.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3×3 symbols on the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 jackpot effective lines, 3 parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 crossed in the diagonal direction. be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a big win state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the outer reel 821 has a non-decorated surface 821a that is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorated surface 821a is not decorated, so that light can be transmitted therethrough. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (a transparent resin material in this embodiment), a non-decorative surface 821a that allows light to pass through is formed. In addition, the non-decorative surface 821a may be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, it may be provided with a translucent decoration capable of transmitting light.

The decorative pattern display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 to display the non-decorative surface 821a.
facing the player side, the player can visually recognize the pattern of the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821 . That is, the player can visually recognize the pattern of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821. FIG.

The non-transmissive surface 821b is made non-transmissive to light by applying a black decoration to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 33(b)). The non-transmissive surface 821b is formed such that its length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) is equal to or greater than three patterns decorated on the inner reel 811. As shown in FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols of the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, the length in the circumferential direction of the non-transmissive surface 821b is equal to or more than three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, so that the outer reel unit 820 is rotated and the outer reel 82
By arranging one non-transmissive surface on the player side, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 invisible from the player side.

In addition, the length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is equal to the length of the pattern 3 decorated on the inner reel 811.
The length in the circumferential direction is not limited to one minute or more, and it is sufficient that the length in the circumferential direction is such that the decoration of the inner reel 811 cannot be visually recognized from the player side. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed for the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that can be visually recognized from the player side.

In addition, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive area 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a pattern 821b2 decorated with a pattern.

The transmissive region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmissive area 821b1 is a part that performs 7-segment display by being combined with a segment display device 600, which will be described later, and can partially transmit light passing through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This can form part of a 7-segment display, which will be described later.

The pattern 821b2 is formed with a length in the circumferential direction corresponding to three patterns to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and each pattern 821b2 of each decorative pattern display device 800 is horizontally aligned in parallel with the outer reel. By stopping 821, the player can be taught that a jackpot condition has occurred.

Further, as described above, since the periphery of the pattern 821b2 is non-transmissive, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to stop the symbols of the inner reel 811 on the effective line while providing an effect in which three symbols of the symbols 821b2 are aligned. Therefore, the outer reel 8
21, after making the player look at the outer reel 821, the player can be made to look at the inner reel 811 almost at the same time when the performance of the outer reel 821 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, referring to FIGS. 34 to 36, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 8
20 will be explained. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device 800 taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative design display device 800 in the range XXXV of FIG. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. In addition, the distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 projecting radially from one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 (left side in FIG. 34) is a predetermined distance. A gap is formed.

A hub 812 a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812 a 1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 . The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on extensions of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the projection 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a rotatably formed first reel (outer reel unit 820),
A second reel (inner reel unit 810) disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820) and rotatably formed (that is, having a double reel structure) ) gaming machines are known. Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. there is

However, the double reel structure has the problem of being difficult to clean. Namely
In the double reel structure, a space for disposing the rotating brush described above is secured between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)). Therefore, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the opposing space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is narrowly formed, in order to remove the dust that has entered and adhered to the opposing space, it is necessary to remove the decorative pattern display. Cleaning is difficult because the device 800 must be disassembled.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the projection 812a1 can push out air to generate wind. The pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In this case, the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other is narrower than the space on the inner peripheral side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. 824
And it can flow from the space on the inner peripheral side of the hub 812a to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, in the present embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 is the outer reel 82 formed in a cylindrical shape.
1 and an edge portion 824 projecting radially inward from one axial side of the outer reel 821,
The inner reel unit 810 includes an inner reel 811 which is formed in a cylindrical shape and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval. and a hub 812a whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the edge portion 824 with a predetermined distance therebetween.
1 is erected, the protrusion 812a1 is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can flow. As a result, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the edge portion 824 or the hub 812a, or if a part of the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are separated. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the projection 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes through the openings and the divided portions, weakening the wind pressure and causing the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 to flow accordingly. difficult to let go.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by the protrusion 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction between the can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the protrusion 81 is positioned between the inner surface of the rim 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a.
The air pressure generated by the displacement of 2a1 in the circumferential direction can be used to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 .

In addition, the distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is partially narrowed in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811 by the projection 812a1. Therefore, the projection 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. Therefore, the change in atmospheric pressure can be used to facilitate the generation of wind, and the wind is caused to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other. Dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

To explain in detail, air has a property of flowing from a high pressure side to a low pressure side, and the projection 812a
The air pressure can be partially increased by narrowing the distance between the protruding tip of 1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 . Therefore, the inner reel 811 is less susceptible to changes in atmospheric pressure.
and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are lower than the air pressure between the protruding tip of the projection 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As a result, the air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and the adhesion of dust to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the projecting tip of the projection 812a1 and the edge 824 can be increased, displacement (wobble) of the projection 812a1 toward the edge 824 or toward the projection 812a1 can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Also, the spokes 822 supporting the edge 824 and the spokes 81 supporting the hub 812a
Since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in 2c, the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is discharged to the outside through the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. It can be evacuated (or externally drawn air between the inner surface of rim 824 and the outer surface of hub 812a). That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be easily flowed (outflow or inflow) accordingly. As a result, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are brought into contact with each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the circumferential displacement of the standing portion between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Allows air to flow easily.

Furthermore, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820), and the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) are provided. Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the outer opening 825, the effect of reducing the flow resistance by sucking (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily exhibited. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 in which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other in which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. , the air flow (exhaust or intake) resistance through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed slightly radially outwardly inclined (expanded in diameter) from the edge portion 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected toward the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to easily send the air that has flowed from one end side to the opposite end side between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped. sticking can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the inclination angle θ1 of the spokes 812c radially outward from the axis of the inner reel 811 is made larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the spokes 822 radially outward from the axis of the outer reel 821 (
θ1>θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) that overlaps in the axial direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 34), they face outward in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 34). The dimension in between is increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the difference in the distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 causes the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to rotate. It is possible to easily generate the wind toward the space facing the inner peripheral surface of the.

More specifically, the distance between the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 facing each other increases toward the radially outer side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 . Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. made high.

As described above, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form an air flow from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion. That is, an air flow can be formed from the axial side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the side between the hub 812a and the edge portion 824 facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily supply air to the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 . As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In addition, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of patterns are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. - 特許庁In this case, the inner reel unit 810
In other words, the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more than the outer reel unit 820, has a protrusion 812a1. In the performance by rotating the unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

By rotating the inner reel unit 810, the timing of cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is not operated by the player (the game ball is not launched into the game area). , preferably when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, the switching of the symbols of the inner reel 811 can attract the interest of the player.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing the effect of rotationally displacing the non-transmissive surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player side. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player, cleaning can be performed without the player visually confirming the cleaning state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest. In addition, since it can be done during the game state, even when the game continues for a predetermined time, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust such as dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63. FIG.
First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L arranged on the left side in front view, a vertical displacement unit 600R arranged on the right side in front view,
A vertical displacement unit 600C arranged between the left and right vertical displacement units 600L and 600R
are horizontally arranged side by side, and the connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the rear side.

Since the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R have substantially the same configuration, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side in the front view will be described below, and the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R will be described. A detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG.
FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

40 and 41 illustrate a mode in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable and the first segment units 6 disposed on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650.
10 and a second segment unit 620 .

The first segment unit 610 is a unit capable of displaying one segment in the horizontal direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit capable of displaying two segments in the horizontal direction. be. Also, since the first segment unit 610 is formed by halving the second segment unit 620 in the horizontal direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below.
The reference numerals in the configuration of the second segment unit 620 are given to the first segment unit 610 in the same manner.

The vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are formed with different arrangement of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, respectively.
In 0C, the second segment unit 620 is arranged only on the right side in front view, and the vertical displacement unit 610
R has a second segment unit 620 on the right side in front view.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front and two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. In addition, the vertical displacement unit 600C is
Two segments can be displayed only on the right side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600
L can display one segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. That is, it is possible to adopt a mode in which one segment is formed on both left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. Figure 42 (
a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42(b) is a view of the second segment unit 6
20 is a rear view of FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG.
4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmission member 621 arranged on the front side, a partition member 622 arranged on the rear surface of the light transmission member 621, and a partition member 622 , a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. formed by

The light transmitting member 621 is made of a translucent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light-transmitting member 621 mainly includes a light-transmitting portion 621a formed in an arcuate plate-like shape that protrudes toward the front side, and a planar portion 621b that is continuously formed above and below the light-transmitting portion 621a. be.

The light-transmitting portion 621a includes standing walls 621a1 standing on the back side from the left and right ends, fastening portions 621a2 projecting annularly from the top and bottom ends to the back side, and vertical direction at the center position on the front side. and a decorative portion 621a3 continuously recessed on the back side.

The erected walls 621a1 are erected from the left and right ends of the light transmitting portion 621a toward the back side. The dimension between the standing walls 621a1 facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622, which will be described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving left and right.

The fastening portion 621a2 is a projection that forms a hole for fastening a reflective member 625, which will be described later, with a screw, and is annularly projected from the back side of the light transmission portion 621a. Therefore, the fastening portion 621a2
The reflecting member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw into the inner edge of the .

As described above, the decoration portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the center position of the light transmission portion 621a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light transmitted through the left side in front view from being reflected inside the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side in front view. A detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be given later.

The plane portion 621b is a plate member for fastening with a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650, which will be described later. The plane portion 621b is formed in a plate-like body that has substantially the same shape as the base member 660 when viewed from the front. can do.

In addition, elastic pieces 621b1 projecting to the opposite side are formed on the flat portion 621b. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed so as to protrude from opposite side surfaces of the pair of upper and lower flat portions 621b, and protrude in a curved shape that is convex toward the front side. In addition, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape with a radius smaller than that of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the projecting tip of the elastic piece 621b1
0, the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall portion 883 of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, the vibration of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be suppressed.

The partition member 622 is made of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is shaped like a curved plate when viewed from the side. The radius of the curved outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is equal to that of the light transmitting portion 6
21a, and the width in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 42) is set smaller than the vertical width of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 can be placed in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

In front view, the partition member 622 has first recessed portions 622a recessed toward the center from both left and right (left and right in FIG. 42) and recessed toward the center from upper and lower (up and down in FIG. 42) end faces. It mainly includes a second recessed portion 622b provided and a projecting portion 622c projecting from the left-right central position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed on both sides of the left and right sides in the vertical direction. That is, four first recessed portions 622 a are formed in the partition member 622 .

The second recessed portion 622b is recessed from both upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposed ends of the second recessed portion 622b is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the fastening portions 621a2 formed in the light transmitting member 621 in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting member 621, by inserting the fastening portion 621a2 inside the second concave portion 622b,
The vertical movement of the partition member 622 can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 622c is formed at the center position of the partition member 622 in the left-right direction so as to extend in the vertical direction. In addition, the projecting portion 622c has a recessed portion 622c1 recessed in the projecting distal end surface thereof. The recessed portion 622c1 is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 in the partition member 622, the concave portion 62
The tip side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside 2c1. As a result, when arranging the base member 624, the base member 624 can be positioned, and movement of the base member 624 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

The diffusion member 623 is made of a cloudy resin material, and can diffuse the light that enters inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a curved plate shape when viewed from the side, and its outer peripheral portion (
The radius of the front side) is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622 .
Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be placed on the rear side of the partition member 622 while being grounded.

Two diffusing members 623 are vertically arranged side by side, and two diffusing members 623 are horizontally spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the rear side of the partition member 622 .

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the standing wall 621a1 of the light transmission member 621 and the projecting portion 622c of the partition member 622 facing each other. As a result, when the diffusing member 623 is arranged on the rear side of the partition member 622, the diffusing member 623 can be prevented from moving to the left or right.

Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed with a projecting portion 623a projecting to the front side and a recessed portion 623b recessed on the rear side of the projecting portion 623a.

The protruding portion 623a is protrudingly formed at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. is set. As a result, when the diffusion member 623 is arranged on the back side of the partition member 622, the partition member 622 can be prevented from being displaced in the horizontal and vertical directions.

Also, the projection distance of the projecting portion 623 a is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622 . That is, it is arranged in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed between the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 623a and the rear surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b is located on the opposite side of the projecting portion 623a (on the back side of the diffusion member 623).
It is recessed into a shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of 3a. is formed. As a result, the plate thickness of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when the diffusion member 623 is molded can be suppressed. In addition, the concave portion 623b is formed in a shape slightly smaller than the projecting portion 623a, so that the area of the rear side of the end portion of the projecting portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LEDs 624a, which will be described later, at the ends of the projecting portions 623a. As a result, the form of the light visually recognized by the player through the diffusing member 623 can be made clearer, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

The base member 624 is formed of a crescent-shaped plate having a curved front side, and includes an LED 624a that emits light to the side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the recessed tip surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622 . Therefore, the base member 62
4 on the rear surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is placed in the recess 6 of the partition member 622.
By inserting it inside 22c1, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

A plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged on both left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and their irradiation directions are
It is perpendicular to the sides of the base member 624 . That is, the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 624a is
left-right direction. A detailed description of the irradiation of light from the LED 624a will be given later.

One reflecting member 625 is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624 . Reflective member 6
25 is made of a white resin material and formed in an arcuate shape convex to the front side. Also, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the diffusing member 623 . As a result, when the reflecting member 625 is arranged on the rear side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

The reflecting member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is separated from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side to the front side, and has an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side to the front side. A plurality of recessed portions 625b are formed in the front side of the body in a row in the vertical direction, and wall portions 62 are formed in the upper end, the lower end and the intermediate portion of the recessed portion 625b so as to protrude toward the front side.
5c.

The front side of the inclined portion 625 a is a reflecting surface 625 a 1 that reflects the light from the LED 624 a of the base member 624 toward the front side, and is formed at an angle of approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 .
As described above, the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 624a is perpendicular to the side surfaces of the base member 624. Therefore, the reflecting surfaces 625a1 are formed to be inclined with respect to the side surfaces of the base member 624, so that the LEDs 624a The light emitted from can be reflected to the front side. In addition, L
The manner in which light travels through the ED 624a will be described later.

The concave portion 625b is formed by concavely forming a convex curved shape on the back side. In addition, the concave portion 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, so that the amount of light from the LED 624a that is visually recognized by the player through the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, progress of light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). In addition, in FIG. 45, a part of the mode of the light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. In addition, the outer shape of the decorative design display device 800 arranged on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle). can be reflected in the outside direction. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed of a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the side opposite to the reflecting surface 625a1 (the rear side of the reflecting member 625)
space can be increased. Thereby, the end portion of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged on the back side of the second segment unit 620 .

Here, a rotation (decorative pattern display device 800) that is formed rotatably and is arranged side by side at a predetermined interval (decorative pattern display device 800), and at least one A decorative member (light-transmitting member 621) having a light-transmitting part, and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and having a plurality of light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) mounted thereon. A game machine is known in which a board is arranged in such a manner that the surface on which the means is mounted is substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. According to this gaming machine, the decorative member not only shields the space between the spinning drums from the player, but also forms (displays) a pattern on the surface of the decorative member by the light emitted by the light-emitting means transmitted through the decorative member. An effect can be performed in which the pattern of the decorative member is visually recognized by the player integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the board is arranged so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently transmitted to the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 624 a passes through the light transmitting member 62 .
1, even if the base member 624 is arranged in such a manner that the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621,
It is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 by the light emitted from the LED 624a. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the LED 624a can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the LED 624a can be enlarged, the area excluding the pattern can be reduced.
and a sense of unity with the decorative pattern display device 800 can be formed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800, and extends the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800 in a front view. Since it is formed to extend, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player. In addition, since the design of the light transmission member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative design display device 800 can be made closer, the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can easily form a sense of unity.

Furthermore, the reflection member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LEDs 624a are mounted and the back surface of the light transmission member 621, so that the area of the base member 624 on which the LEDs 624a are mounted and the pattern of the light transmission member 621 are formed. , and the back surface of the reflecting member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative design display device 800 as it goes from the light transmitting member 621 toward the base member 624, so that the light emitted from the LED 624a While securing the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by, the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the decorative pattern display device 800 is positioned on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. It can be made to enter the back side (the decorative design display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized), and the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily blocked.
It is easy to form a sense of unity with

In addition, since the LEDs 624a are mounted on both one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on one side surface and the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on the other side surface The light-transmitting member 62 has different patterns depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.
1 can be independently formed (denoted).

In this case, the base member 624 arranged between the decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side
can be set to one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the base member 624 can be reduced, the decorative pattern display device 800 is inserted into the rear side of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (
(decorative design display 800 may be proximate to base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Furthermore, as described above, the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle). can be reflected in the outside direction. As a result, (the reflecting surface 625a1
The reflective member 625 can be made smaller than when it is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 . Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, so that the sense of unity between the light transmission member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of base member 624. FIG. Figure 47 shows the XL of Figure 42(a)
7 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 along line VII-XLVII. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape when viewed from the side, and can irradiate light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle .theta.1 in the circumferential direction around an axis that is substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. As shown in FIG. This allows the LED 624
The heat accumulated in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the LEDs 624a due to partial heating of the base member 624 .

In this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed in the circumferential direction. Also, LE
D 624 a is arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface formed in a square is aligned with the tangential direction of the curved shape of the base member 624 .

Here, conventionally, a substrate (substrate member 62
4) and a transmission member (light transmission member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means, the transmission member (light transmission portion 621a of the light transmission member 621) is formed in a curved shape, and a plurality of A gaming machine is known in which light emitting means are arranged along the curvature of a transmissive member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at regular intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the game machine described above, since the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrow in some of the plurality of light emitting means, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. As a result, heat tends to concentrate on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the intervals between adjacent LEDs 624a can be made constant, and the LEDs 624a
The distribution of heat generated by 4a can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on some of the LEDs 624a, thereby extending the life of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one concave portion 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. In addition, the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at the inclination angle θ1. Therefore, the vertical interval between the LEDs 624a is narrower on the central side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than on the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center side in the vertical direction becomes darker), and the light is uniformly visible to the player. I had a problem that I couldn't.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the light transmitting portion 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front. will be arranged in That is, in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a narrow area and a wide area are formed between the LEDs 624a. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reflecting member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a is provided, and the reflecting member 625 includes a plurality of concave portions 625b partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. and the light-transmitting portions 62 of the plurality of recesses 625b
Since the division widths of 1a when viewed from the front are set to be substantially the same, the amount of light of each concave portion 625b which is visually recognized when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front can be substantially the same. As a result, multiple LEDs 624
The distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of a can be made uniform.

That is, since the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same, the illumination of one LED 624a causes the player to The area of the light emitted to the side can be substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light emitted toward the player from increasing toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly viewed by the player.

In addition, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) when viewed from the front, for example,
Compared to the case where the light-emitting surface is circular, light diffusion can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), so that the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one concave portion 625b.

In addition, the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the shape of the encapsulating resin (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least some of the plurality of LEDs 624a have one side of the light emitting surface as the light transmitting portion 621a.
, the light emitted from the LED 624a can be easily and uniformly diffused along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

Further, the concave portion 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.
21a and the concave portion 625b, the base member 624 faces the light transmitting portion 621a.
can be arranged in an orthogonal posture. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit composed of the light transmission portion 621a, the base member 624 and the reflection member 625 can be increased. In this case, the LED 624
Since the recesses 625b are arranged in a manner to surround the periphery of the light emitted from the light emitting surface of a from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the recesses 625b is uniformly directed to the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. can be incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the mode of light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In addition, in FIG. 48, LED6
The light emitted by 24a is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line, and is illustrated with the reference numeral of the illumination region SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 61
0 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Further, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation regions SR1 arranged vertically and horizontally in 2×2. In addition, the irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, both the left and right sides of the number can be displayed by the 7-segment display by the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620. FIG. Note that the top, bottom, and center of numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG.
49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 49 and 50 show a disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 pivotally supported by the base member 660 and rotationally displaceable, and a displacement member 670 provided on the base member 660. and a drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed of a pair of right and left plate members having a space in the center larger than that of the decorative pattern display device 800 described above. The first segment unit 610 is arranged on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side in front view, and the second segment unit 620 is arranged on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side in front view. Note that the base members 660 are arranged upside down and left to right, and in this embodiment, only the left base member 660 in front view will be described, and the description of the left base member 660 in front view will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and has a protruding portion 661 that protrudes in a convex shape from the side surface on the front side to the front side. Also, the base member 66
0 passes through a through hole 662 for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM3 disposed at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction, and connecting rods 681 disposed at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. through hole 66
3, a recess 664 in which a displacement member 670 (to be described later) is pivotally supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arcuate opening centering on the axis of the recess 664, and an engagement projecting above and below the recess 664 to the venue. A portion 666 is mainly provided.

The protruding portion 661 has a radius of the protruding tip set smaller than the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and its curved axis is set substantially on the same straight line as the curved axis of the reflecting member 625 . Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to suppress contact between the projecting portion 661 and the reflecting member 625, and the heat of the base member 624 is It is possible to suppress intrusion between the opposing base members 660 . As a result, the decorative pattern display device 8 arranged inside the opposing base member 660
00 temperature rise and breakage of the driving motors KM1 and KM2 that rotate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be suppressed.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and a gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. set. Therefore, the driving motor KM3 can be arranged on the base member 660 while the gear 682 is connected to the driving motor KM3. Note that the drive motor KM3
are attached to the base member 660 from the facing side of the base member 660 arranged to face each other.

The through-holes 662 are holes into which connecting rods 681 of the driving means 680 described later are inserted, are formed larger than the external shape of the connecting rods 681 , and are formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660 .

The concave portion 664 is formed by recessing in a circular shape outward from the opposing side of the base member 660 . The concave portion 664 is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connecting projection 671b of a displacement member 670, which will be described later. As a result, the connecting projection 671b can be inserted and arranged inside the recess 664 .

The sliding groove 665 is formed by inserting the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 so that the displacement member 67
0 and a driving means 680 disposed outside the pair of base members 660 can be connected. again,
By inserting the connecting projection 671b into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposing side of the base member 660 so that the tip thereof has a clearance larger than the diameter of the opposing side surface of the base member 660 and one end of the torsion spring SP1, which will be described later.
As a result, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666 .

The displacement members 670 are arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts in opposite directions. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extension member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the other end of the extension member 671 .

The extension members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape and arranged in pairs in opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end on the long side, a connecting projection 671b protruding left and right at a substantially central position on the long side in the longitudinal direction, and the shaft support hole 6 from the side surface of the long side.
71a and an elastic member 671f arranged on the side surface of the extension member 671 and made of an elastic material.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the collar C is inserted into the shaft support hole 671a, and the collar C
is screwed to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 , the displacement member 670 can be rotatably connected to the base member 660 .

Further, by arranging the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 coaxially, and inserting the collar C into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastening and fixing it to the base member 660, the upper and lower A displacement member 670 is coaxially rotatably arranged.

Further, the left and right extension members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one shaft support hole 671a. The bulging portion 671a1 has an outer diameter equal to that of the base member 660
is formed slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the concave portion 664 of the . The bulging portions 671 a 1 are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670 .

That is, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the upper displacement member 670, the right shaft support hole 67 of the lower displacement member 670 is formed.
1a is arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671
In a, since the bulge portion 671a1 is formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side is formed in the bulge portion. 67
It is in a state of being arranged inside 1a1 (see FIG. 49).

Accordingly, when disposing the displacement member 670 on the base member 660 , the collar C allows the bulging portion 671 a 1 to be inserted into the recess 664 . As a result, the axial support hole 6 of the displacement member 670
When a force acts in the radial direction of the shaft of 71a, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recessed portion 664 abut against each other, thereby suppressing damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C.

That is, in the present embodiment, the pair of displacement members 670 are coaxially arranged on the base member 660, so the axial length of the collar C is increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement member 6
When a force acts on the rotating shaft 70 in the radial direction, a large force tends to act on the rotating shaft. Therefore, when the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is likely to be damaged, the bulging portion 67
The contact between 1a1 and the recessed portion 664 makes it possible to hold the force acting on the rotation axis of the displacement member 670 in the radial direction. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

A through-hole 671d1 is formed in the projection 671d so as to extend through the extension member 671 in the longitudinal direction. The through-hole 671d1 is a hole through which torsion springs SP1 and SP2, which will be described later, are inserted therein, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is arranged on the side surface of the extension member 671 on the side of the displacing member 670, which is arranged as a pair of upper and lower members to be described later, in the direction in which they approach each other. In addition, when the upper and lower extension members 671 are arranged at positions close to each other, the size is set so that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f contact each other. This makes it possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to the adjacent positions.

The drive means 680 is means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670. As shown in FIG.
The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682, and a rod-shaped body having one end connected to a side surface of the large-diameter gear 683.
A first link member 684 whose other end is connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 that transmits power to the opposite side through the base member 660, and a cam member 685 that is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates. and a second link member 686 formed in a rod-like body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670 .

The gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 as described above, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a projection 683b that protrudes annularly from the side surface in the rotation axis direction. formed by Since the gear surface 683a of the large-diameter gear 683 meshes with the gear 682,
It is rotated by rotating the gear 682 . That is, it is rotated by the drive motor KM3 being rotationally driven.

The protrusion 683 b is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the large-diameter gear 683 . Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The first link member 684 is formed in a rod-like body, and through holes 684a and 684b are formed in both ends thereof so as to penetrate in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683 is inserted.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of b. A protrusion 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a. state can be connected.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting projection 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 684b, and the tip of the connecting projection 671b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. can be connected in good condition.

Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced about the rotational axis of the large-diameter gear 683 as the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated. The first link member 684 to which one end is connected is displaced, and the first link member 684
The displacement member 670 connected to the other end of is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted through an insertion hole 663 of a base member 660 arranged on the left side in front view, and is internally fitted to the rotating shaft portion of the large-diameter gear 683 . On the other hand, the other end of connecting rod 681 is connected to cam member 685 . Therefore, the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 rotates the connecting rod 681 and the cam member 685. As shown in FIG.

The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and the connecting rod 681 is internally fitted to the shaft portion thereof. In addition, the cam member 685 has a projection 685a projecting outward in an annular shape from its axial side surface.
Prepare. The protrusion 685 a is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685 . Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as that of the first link member 684 that is left-right reversed. The second link member 686 has insertion holes 686a and 686b at both longitudinal ends thereof.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a. can be concatenated with

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting projection 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting projection 671b. The connecting projection 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 686b, and the tip of the connecting projection 671b is fastened with a screw having a larger outer diameter of the head than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. can be connected in good condition.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced around the rotational axis of the cam member 685 as the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced. The connected second link member 686 is displaced, and the second link member 68
6 is displaced.

That is, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, tilting of the displacement member 670 during displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

A detailed description of displacement member 670 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 51-53. Figure 51 (
51(b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. Figure 53 shows the LII of 51(a)
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of displacement member 670 taken along line I-LIII;

The displacement member 670 is formed including the extension member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and the decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671, as described above.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extension member 671 has a plate-like connecting portion 671c on the short side (connecting side of the decorative unit 672). Extension members 67 arranged in a pair on the left and right
A stepped portion 671c1 that partially protrudes in a stepped shape
is formed. The stepped portions 671c1 are alternately formed on the left and right, and the stepped portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. As a result, dimensional errors can be absorbed when the extension member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and that irradiates the player side with light. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 arranged on the back side, a front cover 676 covering the back cover 673 and arranged on the front side of the back cover 673,
It mainly includes a base member 674 disposed between the rear cover 673 and the front cover 676, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676. be done.

The rear cover 673 is formed as a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 671c of the extension member 671 is fastened to the rear side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened.

Further, the rear cover 673 is formed of a resin material that hardly transmits light (impermeable).
The rear cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a recessed on the rear side at a position facing a diffusion member 675, which will be described later.

The reflecting portion 673a is formed along the lower edge of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and the inner surface thereof is coated with a white paint having a high light reflectance. As a result, the light irradiated to the inside of the reflecting portion 673a can be reflected inside the reflecting portion 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the rear cover 673 when viewed from the front, and is arranged in a manner to cover the front side of the rear cover 673 . The front cover 676 is made of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from a first LED 674a and a second LED, which will be described later, to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular plate-like body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674 , a first LED 674 a is arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the lower edge of the base member 674 and emits light toward the diffusion member 675 . and a second LED 674b for illuminating.

The first LED 674a is arranged at a position facing the upper end of the diffusion member 675,
It is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light downward on the base member 674 . As a result, the first LED 674a
It is possible to suppress the light emitted from from entering the lens member 677 described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side through the diffusing member 675 and the light emitted to the front side through the lens member 677, which impairs the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is arranged above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the diffusion member 6
The light of the second LED 674b can be made incident on the lens member 677 disposed above the 75 .

The diffusion member 675 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged at the lower end portion of the front cover 676 on the back side. The diffusion member 675 is made of a cloudy-white resin material capable of diffusing the incident light. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged at the upper end portion of the front cover 676 on the back side. The lens member 677 is made of a transparent resin material, and has a plurality of protrusions (not shown) formed on the back side thereof. This makes it easier for the light emitted from the second LED 674b to enter the interior through the projection on the rear surface side. As a result, the second LED 67
Even if the amount of light emitted from 4b is reduced, the light can be incident on the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the mode of light emitted from the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is two.
It is illustrated with a dotted chain line and is illustrated with the reference numeral of the irradiation region SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the area of the light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is
The lower end of the decoration unit 672 (the front cover 676) has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Since the displacement member 670 is arranged at both upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement member 670
0, an irradiation region SR2 is formed at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore,
The irradiation area SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 enables upper and lower numbers to be displayed by 7-segment display.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the 7-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. 55 and 56 show a state in which the transmissive area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player,
The irradiation region SR1, the irradiation region SR2, and the transmissive region 821b1 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 55, two irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are arranged vertically, and six irradiation regions are arranged horizontally. state.

The irradiation area SR1 is formed as one set of four with the decorative pattern display device 800 interposed therebetween, and three sets of the sets are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Between a pair of irradiation regions SR1, irradiation regions SR2 are arranged above and below, and a transmissive region 821b1 is arranged at a vertical middle position. Therefore, 7
Numbers can be displayed by 7-segment display by the illuminated areas SR1 and SR2 and the transmissive area 821b1 of the book.

As described above, since three sets of four irradiation regions SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, each set forms a seven-segment display. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

Therefore, the 7-segment displays arranged side by side in the left-right direction can be displayed with numbers as effective lines for the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, all the 7-segment displays can be made to display the segment "7"). ) Thereby, not only the big win display by the above-described decorative pattern display device 800 but also the big win display by the 7-segment display can be performed. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize a plurality of display modes, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Here, the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 6 of the segment display device 600
Since the light transmitting portion 621a of 20 is curved in a convex shape toward the front side, when the player visually recognizes the 7-segment display, the display in the vertical central portion closer to the player becomes larger, The display at both ends in the vertical direction farther from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there is a problem that the number display by the 7 segments cannot be visually recognized clearly by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the 7-segment display is formed such that the width dimension in the horizontal direction is gradually increased from the vertical center position toward the upper and lower ends. As a result, the 7-segment display at the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower central positions can be made uniform as a whole. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display of numbers by 7 segments clearly.

Furthermore, the 7-segment display formed on both the left and right sides is formed such that the central portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction. As a result, the player can clearly view the 7-segment display formed on the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally positioned at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. again,
The segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is positioned in front of the seven segments displayed in the center. Therefore, the 7-segment display is visually recognized by the player in a curved manner due to the curved shapes of the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, as it is left and right away from the player's viewpoint. Since the center portion of the 7-segment display is inclined toward the center in the horizontal direction, the 7-segment display is less likely to be viewed in a curved manner from the player's viewpoint. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG.
57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Figure 58 (
a), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 58(b), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. of LVIIIb-LVII
It is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L taken along line Ib.

57(a), 58(a), and 58(b) show a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in the retracted state, and FIGS. 57(b), 59(a), and 59 57(c), 60(a), and 60 (
In b), the displaceable member 670 is shown arranged in an overhanging state.

The retracted state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are separated from each other, and the protruding state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced. A state in which the member 670 abuts at an intermediate position in the vertical direction, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is
This is a state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, at the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state,
The displacement member 670 arranged at the upper side (upper side in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower members has the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 positioned above, so that the shaft support hole 671a is the rotation axis. , the decoration unit 672 is positioned upward.

Also, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above
P1 is engaged with the through-hole 671d1 on the other end side (the side inserted into the through-hole 671d1).
is considered to be the proximal portion of the Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, the displacement member 670 can easily maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670 arranged at the lower side (lower side in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower members is arranged so that the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are positioned downward, thereby
The decoration unit 672 is positioned downward with the rotation axis 71a.

Also, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged below
P2 is engaged with the through-hole 671d1 on the other end side (the side inserted into the through-hole 671d1).
is considered to be the proximal portion of the Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the displacement member 670 can easily displace the decoration unit 672 upward in the gravity direction.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing the decorative units 762, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

From the state shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, when a rotational driving force is applied to the driving motor KM3, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 6
84 and the second link member 686 are displaced to the substantially central position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the insertion holes 684b and 684b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686
The displacement member 670 connected to 86b is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, and FIG.
) and FIG. 59 to the states shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60 .

As shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the position of the intermediate state, the torsion spring S is inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is the intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Also, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side
Similarly to the P2 torsion spring SP1, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (through hole 67
1d1 (the side inserted into 1d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be reduced by the amount of change in the engagement position.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the facing decoration units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

Therefore, from the retracted state in which three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 are displayed in the vertical direction,
The displacement member 670 is placed in an intermediate state in which one side of the figure decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction.
By displacing , a plurality of presentation modes can be formed, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, by adopting a mode in which one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction, one symbol can be focused on by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to clarify the part to be noticed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

As shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring S is inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is the tip position of the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Also, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side
Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the engagement position of P2 with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (through hole 6
71d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

That is, the urging forces of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear according to the displacement of the displacement member 670. FIG. Thereby, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the necessary biasing force is applied to the torsion spring SP1.
, SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the overhanging state, the decoration unit 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is in contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at the middle position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 800, and the decorative design display device 8 is viewed from the player side (front side).
The display of 00 can be made invisible.

Therefore, by setting the displacement member 670 to the extended state, rotationally displacing the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, and then displacing the displacement member 670 to the intermediate state or the retracted state, the symbols are arranged for the player ( It is possible to make it easier to have expectations. As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair on the upper and lower sides are displaced by the same amount. It is also possible to displace only one side of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair up and down to the position of the intermediate state or the extended state.

Also, the maximum amount of displacement of the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower members is not set at the intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. That is, the pair of displacement members 6
It can be displaced up and down with the 70 in contact with it.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are illustrated in order.

In FIGS. 61 to 63, the displacement member 670 disposed above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 are added with U at the end of the reference numerals,
The displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 are described with D at the end of the reference numerals.

As shown in FIG. 61, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes an extension member 671 of the displacement member 670.
are arranged on both the left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 are divided into a driven side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681 and a driving side to which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted by the projection 683b of the large diameter gear 683. connected to each other.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the vertically arranged displacement members 670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the decoration units 672 can be vertically displaced while the sides of the decoration units 672 are in contact with each other. .

Here, the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) formed to be displaceable in the direction of approaching or separating from each other and displaceable in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other. A gaming machine with two displacement members (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to such a game machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposing sides abut against each other, an object (for example, , a liquid crystal display device and a production member), and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. You can perform a production to do. Further, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the shielding of the target is maintained. , it is also possible to perform an effect before the shielding is released (an effect to focus on the action of releasing the shielding).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the presentation effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 and the driving means 6 that displaceably support the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D on the base member 660 are arranged.
80U and driving means 680D, and the driving means 680U is supported by the decoration unit 67
To one side of the opposite side of the decoration unit 672D that is biased to one side of the opposite side of the 2U and is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the decoration unit 672U. Since the supporting manner of the driving means 680D is biased, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, the supporting manner of the driving means 680U and the supporting manner of the driving means 680D are opposite sides ( It can be biased to the side rotated 180° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides. As a result, the decoration unit 67
The opposing sides of 2U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

In this embodiment, since the number of constituent members provided differs between one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction),
The driving forces transmitted to the left and right sides of the decoration unit 672 are different, and the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D can face their high rigidity side (low side) to the counterpart low rigidity side (high side). can. Therefore, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D push (advance) the other on the side with high rigidity and move forward on the side with low rigidity. can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, decoration unit 672U and decoration unit 6
The opposing sides of 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates driving force and a decoration unit 672U.
to the base member, and a first link member 684U and a second link member 686U that transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U and have different configurations. The driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and a driving motor KM3U that drives the pair of extension members 671U. The second link member 686D and the first link member 686D, which respectively transmit forces and have different configurations
Since the link member 684D is provided, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D
The opposing sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D each operate, for example, on the side where the driving force is large or on the side where the driving force is transmitted first. It is possible to form a state in which the opponent is pushed (advance) and the opponent is accepted (retreat) on the side where the driving force is small or on the side where the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The extension member 671U and the extension member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side rotates coaxially with the base member 660. Since it can be pivoted, the decoration unit 672U
When the decoration unit 672D is reciprocated in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, even if the deviation of the support mode is used, the contacting state of the opposing sides can be easily maintained.

Furthermore, the extension member 671U or the extension member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f made of a rubber-like elastic material. Since the body is interposed between the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. Even in the case of using the bias of the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

Further, as described above, the drive means 680U is driven by the drive motor KM3U that generates drive force, and the drive motor KM3U, and the decoration unit 672U is driven by the base member 6.
60 and two torsion springs SP1 for applying different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671U. , a pair of extension members 671D that are driven by the drive motor KM3D and connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671D. , the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D each push (advance) the other on the side where the biasing force is large, for example. A side with less power can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, decoration unit 672U and decoration unit 6
The opposing sides of 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Note that the two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. In other words, the biasing forces applied to the pair of extension members 671U may be different because the positions at which the biasing forces are applied are different from each other or the amounts of elastic deformation are different from each other. The same is true for the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and connect the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and a pair of extension members 671U. and a first biasing member that applies biasing force to one of 671U, and the driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates the driving force.
a pair of extension members 671D that are driven by the drive motor KM3D and connect the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660; member, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the facing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side to which the biasing force is applied. , the side on which the biasing force is not applied can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

As described above, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the extension member 671U and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, so that the decorative unit 672U is connected to the decorative unit 6.
Since the torsion spring SP1 is provided to apply a biasing force in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D, when displacing the decoration unit 672U in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D, the extension member 67
The driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate 1U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the stop position to the abutment position where it abuts on the decoration unit 672D from the retracted position separated from the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be started smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671U is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672U approaches the decoration unit 672D, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the connection position between the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U is rotated. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied is longer, and the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D. power can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D is to be stopped, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. Further, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocation can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocation can be increased. It is possible to improve the performance effect.

On the other hand, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member, and a torsional force is applied in a direction to bring the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U. Equipped with a spring SP2, as the extension member 671D rotates in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D approaches the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other position of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Since at least one of the connection positions between the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP
The torsion spring SP2 has the same effect as in 1. In particular, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, which is particularly effective. In addition, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are arranged at the same height (positioned in the direction of gravity), and the position where they contact is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the position where they are separated from each other. The configuration of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 is particularly effective when the (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the gravitational direction.

Since the decoration unit 672U moves closer to the decoration unit 672D by displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity, the decoration unit 672U moves closer to the decoration unit 672D as the decoration unit 672U moves downward in the direction of gravity.
The biasing force in the direction of displacing 72U upward in the direction of gravity can be strengthened (that is, the decoration unit 6
The higher the position of the decoration unit 672U in the direction of gravity, the weaker the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the decoration unit 672U from the stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and when the raised decoration unit 672U is stopped, can reliably stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage due to collision with the decoration unit 672D can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the urging force is strengthened so that the urging force is made to oppose the action of gravity that attempts to continue the descent. can be done. As a result, it is possible to reliably stop the decoration unit 672U.

A torsion spring SP2, which is formed as a torsion spring, has one leg connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg connected to the base member 660, and imparts a biasing force in the direction of separating the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. , and the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by displacement upward in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) the extension member 671 against
The driving force of the drive motor KM3D required to rotate U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D approaches the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 is connected. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied increases, and the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U (the direction of gravity) is increased. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the upward direction). Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, a rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the projection 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a chevron shape that slopes to both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The formed protrusion 2812a is formed in a curved hemispherical shape. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
64(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). Note that FIG. 64(a) corresponds to FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the outer reel unit 820 is mounted on the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812.
A protrusion 2812a1 protruding toward the edge 824 of is formed. The protrusion 2812a1
12a are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved in a bowl shape. As a result, the inner reel unit 8
When rotating 10, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Also, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 to flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Moreover, since the projection 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved in a bowl shape, it can have higher rigidity than the projection 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
0 or when the outer reel unit 820 is driven to rotate and the tip of the protrusion 2812a1 comes into contact with the spoke 822 of the outer reel unit 820, the protrusion 2812a can be prevented from being damaged.

Next, an outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812, but in the second embodiment, the projection 3824a is formed on the edge 824. FIG. note that,
The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative design display device 800 in the third embodiment, and FIG.
) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66(b) is an L
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along line XVIb-LXVIb;

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, on the edge 824 on the extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820, there is a projection 382 protruding toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810.
4a is formed. The protrusion 3824a is located outside each spoke 3822 (on the outer reel 821 side).
Formed at the end.

The protrusion 3824a is formed in a shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 .
Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 facing the inner reel unit 810, and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, the inner reel 811
It is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Next, a rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812
2a is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction, but the projection 4812a formed on the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. It is formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 67 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG.
) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68(b) is LXVI of FIG. 68(a).
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a rotating member 4812 taken along line IIb-LXVIIIb;

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a protrusion 4812a1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and its longitudinal direction and the hub 812a
are formed so as to intersect with the radial direction of That is, the projection 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end portion thereof. again,
The direction of inclination is inclined toward the normal direction of rotation of the inner reel unit 810 .

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed air (wind) reaches the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 .
By colliding with , it flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 .
As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

In addition, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end portion thereof, and the direction of inclination thereof coincides with the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since it is on the direction side, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can easily generate wind. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have a light transmittance, and a plurality of patterns are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. - 特許庁In this case, the inner reel unit 810
In other words, the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more than the outer reel unit 820, has a protrusion 4812a1. In the performance by rotating the unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are
A case has been described in which the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are slanted toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they extend radially outward, but in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 extend radially outward. Accordingly, the outer reel unit 820 is formed in an inclined manner opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. Figure 70(a)
) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70(b) is LXXb- in FIG. 70(a).
It is a cross-sectional view of the annular member 813 taken along line LXXb. It should be noted that the backlight unit 830 is removed from the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment is
The spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are formed so as to be inclined opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they extend radially outward. Therefore, the outer reel unit 820
and the direction of inclination of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

Also, the edge portion 8 of the outer reel unit 820 of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810
A projection 5813a is formed on the surface facing the 24 (see FIG. 70). Protrusion 5813
A is formed in plural at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813 .

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a chevron shape that slopes to both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813 . As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. In addition, the pushed air (wind) reaches the edge 8 of the outer reel 821 facing
By colliding with 24, it flows into the gap between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust that is about to stick can be blown off. As a result, the inner reel 8
11 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be prevented from sticking to dust.

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800, the space between them (between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820) Since air cannot be sufficiently sent to the space between the reel units 810 and 820, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. I was afraid.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the projection 5813a can generate an air flow that flows in between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, air can be easily drawn from both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800.例文帳に追加
Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 . As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, so that failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be suppressed.

Next, an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection 681
2a1, 6824a are formed in the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As shown in FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative design display device 800 according to the sixth embodiment. Figure 72(a)
) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72(b) is LXXI of FIG. 72(a).
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a rotating member 6812 taken along line Ib-LXXIIb; FIG. 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73(b) is LXXIII of FIG. 73(a).
It is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along line b-LXXIIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with a projection 6812a1 projecting toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As shown in FIGS. Protrusion 2812a1
are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Also, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed with a projection 6824a projecting toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 . The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 . Also, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821 .

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed radially inward of the rotating member 6812 from the protrusion 6824a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the projection 6812a1 can be prevented from colliding with the projection 6824a.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusion 6
Wind can be generated by 812a1 and protrusion 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 .

Also, in this case, the air pushed out to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can collide with the other of the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further restricted. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the flow of air flowing into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. This will
It is possible to blow away the dust (dirt) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust that is about to stick. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

That is, in the sixth embodiment, since the protrusions 8624a and 6812a are provided on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a at different positions in the radial direction, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, edge 824
Wind pressure can be generated by circumferentially displacing the protrusions 8624a and 6812a between the inner surface of the hub 812a and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Therefore, in the performance by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

An inclined surface is formed between the surfaces of the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a that face each other in the radial direction. This can reduce the air resistance when the air flows in the radial direction. As a result, it is possible to easily blow off the dust (dirt) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust that is about to stick.

Furthermore, the arrangement intervals of the projections 6812a1 in the circumferential direction and the arrangement intervals of the projections 6824a in the circumferential direction are different. As a result, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, projection 6812a1 and projection 6824
By overlapping with a in the radial direction, the positions at which the air is compressed can be distributed to a plurality of positions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation speed of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed down due to the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a overlapping in the radial direction and the air being compressed.

Next, a rotation member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. In the first embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is symmetrically driven in the same manner, but in the seventh embodiment, the left and right first electric accessories 520 are driven differently. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, a detailed description of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be given. FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. is formed by connecting by In addition, the plate-shaped bodies arranged on both the left and right ends are approximately L in the side view shape.
The bending angles of the curved parts are arranged differently on the left and right sides. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shaped plate formed on the left side in front view is set larger than the bending angle of the L-shaped plate formed on the right side in front view.

Therefore, the driving portions 7533d formed by being recessed on the other end side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) of the rotating member 7533 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right sides. Further, the drive unit 7533d
The width of the recess (vertical width on the left side of FIG. 74(b)) is formed larger than the outer shape of the projection 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the projection 523 can slide inside the driving portion 7533d. formed in

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left-right direction in the front view (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. set. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 .

Also, in the front view, the rotation member 7533 is set so that the dimension between the left and right plate members facing each other is larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side.
3c, a protrusion 533b projecting to both sides in the left-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a driving portion 7533d recessed at the tip of the other end of the substantially L-shaped side view. formed in preparation for

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, the driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

75(a) and 76(a), the first state of the first electric accessory 520 is shown in FIG. 75(c).
) and FIG. 76(c) show that the second state of the first electric accessory 520 is shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b).
4A and 4B respectively illustrate states in which the first electric accessory 520 is positioned between the first state and the second state. 75 and 76 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is
When the main body 531a protrudes from the inside, the projection 533b of the rotating member 533 is pushed forward (left side in FIG. 75(a)) to position the driving portion 7533d downward.
As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state.

In this case, a gap is formed between the inner side of the right driving portion 7533d and the upper side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the upper side in FIG. 75(a)). This causes the protrusion 523R to
In the middle of putting the right wing member 520R in the first state by pushing down to a certain position by 3d, the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) in front view, and the right wing member 5
It is formed by rotating 20R to the first state by its own weight.

In addition, the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (Fig. 7)
5(a) bottom side).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), the movable body 53 of the solenoid 531
1b into the body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pulled toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 75(b)), and the driving portion 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the projection 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)). , when the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving portion 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving portion 7533d and the projection 523L is delayed by the gap. Therefore, the right feather member 520
The initiation of the transition of R to the second state is made earlier.

75(b) and 76(b), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body 531a, and the rotary member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the driving portion 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward,
The first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state shown in FIGS. 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inner side of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (the lower side in FIG. 75(c)). This causes the protrusion 523L to
533d pushes up the left wing member 520L to the second state, the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side of the rotation shaft (through hole 521L) in front view, and the left wing member 520L is moved by its own weight. It is formed by rotating to a first state.

Moreover, the inner side of the right driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (Fig. 7)
5(a) bottom side).

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 5
20R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state after the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(c) is the displacement from the above-described first state to the second state. Since it is only the opposite of , the detailed explanation is omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 5
20L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R can be displaced to the first state before the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the case where a game ball enters the winning hole unit 500 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 77(a) and 77(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

77(a) and 77(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 of FIG. 24(b). 77(a) and 77(b) show a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the first electric accessory 520 changes from the second state to the first state.
When displacing to the state, the left wing member 520L is started first, and the right wing member 52
The displacement of 0R to the first state is made slower than the left wing member 520L.

That is, a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened can be instantaneously formed. At this time, when the game ball is entered from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is moved to the front side (lower side in FIG. 77(a)) by the bulging portion 524R. be guided to Therefore, the game ball can be easily made to collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, the bulging portion 524
A game ball collided with L is easily rebounded to the back side. Therefore, the game ball entered from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state, the bulging portion 5
By displacing the left wing member 520L on the side where 24L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side after the displacement of the left wing member 520L, a ball is landed during the displacement to the first state. The ball can be smoothly thrown to the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) is positioned to form the closed state and the other feather member (The other of the feather members 520L and 520R) is arranged at a position where the closed state is formed.
L, 526R).
It is possible to narrow the opposing interval of 0R. Therefore, the space required for disposing the pair of feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, a rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. FIG. In the first embodiment, the sliding member 532 is provided with the second protrusion 532 for restricting the entry of the game ball.
Although the case where c is formed has been described, in the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 8533 is formed with a second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 78, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531,
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are arranged in a displaceable state. It mainly includes a member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534 .

The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from the top, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first sliding members 8532 protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side. Protrusion 53
2b, and a third protrusion 532e located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding on the front side.

The sliding member 8532 has a dimension in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 532a equal to that of the first case member 53.
4 is formed to be smaller than the lateral dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the member 4 . Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534 .

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above a connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that it can restrict the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the second state. That is, the third protrusion 8532e has a lower end surface formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side, side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposite ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the opposing two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-like bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies facing each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner facing sides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. be. Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be arranged between the first projections 532b of the sliding member 8532 facing each other.

The rotating member 8533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side.
3c, a protrusion 533b projecting to both sides in the left-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a driving portion 533d formed as a recess at the tip of the other end of the substantially L-shaped side view, are connected. It mainly includes a second projection 8533e projecting from the center position in the left-right direction of the portion 533a toward the front side.

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending toward the front side, and has an upright wall 8533e1 that is bent downward and erected at the tip of the protrusion. The erected wall 8533 e 1 is curved in a convex shape toward the front side when viewed from the side, and the curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533 .

Next, the operation of drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG.
79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 80(a) and 80(b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
It is a front view of. 81(a) and 81(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

79 and 80 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent. 79(a), 80(a) and 81(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 79(b), 80(b) and 81. (
b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, Fig. 8
1(a) and 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531
79(a), the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533
left side) to position the driving portion 533d downward. This allows the first
The electric accessory 520 is in the first state with the projection 523 pushed downward.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, standing wall 8
533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third projection 8532e.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of blade members 520L and 52
A transmission mechanism for transmitting to 0R is provided, and the transmission mechanism moves between the open slide position (the position shown in FIG. 79(b)) and the closed slide position (the position shown in FIG. 79(a)) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). and the pair of feather members 520L are rotated to the open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the open slide position.
, 520R and is rotated to the closing rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the closing slide position, so that at least the pair of blade members 520L and 520R can be closed. is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotating position, the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed at the allowable position, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closing rotating position, the standing wall 8533e1 is placed at the restricted position, the sliding member 8532 is placed at the closing slide position, and the rotating member 853
3 is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by the engagement between the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. It is possible to easily regulate illegal entry of a ball into a prize winning opening.

That is, from the state in which the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are closed, for example, the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or by directly operating the rotary member 8533, the rotary member Even if an attempt is made to rotate the 8533 to the open position, the engagement of the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 restricts the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotating position. can be maintained in position (i.e. standing wall 8
533e1 can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). resulting in,
The standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from illegally entering the ball entrance.

In addition, the third protrusion 8532 protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533)
e, and a sliding member 8532 (or a rotating member 8533) that can be engaged with its third projection 8532e.
), and the third projection 8532e protrudes along the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532.
The engagement and disengagement of the third projection 8532e and the connecting portion 533a can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) with which the third projection 8532e can come into contact, or a hole or recess into which the third projection 8532e can be inserted ( It may be a hole drilled in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533 or a concave portion provided therein. That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the contact of the third projection 8532e with the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a be a hole or a concave portion. The third projection 8532e is connected to the connecting portion 5
33a, the space required for arranging the third projection 8532e can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.
e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third projection 8532e from the outside can be made difficult.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the driving section 533d is moved upward. displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 has the projection 533
A second state in which b is pushed upward is assumed.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned on the rear side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the regulation of rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. resulting in,
By rotating the rotating member 8533, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced.

Therefore, when the driving portion 533d of the rotating member 8533 is rotated toward the open rotation position, the opening side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of blade members 520L and 520R and rotates toward the closing rotation position. Since it is provided with the closing side contact portion 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of feather members 520L and 520R when it is closed, it is possible to suppress the pair of feather members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside. Unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of blade members 520L and 520R are displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the blade members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. try to rotate it. In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position, so that the displacement of the blade member is prevented by the closing side contact of the rotating member 8533. contact part 8
533d2. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of feather members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated to move the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 to (see FIG. 82(b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball entered in the second winning hole 140 is
The ball can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper end surface of b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged will be described. Figure 82
82(a) and 82(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. Note that FIG. 82(a)
and FIG. 82(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric role product 520 are broken from the proximal ends due to fraudulent activity, deterioration over time, etc., and the first electric role product 520 moves to the first position. When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the body portion 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward. be. Therefore, the standing wall 8533 e 1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534 b and being thrown to the second case member 535 .

Therefore, the state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of feather members 520
Since the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 is formed so as to be able to be maintained at the restricted position in a state in which L, 520R is open from the outside, it is possible to suppress the standing wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, illegal entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be easily regulated.

That is, the state in which the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of feather members 520L
, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to move the standing wall 853
3e1 (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(b))) to the first case member 53
4 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, if the first electric accessory 520 is mishandled by the player,
Even if the game ball can be thrown to 40, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the standing wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning hole 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning hole 140. It is easy to regulate being entered.

Also, in this case, the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. A separate member for regulating illegal entry of a ball into the winning hole 140 is not required. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, so an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e for regulating the entering ball of the game ball and its second
Since the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses displacement of the protrusion is integrally formed with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, a drive unit 9530 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is
Although the case where the movement of the first electric accessory 520 is restricted when it is projected from a has been described,
In the ninth embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 83, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531,
A sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a first case in which the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are arranged in a displaceable state. It mainly includes a member 534 and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534 .

The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies which are substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side, side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and is formed by connecting the opposed portions at one end with a connecting portion 533a. be. The gap between the opposing two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass through the inside of the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-like bodies facing each other).

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies opposed to each other) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner sides of the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 8532 opposed to each other. be. As a result, the rotating member 9533 can be arranged between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532 .

The rotating member 9533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes to both sides in the left-right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the side.
3c, a protrusion 533b projecting to both sides in the left-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, a projecting portion 9533d projecting to the front side from the tip of the other end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a connecting portion. 533a mainly includes a second projection 8533e projecting from the center position in the left-right direction to the front side.

The projecting portion 9533d is formed so as to project from the end on the front side, and the upper portion thereof (see FIG. 84 (
a) Upper side) The length is set so that the protrusions 523L and 523R of the feather members 520L and 520R can abut on the side surfaces.

Next, the operation of drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG.
84(a) and 84(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 85(a) and 85(b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
It is a front view of. 86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

84 and 85 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparent. 84(a), 85(a) and 86(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 84(b), 85(b) and 86. (
b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, Fig. 8
6(a) and 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531
a, the protrusion 533b of the rotary member 8533 is positioned on the front side (FIG. 84(a)).
(left side) to position the projecting portion 9533f downward. As a result, the projection 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to enter the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, an urging spring (not shown) is arranged on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. An urging force for rotational displacement is always applied. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the driving of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of the pachinko machine), it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from remaining in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted toward the rear side (the right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the protrusion 9533f is moved upward. is displaced to As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can move the projection 53
3b is pushed upward to a second state.

In this case, the projecting portion 9533f and the projections 523L and 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by extending the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the second state from the main body portion 531a and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring to the first position. It is displaced to the 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is illegally operated will be described. 87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. In addition, Fig. 8
7(a) and 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 87(a), the first
When the electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state in FIG. 87(b).
Each state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the main body 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by the player's fraudulent act. When the state is changed from the first state to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second projection 8533e is positioned downward, the game ball rolls on the upper end face of the standing portion 534b by the standing wall 8533e1, and the second projection 8533e rolls on the upper end face of the standing portion 534b.
It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the case member 535 .

This (with the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 projected from the main body 531a)
In this case, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 as described above. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the store from being disadvantaged by the player's fraudulent act.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the second projection 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third projection 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second projection are the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8.
532, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being broken due to the player's cheating. As a result, it is possible to suppress losses on the side of the store due to fraudulent acts of the players.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, an urging spring that urges the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction is provided, and the rotating member 9533 rotates toward the open rotation position so that the pair of vane members 5
20L and 520R are provided with projecting portions 9533f for opening them by abutting on them, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are not brought into contact with the rotating member 9533, and the external force due to such forced opening acts on the rotating member 9533. can be avoided. As a result, damage to the pair of feather members 520L, 520R, rotating member 9533, or sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

As a biasing means for constantly applying a biasing force for rotationally displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state side, a spring (torsion) biases the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by elastic recovery force. Springs and coil springs) as well as magnets that urge the pair of feather members 520L and 520R in the closing direction with an attractive force are exemplified.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. In the first embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is reduced (or increased) in a non-linear manner as the displacement member 670 is displaced. , the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed.
In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of displacement member 10670. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes the extension member 6
71, an extension member 10671 arranged opposite to the extension member 671, a decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 10671 and the extension member 671, and a rotatable state to the extension member. rotatable member 10678 disposed thereon.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at the end on the long side, and protrudes left and right outward at a substantially central position on the long side in the longitudinal direction. and a rotary shaft 10671e formed to project in a cylindrical shape from the connecting projection 671b toward the shaft support hole 671a.

The rotary member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is attached to the extension member 10671 in a state in which its longitudinal direction intersects the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extension member 10671 at a substantially right angle when viewed from the side.
is placed in

The rotary member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction, and a through hole 10678 formed circumferentially through the shaft support hole 10671a of the extension member 10671 on one end side in the longitudinal direction.
and an inclined surface 10678c formed by notching the side surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extension member 10671 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, the rotating shaft 1067
By inserting 1e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotary shaft 10671e, the rotary member 10678 can be rotatably disposed on the extension member 10671. As shown in FIG.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

90 and 91, the operation of rotating member 10678 will now be described.
FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91(a) and 91(b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90. FIG.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58(b). 91(a) and 91 (
b) shows the state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced, and FIG.
shows a cross section of the state where the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L of the tenth embodiment, a displacement member 670 is arranged on the upper side and a displacement member 10670 is arranged on the lower side. The axis of the support hole 671a is arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged upside down, the lower displacement member 670 is changed to the displacement member 10670 . The driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decorative units 672 of the displaceable members 670 and 10670 arranged vertically are displaced in a direction toward each other, the extension members 671 and 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In the state shown in FIG. 91(b) in which the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other, the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extension member 671. As shown in FIG. This will
Rotating member 1067 is rotated so that inclined surface 10678 c is substantially parallel to the side surface of extension member 671 .
8 is rotated around the shaft support hole 10678a (in FIG. 91(b), the rotating member 10678 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft support hole 10678a).

Accordingly, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the pivot hole 10678a is similarly rotated. By displacing the position of the through-hole 10678b, the position where the through-hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are brought into contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 arranged below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from contacting each other.

Further, since the extension member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is arranged is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670,
When the driving force transmitted from the driving motor KM3 is smaller than that on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), the displacement of the rotating member 10678 causes the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. can be increased to compensate for the shortage of the driving force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from contacting each other.

Next, referring to FIGS. 92 to 94, the vertical displacement unit 11600 of the eleventh embodiment
L will be explained. In the first embodiment, the displacement member 670 transmits driving force from both the left and right sides, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670 . In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments,
The explanation is omitted.

92 to 94, similarly to FIGS. 61 to 63, the vertical displacement unit 600L
U is added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 arranged above the displacement member 670 and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670, and the displacement member 670 arranged below the vertical displacement unit 600L
, and the reference numerals of driving means for driving the displacement member 670 are added with D at the end of the reference numerals.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. 92 to 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extension members 671 arranged symmetrically on the displacement member 670 is replaced by the extension member 671 in the eleventh embodiment.
The extension member 671 is placed on only one side.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is on the driving side (projection 683b of the large-diameter gear 683).
) is formed, and the extension member 671 is connected to the drive means on the drive side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 arranged in a pair vertically in the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged in opposite directions.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically arranged displacement members 11670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical central position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction while being in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the side opposite to the drive side is slowed down, and there is a possibility that a gap is formed between the two decoration units 672. However, since the extension members 671 are arranged on opposite sides in the vertical direction, the end of one decoration unit 672 on the side opposite to the drive side is connected to the other decoration unit 67 .
2 can be pushed at the drive-side end. As a result, the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 can be suppressed.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 . By delaying the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672. FIG.

More specifically, by advancing the driving timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, the decoration unit 672 driven first is driven later. The end opposite the drive side of 672 can be extruded. On the other hand, the end opposite to the driving side of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first comes into contact with the driving side end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later with a stronger force. As a result, when displacing the two displacement members 11670 with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 .

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, by accelerating the driving timing of the displacement members 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extending members 671) are deformed and the elastic force when the displacement returns can be used to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the front base 511 and the rear base 51 of the prize winning unit 500
Although the case where the thickness of the front base 51 is substantially constant has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the front base 51
1 and the thickness of the rear base 512 are partially changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG.
5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning opening unit 500 taken along line XCVb--XCVb of FIG. 95(a). In addition, in FIG. 95(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 95(b), the front base 511 is shown opaquely. Moreover, FIG.
), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed to have partially different thicknesses in the front-rear direction (up-down direction in FIG. 95(b)) on the left and right sides of the second prize winning opening 140 . That is, the second
The upper right portion of the winning opening 140 is provided with a front-side bulging portion 12511f that bulges to the rear side.

In addition, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different on the right and left sides of the second prize winning opening 140 . That is, the upper left portion of the second prize winning opening 140 is provided with a back side bulging portion 12512d that bulges to the back side.

The front-side swelling portion 12511f and the back-side swelling portion 12512d are formed by a pair of feather members 520L,
formed outside the displacement region of 520R. As a result, the pair of feather members 520L, 520R
and the front-side swelling portion 12511f and the rear-side swelling portion 12512d are suppressed from colliding with each other.

In addition, the ends of the front-side bulging portion 12511f and the rear-side bulging portion 12512d are arranged so that their ends extend in the horizontal direction (Fig. direction) outside. As a result, the game ball which may flow down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and may be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R is surely made to collide with the front-side swelling part 12511f and the back-side swelling part 12512d. can be done.

The front-side bulging portion 12511f is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front-side swelling portion 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the swelling portion 524R in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the back-side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface facing the formation position of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back-side swelling portion 12512d is formed on the side surface positioned in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the swelling portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is
It can collide with 1f and guide it to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be moved to the rear side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can easily collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can be made to collide with the back side bulging portion 12512d and can be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be moved to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R)
By abutting against 4L and 524R, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

Also, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other feather member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the game ball thrown by the feather members 520L and 520R collides with the front-side swelling portion 12511f and the back-side swelling portion 12512d, thereby slowing down the throwing speed. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the feather members 520L, 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact when colliding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be reduced, and the damage of the feather members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The prize winning unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a projection projecting between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the first embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG.
6(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). In addition, in FIG. 96(a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 96(b), the front base 511 is shown opaquely. Also, FIG.
24(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 96 , the front base 511 is located on the left side of the second prize winning opening 140 .
A protrusion 13511g protruding to the second side is formed. In addition, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e protruding toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second prize winning opening 140 .

The protrusions 13511g and 13512e are formed outside the displacement regions of the pair of feather members 520L and 520R. As a result, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R and the projection 13511
collision between g and the protrusion 13512e is suppressed.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R on the same side as the formation position of the bulging portion 524R in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.
is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the projection 13511g and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, it is less likely to collide with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, damage to the feather member 520R can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball thrown from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the feather member 520R does not collide with the protrusion 13511g formed above the feather member 520R.
The ball will be thrown to 6R. The game ball in this case can be guided to the rear side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and can be guided to the rear side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be brought to the rear side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, it can be made less likely to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, damage to the feather member 520L can be suppressed.

Also, the game ball thrown from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the feather member 520L does not collide with the protrusion 13512e formed above the feather member 520L.
The ball will be thrown to 6L. The game ball in this case can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R)
By abutting against 4L and 524R, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140 and to suppress ball clogging.

Also, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one feather member (the other of the feather members 520L and 520R) , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other feather member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Furthermore, the protrusions 13511g and 13512e can reduce the number of game balls that collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the feather members 520L and 520R.
The durability of L, 520R can be improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 97 and 98, feather members 14520L and 145 of the fourteenth embodiment
20R (first variable device 14520) will be described. Feather member 1452 of the fourteenth embodiment
0L and 14520R are formed so that the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the bulging portions 524L and 524R is different from that of the first embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 97(a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG.
7(b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 98(a) shows the winning opening unit 5
00, and FIG. 98(b) is XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98(a).
FIG. 98(c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left wing member 520L taken along line XC of FIG. 98(b).
It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the right wing member 520R along line VIIIc-XCVIIIc.

In addition, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the oblique direction in the left-right direction is shown in the opposite direction. Also, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24(b). In FIG. 98(a), as in FIG. 24(b), the rolling directions of the game balls rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R are indicated by two-dot chain lines together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Furthermore, virtual line K
The front direction of S1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the rear direction is illustrated by arrow B. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L has a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. Left wing member 14520
L is a through-hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction and the through-hole 521L at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity.
A recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the periphery of the , a projection 523L protruding from the vicinity of the through hole 521L toward the back side, and a recess in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the side of the through hole 521L. and a pair of feather members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state.
and a side surface 14526L on the opposite surface of the
524L.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 that is inclined upward toward the back side from the approximately central position in the front-rear direction, and a smooth surface 1452 that is formed on the front side from the approximately central position in the front-rear direction.
6L2.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the rear surface side (the left side in FIG. 98(b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256L, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526L1 are inclined downward to the smooth surface 145
It can be guided to the 2L2 side.

Also, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L has a width dimension in the front-rear direction equal to that of the feather member 1452.
It is formed to be smaller than half of the front-to-rear width of 0L. That is, the front-rear width of the bulging portion 15254L is made smaller than the front-rear width of the bulging portion 14524L.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 are rolled on the smooth surface 14526L2 side,
It is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L collides with the bulging portion 14524L.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R that penetrates the lower end portion in the direction of gravity in the front-rear direction, a concave portion 522L that is recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521R, and a back side from the vicinity of the through hole 521R. Protrusion 523R protruding from
and a recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R in the end face on the through hole 521R side;
The side surfaces 1452 of the opposing surfaces of the pair of feather members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state
6R and a bulging portion 14524R protruding from the side surface 14526R thereof.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 that is inclined upward toward the back side from the approximately center position in the front-rear direction, and a smooth surface 1452 that is formed on the front side from the approximately center position in the front-rear direction.
6R2.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the rear side (the right side in FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256R, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 are inclined downward to the smooth surface 145
It can be guided to the 2R2 side.

Also, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L has a width dimension in the front-rear direction equal to that of the feather member 1452.
It is formed to be larger than half the longitudinal width of 0L. That is, the width of the inclined surface 14526R1 in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the left wing member 1
The bulging portion 1 of the right wing member 14520R is wider than the front-rear width of the bulging portion 14524L of 4520L.
The width of the 4524R in the front-rear direction is formed larger.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 are rolled on the smooth surface 14526R2.
It is possible to reduce the probability of a game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R colliding with the bulging portion 14524R.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in a form in which game balls flow down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and are easily thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the feather members 520L and 520R in the open state. be. More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pair of feather members 520L,
A first through gate 66 with 520R in an open state is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and is configured to hit a game ball toward the left side of the center frame 86 during time reduction or probability variation. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (the pair of feather members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L
There is a problem that a large number of game balls are thrown to the left wing member 14520L, the wear of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L is accelerated, and the left wing member 14520L is easily broken.

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, the inclined surfaces 1452 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R.
While forming 6L1, 14526R1, the inclined surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1
Swollen portions 14524L and 14524R are formed in the swelled portion 14 on the side where a large number of game balls are thrown.
Since 524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, the feather member 1 on the side where the ball is thrown more
By reducing the probability that the game ball collides with the bulging portion 14524L of 4520L, the bulging portion 1
It is possible to suppress the rapid wear of 4524L. As a result, it is possible to prevent the feather members 14520L and 14520R on the side to which a large number of game balls are thrown from becoming fragile.

Next, referring to FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable winning device 150 in the fifteenth embodiment
65 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are formed with the bulging portions 524L and 524R has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. Figure 100
100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line Cb--Cb in FIG. 100(a).

99(a) and 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 99 shows the closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 shows the open state of the variable winning device 15065. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 100(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by the two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1 in the same manner as in FIG. 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated by arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by arrow B. As shown in FIG.

Also, the closed state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the variable winning device 15 formed in a plate state
The plane of 065 is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the plane of the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the game area ) 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed in a plate-like body elongated in the left and right direction, and is arranged rotatably with respect to the game board 13 with one end on the back side as an axis. again,
The variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying a driving force to the driving device, the variable winning device 15065 can be displaced between a closed position and an open position. be done.

In addition, the variable winning device 15065 has two protrusions 15065b and 15065c protruding from the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the open state. Furthermore, the variable winning device 1506
5 side surfaces 15065a are inclined downward from both left and right sides toward the center. As a result, the game ball thrown to the side surface 15065a rolls toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end face on the front side in the open state (state shown in FIG. 100(b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is formed to be connected to the end face on the back side in the alveolar state (state shown in FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.
are formed on both the left and right sides with the . As a result, when a game ball is thrown to both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and rebounding to both the left and right sides. .

More specifically, a game ball thrown to the left side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging portion 15065b when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and is guided to the rear side. be. On the other hand, the game ball thrown to the right side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging portion 15065c when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and is guided to the front side.

Therefore, the front-rear direction position of the game ball thrown from the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a is set to the bulging portion 1
5065b and bulging portion 15065c can be displaced. Therefore, side 15
When the game balls are thrown to the left and right sides of 065a and collide with each other in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, the rebound (rebound) direction can be set in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a.

In addition, when a game ball is thrown from one of the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, the bulging portion 15065
b or the bulging portion 15065c to displace the front-back direction position, when the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the front side of the side surface 15065a, the game ball is pushed into the bulging portion 150.
65b or the other of bulge 15065c. As a result, side 150
A game ball thrown from one side of 65a can be prevented from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and exiting to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

A side surface 15065a of the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the specific prize winning opening (large opening) 65a, and has a pair of swelling portions. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) along the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

Moreover, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 150
65c are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a), so that the variable winning device 150
When a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of 65 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with one of the pair of swelling portions 15065b and 15065c. Therefore, the width direction one side (or the other side) to the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065
It can be suppressed that the game ball entering from passes through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flows out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a to enhance the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 is made possible by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third projection 8532e. A third protrusion 16532e is formed in the recess of the portion 533a.
is inserted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 101(a) shows the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 85 in the sixteenth embodiment.
30, and FIG. 101(b) is the first
101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530. FIG.
FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 taken along line CIc-CIc in (b).

As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment is formed with a recessed portion 16533a1 recessed from the back side toward the front side at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear.

In addition, the third projection 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed so as to protrude at a position opposed to the recessed portion 16533a1 described above in the front-rear direction. The shape of the third projection 16532e when viewed from the front is a horizontally long rectangle slightly smaller than the concave portion 16533a1, and the tip thereof is tapered.

As a result, when the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are closed, the concave portion 16
A third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the 533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged.

Further, in this case, since the engaging portion is the concave portion 16533a1, the third projection 16532e
is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, the space required for arranging the third projection 16532e can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced. The protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, making unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside difficult.

102 to 104, sliding member 1573 in the seventeenth embodiment
2 will be explained. In the above-described first embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is positioned upstream of the sensor device SE1 arranged on the flow path of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140. In the seventeenth embodiment, a case where the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. 103(a) and 103(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown transparently. Also, in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102(b) and 102(b), the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state. Each state is illustrated. 102(a) and 102(b) are shown in FIG. 17 (
They correspond to the cross sections of a) and FIG. 17(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment is
A standing wall 17532c1 is formed projecting from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in FIG. 102(a)). The erected wall 17532c1 is provided with an erected wall 17532c1 whose tip is set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535 and whose tip is bent toward the front side.

The erected length of the erected wall 17532c1 toward the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the upper and lower side surfaces are below the sensor device SE1 arranged in the second case member 535. Set to length located.

Further, an opening 17535b is formed through the second case member 535 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second projection 17532c is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set larger than the sliding width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-rear direction (driving width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction while the second projection 17532c is inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the standing wall 17532c1 is positioned downstream of the sensor device SE1 and the game is played. Ball penetration can be regulated. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the standing wall 1
7532c1 is arranged on the rear side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole for detecting the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, it is possible to insert the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the case where the first electric accessory is forced into the second state due to fraud by the player will be described. Figures 104(a) and 104(b) show the winning opening unit 500
is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) correspond to FIGS. 20(a) and 20
Each corresponds to the cross section of (b). Also, FIG. 104(a) illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) illustrates a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the pair of feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened by the player's fraud. , When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the front-rear position of the sliding member 17532 is the same as in the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly opened, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 is stagnated on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball caught on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is always detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 has been illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store manager of the player's cheating.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes the sensor device SE1 for detecting a game ball entered into the second winning hole 140, and the upright wall 17532c1 is positioned downstream of the sensor device SE1. In addition, since the game ball is restricted at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1, for example, when the feather members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and the game ball illegally flows in from the ball entrance, the sensor device The state in which SE1 has detected the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether or not the detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have entered illegally.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, the rotating member 18812 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the projection 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812
In the eighteenth embodiment, the protrusions 18812a1 are formed at different radial distances from the axis of the hub 812a.
In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment,
FIG. 105(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 along line CVb-CVb of FIG. 105(a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment has projections 18812a1 that protrude in a hemispherical shape toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 arranged oppositely. Have several.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the axis of the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow generated by the first projection 18812a1 (located on the rotation side) is directed to the second projection 18812a1 (rotation rear side of the projection 18812a1). It can easily collide.
Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship between the housing unit 880, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the above first embodiment,
Although the side wall portion 881 of the storage unit 880 has been described as being formed in a plate-like shape, the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment has a plurality of openings. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

106(a) and 12(b) show the decorative pattern display device 800 in the nineteenth embodiment.
is a cross-sectional view of. 106(a) and 106(b), the outer reel unit 82
A state in which 0 is transitioned (rotationally displaced) is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 106(b), the opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), a side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) disposed on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 800 in front view is provided with a plurality of openings 19881d penetrating in the horizontal direction. be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation shafts of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 . The formation angle of the adjacent openings 19881d is
Spoke 812c of inner reel unit 810 and spoke 82 of outer reel unit 820
2 is set to be substantially the same as the forming angle. In addition, the opening dimension of the opening 19881d in the circumferential direction is set smaller than the width dimension of the spokes 812c and 822 in the circumferential direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106(a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812)
c) can be placed next to opening 19881d. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered with the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) in a side view.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the inflow of air from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) are arranged at circumferential positions different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

This allows air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the inflow path of air the shortest and reducing the air resistance, it is possible to make it easier for the air to flow into the decorative pattern display device 800 (accommodating unit 880).

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated and other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 are visually recognized by the player, the inflow of air from the opening 19881 d is restricted so that the inner reel 811 can be seen. The display can be easily visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned by allowing the intake air to flow in from the opening 19881d. can be done easily.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the bulging portions 524L, 52 of the pair of left and right feather members 520L, 520R
Although the case of forming symmetrically except for 4R has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the blade members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side so that the blade members 520L and 520R have the same shape. In this case, the feather member 520L
, 520R can be formed of the same parts, and by using common parts, the blade members 520L,
The manufacturing cost of 520R can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflecting member 625 is formed on a smooth surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved so as to protrude toward the light transmission portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and the light can be uniformly incident on the rear surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

In the above-described first and eleventh embodiments, as a mode in which the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, the number of components arranged is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) may have different rigidity (dimensions, materials, etc. of the constituent members), or the driving force transmitted between the one side and the other side (size, (transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are different, the state of connection between components on one side and the other is different (for example, the number of connected parts, the amount of looseness of the connected parts, etc.), and the one side and the other side are different. The easiness of displacement to the other party (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.) may be different between the two, or a combination of these may be used.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side by the rigidity of the constituent members, the drive means 6
80U and the driving means 680D connect their high rigidity side (low side) to the other low rigidity side (
high side). Therefore, when the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680
Each of D can form a state in which it pushes (advances) the other on the stiff side and receives (retreats) the other on the less stiff side. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the biasing spring displaces the first electric accessory 520 to the closed state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging a magnetic body inside the first electric accessory 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the magnetic force of the magnet displaces the first electric accessory 520 to the closed state. It may be something that causes

In the above-described first and eleventh embodiments, the case in which the number of components provided is different as a mode in which the decorative member 752 is biased to one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a mode in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are configured differently from each other, the rigidity of the constituent members (the dimensions of the constituent members, the number of , materials, etc.), the state of connection between constituent members (for example, the number of connecting portions, the amount of looseness of the connecting portions, etc.) may be different, or a combination of these may be used. Due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the timing of transmission are different, and the supporting modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are each biased to one side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is slidably formed inside the first case member 534, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may protrude from the inside of the second prize winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering inside the second winning hole 140, so even if the feather members 520L and 520R are opened by fraud, the inside of the second winning hole 140 (upright wall 53
It is possible to suppress the stagnation of game balls in front of 2c1. As a result, fraud by the player can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the game ball is guided in the front-rear direction by changing the shape of the side surface between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, magnets may be arranged inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided forward and backward by the attracting force of the magnets. Since this eliminates the need to narrow the space between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the front base 511 and the rear base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attracting force of the magnet is such that the game ball cannot be held on the attracting surface of the magnet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the rear base 512 .

In the second and eighteenth embodiments, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 has a plurality of projections 2
Although the case where 812a1 and 18812a1 are formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed in the side surface facing the edge 824 of the hub 812a. Also in this case, an airflow can be generated by the uneven shape of the grooves as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 82
The outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned by sending air between the two facing surfaces.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 15065 is rotatably displaceable with respect to the game board 13 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 can be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13 and a game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a. is disabled, and in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 projects to the front side of the game board 13 so that a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 155. FIG. In this first control example, the control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment (control related to the game of the pachinko machine 10, operation control for the variable display unit 80, light emission control of various lamps, etc.) related processing) will be explained. In this control example, by controlling the operations of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display section 1600, and the displacement member 670, the special symbol lottery results are displayed to the player in various display operation modes. controlled to As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get bored.

Further, in this control example, a double reel structure in which an outer reel 821 is provided so as to cover the inner reel 811 is provided, and furthermore, as a region constituting the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, an inner (display surface of the inner reel 811) 109), and non-transmissive areas 821a2 and 821a3 (see FIG. 109) that do not transmit the inside (the display surface of the inner reel 811). By configuring in this way, for example, the transmissive area 821a1 of the outer reel 821 is placed at a position facing the display window 880 for allowing the player to visually recognize the combination of the third symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols. By positioning, the player can see the operation mode of the inner reel 811, and by positioning the non-transmissive areas 821a2 and 821a3 of the outer reel 821, the player can see the operation mode of the inner reel 811. can be made invisible.

By configuring in this manner, various reel displays can be executed in the area of the display window 880 whose size is limited due to the structure of the pachinko machine 10, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, by rotating the outer reel 821, it is possible to create a state in which the player cannot visually recognize the operation mode of the inner reel 811. Therefore, for example, the action of positioning the inner reel 811 to the initial state When performing, or when you want to stop display a specific pattern, different from the usual (not set as a production pattern (variation pattern)) operation content (for example, twice the speed of the normal production pattern To prevent a player from visually recognizing the contents of the operation of the inner reel 811 when the operation is performed by rotating at a speed of 1/3 of the normal performance pattern). can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the reel display by the above-described double reel structure, the player is also notified of the lottery result of the special symbols by the 7-segment display using the segment display device 600 . As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols in more diverse display modes, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is varied according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the special symbol lottery result by stopping the reels, unlike the conventional gaming machine that displays the special symbol lottery result using the liquid crystal screen. It consists of In such a game machine, like a conventional game machine, information other than the lottery results of special symbols is displayed on a liquid crystal screen, for example, a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which the expectation of winning a jackpot increases as the sequence continues. Since there is no display area for informing the player of the information indicating the number of times that is executed, there is a problem that it is difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for the continuous effect. On the other hand, in this control example, by operating the displacement member 670 to vary the display area visible to the player, the player is notified of the process of the continuous effect (the number of times the continuous effect is executed). Configure. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 does not have a liquid crystal display device, the process of continuous performance can be easily recognized by the player.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the player is notified of the continuous production process by varying the display area of the reel display. It may be configured to notify. Specifically, depending on the number of times the continuous effect is executed, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) can be changed, and the sound effect during reel operation can be changed. may be configured.

Further, in this control example, when the above-described continuous effects are executed in the pachinko machine 10, the reel display area is gradually narrowed according to the number of times the continuous effects are executed. By configuring in this manner, the narrower the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the expectation of the big win, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. .

In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines for displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) ), the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special symbols.

In this first control example, the time (fluctuation time) from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed is different according to the game state to be set. Specifically, in the gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the lottery of special symbols is likely to be executed, a short fluctuation time is likely to be set in order to increase the number of lotteries of special symbols executed per unit time. In a game state (normal state) in which the lottery of symbols is difficult to execute, a long variation time is easily set in order to reduce the period in which the lottery of special symbols is not performed (period in which the special symbols are not changed). are doing.

In this control example configured in this way, the speed at which the third symbol displayed in the display area is changed in a game state (normal state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) reel display to execute 7-segment display at a high speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) to change the pattern displayed in the display area in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) where a short fluctuation time is likely to be set Configure. Thus, even when a plurality of display methods with different variable speeds of the third pattern are used, the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is surely stopped and displayed after the predetermined fluctuation time elapses. can be made

Next, referring to FIG. 107, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It should be noted that FIG. 107 is a point that a configuration with reference numerals is added to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above to facilitate the explanation of this control example. , differ in that the signs are different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 107, the variable display device unit 80 has a decorative symbol display device 800 and a 7-segment display section 1600, and is configured to be able to notify the player of the special symbol lottery result by different display methods. ing. The decorative pattern display device 800 is composed of a left rotating unit 800a, a middle rotating unit 800b, and a right rotating unit 800c, and each rotating unit 800a to 800c has a double reel structure (Fig. 32 reference). A display window 880 is formed in the central part of the game board 13 for allowing the player to visually recognize part of the symbols (third symbols) stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 800 .

With this configuration, the combination of the symbols (third symbols) stopped and displayed in the display window 880 can notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbols. Hereinafter, the area within the display window 880, that is, the area visible to the player among the symbols (third symbols) stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 800 will be referred to as the symbol display area (simply referred to as the display area). ). Further, the details of the display pattern in the double reel structure of each rotating unit 800a to 800c will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG.

Next, the 7-segment display section 1600 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the display area of each of the rotating units 800a to 800c, and is used as part of the 7-segment display for displaying predetermined identification information. Specifically, it is composed of rectangles (6 segments) of 1 horizontal segment and 2 vertical segments so as to form 6 segments out of 7 segments. The detailed contents of the light-emitting members constituting each segment are omitted because they are the same as those of the first embodiment (see FIG. 55).

In this first control example, the 7-segment display section 1600 includes a left 7-segment display section 1600a covering the outer periphery of the left rotation unit 800a, a middle 7-segment display section 1600b covering the outer periphery of the middle rotation unit 800b, and a right-hand rotation unit 800b. A right 7-segment display portion 1600c covering the outer periphery of the moving unit 800c is provided, and three pieces of identification information (numbers) can be displayed as the third pattern using each of the 7-segment display portions 1600a to 1600c.

By combining the six segments of the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the light-emitting area 822 (see FIG. 109) displayed by the decorative pattern display device 800, one 7-segment (7-segment) is configured. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the display area for reel display and the display area for 7-segment display can be overlapped. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed within a limited space. Detailed display contents (display contents of the third pattern) using the 7-segment display section 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG.

Furthermore, an LED (lightning LED) 671 is arranged as a light emitting means capable of emitting light toward the display area of the reel display on the outer edge of the display window 880 (7-segment display portion 1600). The LEDs 671 are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners of the display window 880. A lightning LED 671a is located on the lower left side of the display window 880 (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 107), and a lightning LED 671b is located on the upper left side. , a lightning LED 671c on the lower right side, and a lightning LED 671d on the upper right side.

When these lightning LEDs 671 emit light, light with high directivity is irradiated toward a partial area of the display area of the reel display, and a composite pattern combined with the symbols stopped and displayed in the above partial area is expressed. It is configured as follows. The details of this composite symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(a).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the display contents of the display pattern (third pattern) that can be displayed by each of the rotating units 800a to 800c will be described. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing display patterns of the inner reels 811 of the rotating units 800a to 800c, and FIG. 109 is a schematic drawing of the inner reels 811 of the rotating units 800a to 800c. It is a schematic diagram.

The left rotating unit 800a has a double reel structure composed of a left inner reel 811a and a left outer reel 821a, and the middle rotating unit 800b includes a middle inner reel 811b and a middle outer reel 821b. A heavy reel structure is constructed, and the right rotation unit 800c has a double reel structure composed of a right inner reel 811c and a right outer reel 821c.

Here, a method of displaying a pattern (third pattern) using the rotating units 800a to 800c will be briefly described using the left rotating unit 800a. As described above, the left rotation unit 800a has a double reel structure with the left inner reel 811a and the left outer reel 821a. is provided. Then, by passing a current in a specific direction to the motor, the reel rotates in the forward direction (the direction in which the reel rotates from top to bottom in the viewpoint of FIG. 107), and by passing a current in the opposite direction to the specific direction. The reels are configured to rotate in the reverse direction (the direction in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top from the viewpoint of FIG. 107).

Furthermore, in this control example, a motor MPU (not shown) is provided as drive control means for controlling the motor drive of each reel used in each of the rotating units 800a to 800c. This motor MPU is used to variably set the rotation direction and rotation speed of each motor, and executes drive control corresponding to various variable displays executed based on the result of the lottery of special symbols. . By managing the motor drive control of each reel used for each rotating unit 800a to 800c by one motor MPU in this way, it is possible to execute motion control that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

First, the symbols displayed on the inner reel 811 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 shows a display surface member (display tape) having display patterns (display patterns printed on the display surface) that can be displayed on each inner reel (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the. In this control example, the looped display surface is formed by attaching the display surface member described above along the outer peripheral surface of each inner reel.

Therefore, for example, when the left inner reel 811a is rotated in the forward direction (the direction in which the display pattern moves from top to bottom in the display window 880 (see FIG. 107)), the printed pattern is printed on the display surface member. The display pattern is displayed in the display window 880 while changing from bottom to top. Next to the display pattern printed on the top of the display surface member (uppermost in the display of FIG. 108, 7 blue patterns R1 in the case of the left inner reel 811a) is printed on the bottom of the surface member. A display pattern (the lowest in the display of FIG. 108, a part of the combination pattern R3 in the case of the left inner reel 811a) is displayed.

Next, the display patterns printed on the display surface member of each inner reel will be specifically described. On the left inner reel 811a of the left rotating unit 800a, the most advantageous jackpot (for example, jackpot A (see FIG. 120(b))) is displayed as a display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern. 7 blue symbols R1 corresponding to the combination of symbols to indicate that the player has won a prize, 7 red symbols R2 corresponding to the combination of symbols to indicate to the player that the player has won the jackpot, and a specific display area. When stopped and displayed, the left combination pattern R3a which is a part of the combination pattern R3 that can satisfy the execution condition of the special performance and the lottery result of the special pattern are disadvantageous to the player (for example, failure). are printed at least on the reel display surface.

Blue 7 symbols R1 and red 7 symbols R2 are symbols printed on each of the inner reels 811, respectively. It shows that you have won the special symbol jackpot. In this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpots that differ in the amount of benefits given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls and the game state set after the jackpot game ends). In this case, the stop display mode (combination of symbols) indicating that the blue 7 pattern R1 has won the jackpot is displayed stopped (blue 7 winning). In addition, when a big win is won regardless of the type of the big win, a stop display mode (combination of symbols) indicating that the red 7 pattern R2 has won the big win is displayed (red 7 win).

In other words, when blue 7 wins, the fact that the player has won an advantageous jackpot can be notified in advance (before the jackpot game is started), so the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind. can be done. In addition, when the red 7 hits, the player is only notified that he or she has won the jackpot. It is possible to make a player play a jackpot game while expecting the player to be advantageous.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, based on the variation pattern command including the information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 stops the blue 7 winning. It is configured to determine whether to display or stop displaying the winning of red 7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured so as to vary the stop display ratio of blue 7 hits when the condition for stop display is established (winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player). Note that the variable percentage here means that the stop display percentage for blue 7 is 0%, that is, the state in which the stop display percentage for blue 7 is not displayed, or the stop display percentage for blue 7 is 100%, that is, blue 7. It is a concept that includes a state in which a win is always displayed as a stop.

The combination pattern R3 is not a pattern for indicating the jackpot winning of the special pattern, but a suggestive pattern capable of indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning by combination with the lightning LED 671 arranged in the variable display device unit 80. is. A specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 114(a), but only when the combined symbol R3a of the left inner reel 811a and the combined symbol R3b of the right inner reel 811c are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, A special effective line is set as an effective line for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, and the special effective line is easily set when a big win is won.

With this configuration, symbols (blue 7 symbols R1 or red 7 symbols R2) for indicating the winning of the jackpot are stopped and displayed on a predetermined activated line in response to the variable display using the inner reel 811. In addition to the game of watching whether the combined symbols R3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, it is possible to play the game of watching whether the combination symbols R3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. can.

In addition, in this control example, the combination of the pattern (combination pattern R3) printed on the inner reel 811 and the lightning LED 671 provided in the variable display device unit 80 can be used to suggest and inform the expectation of winning the jackpot. It is configured so that In addition, when the combination pattern R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, the display mode of the combination pattern R3 and the shape of the lightning LED 671 (light emission mode) are arranged so that the combination pattern R3 and the lightning LED 671 are integrally expressed. It is configured to have a relationship with As a result, the player can visually recognize that the combination pattern R3 has been stopped and displayed at the predetermined position, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

The danger symbol R4 is a symbol printed only on the inner left reel 811a and the inner right reel 811c, and is configured as a suggestive symbol for indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big win, similar to the combination symbol R3 described above. . When the danger symbol R4 is stopped and displayed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c in a predetermined arrangement (for example, one row above), and the chance symbol R5 is stopped and displayed on the middle inner reel 811b, a specific is executed. In other words, unlike the combined symbol R3, the danger symbol R4 is a suggestive symbol capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of winning a big win using only the symbols printed on the inner reel 811.例文帳に追加

In this control example, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation time has elapsed becomes the third symbol stop display for notifying the special symbol lottery result, and during the special symbol variation time. In the case of a stop display (including a temporary stop display that swings to the extent that the player can recognize that it is stopped), the stop display of suggestive symbols for suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit of the special symbols being executed. becomes.

In this way, when the inner reel 811 is stopped (temporarily stopped) during the special symbol fluctuation period, the symbols (for example, blue 7 symbols R1, red 7 symbols R2) indicating the lottery result of the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed. The inner reel 811 during the fluctuation period of the special symbols is configured to stop display (temporary stop display) instead of (temporary stop display) the suggestive symbols (for example, the combination symbol R3 and the danger symbol R4). It is possible to prevent misidentification of the stop display (temporary stop display) as the stop display of the third symbol.

Here, both the stop display of the third symbol and the stop display of the suggestive symbol are set based on the special symbol lottery result executed by the main controller 110 . Specifically, since it is set based on the result of the special design winning lottery and the result of the special design variation lottery (variation pattern lottery), any design shows the lottery result of the special design. It becomes a pattern for

A total of 10 display patterns are printed on the left inner reel 811a. Here, since the inner reel unit 810 is configured to rotate in 2 seconds per turn, the left inner reel 811a serves as display means configured to change the display pattern every 0.2 seconds. In this control example, each of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c of the inner reel unit 810 is configured to rotate at the same fluctuation speed (two seconds per turn). , but not limited to this, the fluctuation speed of each inner reel may be made different. In addition, for each inner reel, the time (acceleration period) required from executing rotation to reaching a specific fluctuation speed (two seconds per rotation) may be varied, or a specific fluctuation speed (one rotation 2 seconds), the time (deceleration period) required for stop display may be changed. Furthermore, the timing at which rotation of each inner reel is started may be different.

By rotating each inner reel in various rotation patterns in this manner, the player is reminded that there is some rule in the rotation pattern of each inner reel and the lottery result of special symbols. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In addition, in this control example, in synchronism with the special symbol variation, the variation (rotation) control and stop control of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c are executed. , without being limited to this, for example, among the symbols (third symbols) stopped and displayed in the previous special symbol variation, the stop position (stop display mode) of some symbols is the special symbol variation of this time. When it is determined that it is the same as the stop display mode showing the variation result (lottery result), only the remaining inner reels start rotating without rotating the inner reels displaying the stop display mode. can be configured to

Similarly, a total of 10 display patterns are printed on the right inner reel 811c. As for the type of the printed display pattern, when the display pattern of the left inner reel 811a is stopped and displayed in a specific display area instead of the left combination pattern R3a, the execution condition of the special effect can be established. The difference is that a right combination pattern R3b, which is a part of the combination pattern R3, is provided, and the rest is the same. Reference numerals and explanations for the same display patterns are omitted.

In this control example, the rotation of the right inner reel 811c is normally stopped after the rotation of the left inner reel 811a is stopped. Therefore, when the right inner reel 811c is stop-displayed, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a big win (whether or not the ready-to-win state is reached).

Finally, the symbols displayed on the middle and inside reels 811b will be described. In this control example, when executing the variable display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol using the inner reel unit 810, the inner reel 811b is stopped last. Therefore, with respect to the display symbols printed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, the display symbols for indicating that the lottery result of the big win is lost, and a specific variable display mode are executed. The difference is that a display pattern is added to notify that. The other display symbols are the same as those of the left inner reel 811a or the right inner reel 811c described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this control example, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol using the three inner reels, the reel drive is stopped in the order of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. It is configured to allow Then, among the plurality of display symbols stopped and displayed in the area (display area) visible to the player from the display window 880 on the stopped left inner reel 811a, right inner reel 811c, and middle inner reel 811b, a specific The combination of symbols (third symbols) stopped and displayed in the area (active line) is configured to inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols.

In this way, by stop-displaying the three inner reels in a predetermined order, the player can easily grasp which inner reel will be stop-displayed next. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand. It should be noted that the order of stopping the reels may be changed only when a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is met when a special symbol jackpot is won) is met. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the high possibility of winning the jackpot when an action different from the normal one is executed. In addition, in order for the player to identify whether the reel motion is different from the normal one, it is necessary to grasp the reel motion during normal times. It can make you interested in the content of the action.

Further, by using a configuration in which the three inner reels are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, when two reels out of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b are stopped, the stopped two reels are displayed. It is determined whether or not the display pattern indicating that the special pattern lottery result is a jackpot is stopped (hereinafter referred to as a ready-to-win state) in a specific area for indicating the special pattern lottery result corresponding to one reel. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in order to enhance the performance effect during the variable display, the motor MPU may be configured to perform different rotational motions with respect to the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. For example, by rotating three reels in the forward direction and controlling to rotate only the remaining reels in the reverse direction after reaching the reach state, the player is notified of the reach state in an easy-to-understand manner. Alternatively, if the current fluctuation display is in the reach state (high possibility of being in the reach state), all the inner reels are reversely rotated from the time when the rotation of the three inner reels is executed. , the player can easily predict the lottery result of the current special symbol at the timing when the variable display is executed (the timing when none of the inner reels are stopped).

As described above, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 108, display symbols are printed equally on each of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c. By rotating the reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c, the display symbols displayed in the player's visual recognition area (within the display window 880) can be changed.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 110, but in this control example, an effective line is set in the display area where the inner reel 811 is displayed. , and BAR symbols are arranged in a row, a jackpot game is executed. Also, when the combination pattern R3, the special pattern R6, etc. stop at a specific position, a special effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that a big winning game or a special effect will be executed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the display patterns are arranged at equal intervals, but may be arranged at uneven intervals. Specifically, there is a section in which many display symbols are printed to indicate that the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result (for example, a big win) that is advantageous to the player, and a section in which most of the display symbols are printed. It is also possible to configure so that the intervals between the display patterns become uneven by providing a section where there is no pattern. As a result, the player can predict the game result with an ambiguous feeling such as in which section the rotation of the inner reel 811 will stop.

Next, referring to FIG. 109, the symbols displayed on the outer reel 821 will be described. The display surface of the outer reel 821 used in this control example is roughly divided into three. Here, the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be described using the left outer reel 821a of the left rotation unit 800a. As described above, in this control example, a double reel structure is adopted, and the outer reel 821 is arranged so as to cover the display surface of the inner reel 811 .

The contents of the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be described with reference to the left outer reel 821a. A left second area (segment area) 821a2 in which one 7 segment is formed, and a left third area (effect display area) 821a3.

As described above, the outer reel 821 is formed of a transmissive member that allows the inside of only the first region to be visually recognized among the regions (first region to third region). That is, in the double reel structure of this control example, when performing a variable display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol using the inner reel 811, the first area of the display surface of the outer reel 821 is displayed in the display window 880. It is driven and controlled by the motor MPU so as to stop at the corresponding position.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily visually recognize the driving contents (variable display mode) of the reel (inner reel 811) provided inside of the double reel structure through the display window 880. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, the left second area 821a2 has a left light emitting area 822a extending over the entire left and right width of the left outer reel 821a at the vertical center position of the left second area 821a2, which is combined with the left 7 segment display section 1600a. 110(b)). The left light-emitting area 822a is controlled to emit light in conjunction with the light-emitting display of the 7-segment display section 1600, and has the same color as the six segments of the 7-segment display section 1600 (including errors that make it difficult for the player to distinguish). concept). Specifically, it is configured to transmit the same emission color as the emission color of the 7-segment display section 1600 emitted from the backlight unit 830 (see FIG. 31) of the decorative pattern display device 800 .

In addition, of the left second area 821a2, the portion other than the left light emitting area 822a is formed of a black non-transmissive member, and the player can use the left inner reel provided inside (back side) of the left outer reel 821a. It is configured so that the reel 811a cannot be visually recognized. Thereby, as the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 800, by positioning the outer reel 821 in the second area, it is possible to perform a variable display using 7 segments (7 segment display).

In this control example, when the 7-segment display is executed, during the fluctuation time of the special symbol, each of the 7 segments is controlled to light up and blink at high speed, and the 7-segment display is stopped. configured to perform a dynamic indication that it is not In addition, the 7-segment display during the dynamic display (the 7-segment display that repeats lighting and blinking at high speed) is controlled so as not to misunderstand that it is a specific pattern.

More specifically, in this control example, by controlling the lighting of seven segments one by one, a dynamic display in which one lit segment appears to move in a circle is displayed. is configured to perform As a result, the player can easily grasp that the current period is the dynamic display period, and the display mode of the 7-segment display during the dynamic display period indicates the lottery result of the special symbols. It is possible to prevent misidentification as a pattern.

That is, in this control example, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is arranged around the decorative design display device 800, and according to the stop mode of the decorative design display device 800, a pattern (third The type of the variable display mode for variably displaying the symbol) is configured to be variable. Specifically, the variable display mode using the inner reel 811, the variable display mode using the outer reel 821, and the variable display mode using the 7 segments can be easily switched, and each variable display mode can be The displayed regions can overlap. Therefore, it is possible to provide various variable display modes within a limited predetermined area, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109, in the left third area 821a3, part of a pattern (a pattern imitating "7") is printed to indicate that the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win. , and is driven and controlled by the motor MPU to stop at a position corresponding to the display window 880, the left special display mode 823a printed on the left outer reel 821a and the middle special display printed on the middle and outer reels 821b are displayed. The mode 823b and the right special display mode 823c printed on the right outer reel 821c are combined to stop and display the special display mode imitating "7".

With this configuration, the player can be notified of the lottery result of the special symbol using the display symbol having a size that occupies the majority of the display area in the display window 880, thereby giving an impact to the player. can be done. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when executing the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the outer reel 821, the symbol rows of the outer reels 821 are aligned ( 109), the outer reels 821 are synchronously rotated.

As described above, the display pattern of the outer reel 821 has been described with reference to the left outer reel 821a. The only difference is the design), so detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115, the contents of variable display executed by the variable display device unit 80 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the variable display contents when the normal state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the variable display using the inner reel 811 in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 110(a), normally, three display patterns of each inner reel (left inner reel 811a to right inner reel 811c) are displayed in the display window 880 vertically. As an effective line for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols, the display symbols stopped and displayed in the upper part (the left inner reel 811a has a blue 7 symbol R1, the middle inner reel 811b has a blank symbol R7, and the right inner reel 811c has a right combination Symbol R3b) is the effective line, and display symbols stopped and displayed in the middle section (the left inner reel 811a has a red 7 symbol R2, the middle inner reel 811b has a special symbol R6, and the right inner reel 811c has a blue 7 symbol). A second line S2 with symbol R1) as the effective line, and display symbols stopped and displayed in the lower part (the left inner reel 811a is a bar symbol, the middle inner reel 811b is a blank symbol R7, and the right inner reel 811c is a right combination symbol R3b. ) is formed as an effective line.

Furthermore, a first diagonal line V1 having the lower stage of the left inner reel 811a, the middle stage of the middle inner reel 811b, and the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c as effective lines, the upper stage of the left inner reel 811a, and the middle inner reel 811b A second oblique line V2 is formed with the middle stage and the lower stage of the right inner reel 811c as effective lines.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, the display symbols stopped and displayed on the five effective lines (S1 to S3 and V1, V2) formed on the display surface of the variable display device unit 80 The player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of . Furthermore, in this control example, the number of target effective lines is made different according to the stop position of the display pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the upper position of the left inner reel 811a constitutes a part of two effective lines (the first line S1 and the second diagonal line V2), and the left inner reel 811a The middle position of , constitutes a part of one valid line (second line S2). As a result, when the first inner reel (for example, the left inner reel 811a) among the inner reels stops, the next inner reel (for example, the right inner reel 811c) stops at which position. A game can be played while predicting whether it is desirable. In addition, when some of the display symbols corresponding to the combination of the display symbols for indicating the lottery result advantageous to the player stop at the stop positions constituting a part of the plurality of activated lines, the display symbols on the plurality of activated lines Since the reach state can be reached at , the player's expectation for a big win can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110(b), the variable display contents when the time saving state (probability variable state) is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600 during the time saving state. In this control example, when the time-saving state (probability variable state) is set, it is configured such that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the normal state is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, in a time-saving state (probability variable state) in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be set, 7-segment display is executed as a variation display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. Thus, even when a variation pattern with a short variation time is set, the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern can be surely stopped and displayed after the lapse of the predetermined variation time.

As shown in FIG. 110(b), during the time saving state, the left second area (seg area) 821a2 of the left outer reel 821a, the middle second area (seg area) 821b2 of the middle and outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c By positioning each of the right second regions (regions for segments) 821c2 so as to correspond to the display window 880, a left 7-segment display portion 1600a, a middle 7-segment display portion 1600b, and a right 7-segment display portion are displayed in the display region. Three 7-segs of 1600c are formed. FIG. 110(b) shows a state in which all the areas that can be lit in the 7-segment display are lit, and each 7-segment display is displayed in a display mode imitating the numbers "0" to "9". It becomes possible.

When the lottery result of the special pattern is started during this time-saving state, each 7 segment is dynamically displayed, and the display mode shows the lottery result of the special pattern after the lapse of a predetermined period (variation time set in the variation pattern). The display pattern is stopped and displayed. Here, in this control example, as the display pattern for indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, the display pattern in which the light emitting area 822 is made to emit light is configured to be easily displayed.

Specifically, in this example of control, the 7-segment display pattern is constructed so as to display 10 types of display patterns imitating numbers "0" to "9". If is out, among the display patterns imitating the 10 types of numbers described above, the display patterns (“2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”) that emit light from the light emitting area 822 , "8", and "9") are configured to be easily set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the display symbols that are stopped and displayed.

That is, of the seven segments used for the 7-segment display, one segment (light-emitting region 822) formed using the outer reel 821 is different from the other six segments in the display mode when lit (when light is emitted). are configured to be lit in the same color so that they are the same, but since the mode when they are turned off (when not emitting light) is different from that of the other six segments, light emission when not emitting light It is possible to suppress misunderstanding that the area 822 forms a part of the display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern.

More specifically, in this control example, the second area of the outer reel 821 is divided into an area that transmits light emitted from the backlight unit 830 and an area that does not transmit the light. A light-emitting region 822 is formed using the light-emitting region 822, and the other region is formed of a non-transmissive member (black member) for preventing light from transmitting. The light-emitting region 822 is made of a white member for transmitting light from the backlight unit 830 .

Therefore, the light emitting region 822 becomes a region formed of a white member surrounded by a black member. As a result, even when the backlight unit 830 is not lit, the non-transmissive light emitting area 822 can be easily grasped, and as a result, a part of the display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is formed. It is possible to suppress misidentification as being present.

Then, using these three 7 segments, a variable display for showing the special pattern lottery result to the player is executed, and after a predetermined period of fluctuation time elapses, the special pattern lottery result is displayed. The display pattern is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, after the time saving state is set as the game state, the period until the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches 100 times is configured to be the time saving state, and it is executed during the time saving state. When the number of times of lottery of special symbols has reached a predetermined number, that is, when the number of times of remaining lotteries of special symbols executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times, 7 segments are used to reduce the number of remaining times (remaining lottery number of times) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111(a), display contents of the third pattern displayed on the variable display device unit 80 during time saving (during time saving state) will be described. In this control example, when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, the segment display unit 1600 of the segment display device 600 is used to variably display the third symbol. FIG. 111(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol during time saving. As shown in FIG. 111(a), the variation results are shown in the display mode of the 7-segment display of the pattern. In FIG. 111(a), "7" is displayed in the left 7-segment display section 1600a, "5" is displayed in the middle 7-segment display section 1600b, and "6" is displayed in the right 7-segment display section 1600c. In this way, the display mode using the 7-segment variably displays the pattern by irradiating the light provided in the backlight unit, so that it is possible to cope with a variation pattern with a short variation time.

Here, the display of the number of remaining time reductions will be explained with reference to FIG. . As shown in FIG. 111(b), the number of remaining time reductions is displayed on the middle 7-segment display section 1600b. In this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions is less than five times, the number of remaining time reductions is notified to the player using 7 segments. As a result, since it is possible to inform in advance the period until the game state advantageous to the player (time saving state more advantageous than the normal state) ends, the time saving state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. You can control what you give.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbols, first, the display symbols for showing the lottery result of the special symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110(a)), and then the number of times of remaining time reduction is displayed. It is configured so that Then, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special pattern is set so that the display pattern showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction number is not displayed in the 7 segments that display the remaining time reduction number. Configure.

By configuring in this way, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the remaining time reduction number display showing the remaining time reduction number can be made different, so that the remaining time reduction for the player. The number of times can be reliably reported.

Furthermore, in this control example, after the display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped and displayed, if there is no need to display the remaining short time number display indicating the number of remaining short time times, that is, the special pattern jackpot is won. In this case, the display pattern is set regardless of the numerical value of the number of remaining time reductions displayed next, so that the display pattern mode for indicating the winning of the jackpot can be set without limitation. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display pattern to be stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the number of prize balls, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) given by the winning jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the middle 7 segment display unit 1600b is used to display the number of remaining time reductions. The number of remaining time reductions may be displayed using the segment display section 1600a or the right 7 segment display section 1600c. In this case, for example, when the left 7-segment display unit 1600a that is first stop-displayed is used to display the number of remaining time reductions, the game can be played while knowing in advance the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed next. By doing so, when the same numerical value as the number of times of short remaining time to be displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the left 7-segment display part 1600a, the lottery result of this time is a big hit. can be known in advance. In addition, the 7-segment display section 1600 that displays the number of remaining time reductions may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in this control example, it is configured to display the variable display of the special symbol and the number of times of remaining time reduction within one variable display period (including the symbol confirmation time). , It is configured to execute the remaining time reduction number display for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation time of the set special symbol. Therefore, for example, if the variable time of the set special symbol is 2 seconds, the variable display of the special symbol is performed for 1.5 seconds regardless of whether or not the display of the number of remaining time reductions is executed, and then 0.5 seconds. However, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether the remaining time reduction number display is executed or not, and if the remaining time reduction number display is not executed, 1 second In contrast to the execution of the special symbol variation, when the state is to execute the display of the number of times of remaining time reduction, the shortening variation of 0.5 seconds is executed as the special symbol variation, and then the number of times of remaining time reduction of 0.5 seconds is displayed. configured to run By configuring in this way, both the variable display of the special symbols and the display of the number of remaining time reductions can be performed within one variable display period of the special symbols.

In this control example, as described above, the variable display of special symbols and the display of the number of remaining time reductions are executed together within one variable display period of special symbols. You may comprise so that a remaining time reduction frequency display may be performed so that a special design variation may be straddled. In this case, for example, regardless of the set variation time, the special symbol variation display is performed for a certain period of time, and the remaining time, which is the difference between the period during which the variation display is performed and the set variation time, is shortened. It is good to set it as the time to display the number of times. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbols can be made constant, a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified. can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for executing the remaining time reduction number display is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the set variable time is a predetermined time (for example, 0 5 seconds), it is preferable to perform the display of the number of remaining time reductions across the period during which the next special symbol variation is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of remaining time reductions with certainty. However, in this case, since the variation of the special symbols is started while the remaining time reduction number display is being performed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that a new special symbol variation has started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol variation has started by blinking the area not used for the display of the number of remaining time reductions (in the example of FIG. 111(b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a). Or, by varying the luminescent color of the display mode of the remaining time reduction number display (the display mode imitating "4" in FIG. 111(b)), the player is notified that the special symbol variation has started. should be configured to As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a new special symbol variation has started while executing the remaining time reduction number display.

When executing the above-described processing, it is preferable to specifically provide the following configuration in the audio lamp control device 113 . First, a variation time extracting means for extracting a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbol variation from information included in a variation pattern command output from main controller 110, and variation of the third symbol within the variation time of special symbol variation. A setting means for setting a third symbol variation display time for executing display and a remaining time reduction number display time for executing remaining time reduction number display, a third symbol variation display time set by the setting means, and a variation time extraction means extract Calculating means for calculating the difference between the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) calculated by the calculation means, Lower limit determining means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculating means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and Lower limit determining means When it is determined that the time is equal to or less than the lower limit variation time, a continuation flag is set to ON to indicate that the display of the number of remaining time reductions will not end within the current variation pattern period.

This continuation flag is configured to be set to OFF at the timing when the display of the number of remaining time reductions ends. When a new variation pattern is set, a variation start display mode may be set to indicate that a new pattern variation is to be executed during the display of the number of remaining time reductions.

Furthermore, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for executing the display of the number of remaining time reductions, and even if the shortest time among the plurality of different times is set, the display of the number of remaining time reductions is the current fluctuation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the processing will not end within this time. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set, the third pattern variation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different between when the remaining time saving number of times display is executed and when not executed, and the remaining time saving state is set. When the number of times display is executed, it may be configured such that the shorter third symbol variation display time is likely to be set than when it is not executed.

In addition, in this control example, the period during which the special symbols are variably displayed (symbol variation period) and the period during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed (symbol determination period) are included in the special symbol variation time. However, without being limited to this, the special symbol symbol fluctuation period and the symbol fixed period may be divided and controlled. In this case, for example, if the remaining time short number display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol determination period, and the third symbol fluctuation display time longer than the symbol fluctuation period is set, or the remaining time short number display period is set in advance to be longer than the pattern confirmation period, and if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number display cannot be performed during the pattern fluctuation period, it will not end within this fluctuation pattern period. continuation flag may be set to ON.

In this control example, when executing the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (variable display by 7 segments), the pattern display mode for showing the third pattern is variably displayed. Without being limited to this, it is possible to variably display while changing the display mode (for example, the display mode in which only one segment is lit among the 7 segments) different from the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. can be configured to By configuring in this way, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third pattern, a specific third pattern is stopped and displayed by an afterimage of light. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a person is misunderstood.

In addition, as a variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, there is a high-speed variable display period during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual pattern display modes that are variably displayed, and a high-speed variable display period in which the individual variably displayed pattern display modes are visually recognized by the player. A simple low-speed fluctuation display period is set, a display mode different from the third pattern is variably displayed during the high-speed fluctuation display period, and a pattern display mode showing the third pattern is variably displayed during the low-speed fluctuation display period. You can As a result, it is possible to suppress the sudden stop of the third symbol while suppressing the misrecognition that the third symbol is displayed stopped due to the afterimage of the light during the high-speed fluctuation. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, variable display contents using the variable display of the inner reel 811 and the variable display of the segment display section 1600 will be described. In this control example, as described above, the variable display of the third symbol executed using the inner reel 811, the variable display of the third symbol executed using the outer reel 821, and the segment display unit 1600 and the variable display of the third symbol to be executed. 1600) is configured to enable execution of variable display (mixed variable display) of the third symbol.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the mixed variation display described above is more likely to be executed than in the case of other than the big win. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of variably displaying the third pattern, the player expects that the third pattern is variably displayed (mixed variable display) using the plurality of devices. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot of the special symbol by using a gorgeous presentation (mixed fluctuation display).

FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during mixed fluctuation display (special reach 1) using the inner reel 811 and segment display section 1600. FIG. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but when the special reach 1 is set as the variable display mode of the third symbol, first, the variable display (normal variable display) that rotates the inner reel 811 is executed. Then, it is temporarily stopped (including a slight swinging state that makes the player think that it has stopped) at the combination of the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (hit). After that, the displacement member 670 is changed to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811, and when the displacement member 670 is changed again to the initial position (first position), the variable display device unit 80 is displayed. An effect mode indicated by 112 is displayed.

112, the left 7-segment display portion 1600 and the right 7-segment display portion 1600c stop displaying the third symbol indicating "7", and the middle and inner reels 811b move in the direction of the arrow (from top to bottom). rotating towards. In this state, the left outer reel 821a and the right outer reel 821c are controlled so that the second region corresponding to the 7-segment display portion 1600 (the region where the player does not visually recognize the inner reel 811) is positioned within the display window 880. , and only the inner and outer reels 821b are controlled so that the first area in which the player can visually recognize the inner reels 811 is positioned within the display window 880. FIG.

In this way, by executing different operation controls according to the effect modes executed for the three outer reels 821, mixed variable display can be executed. Then, in the middle and inner reels 811b, the third symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed in one of the display areas displayed in the display window 880, so that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. is notified to the player.

That is, according to the effect mode shown in FIG. 112, even if the third symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed at any of the upper, middle and lower positions of the middle and inner reels 811b, it is possible to win big. Since the effect (variable display) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect with a high possibility of winning a big win is being executed.

112, only the corresponding displacement member 670 (middle displacement member 670b) may be varied so as to vary the display area of the middle/inner reel 811b. The third pattern imitating "7" displayed on the segment display part 1600 is illuminated in red or blue to limit the color of the third pattern of the middle and inner reels 811b indicating that the jackpot has been won. can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, variable display contents using the outer reel 821 will be described. In this control example, as an effect during the variable display using the inner reel 811, a special ready-to-win 2 effect in which the outer reel 821 is rotated is configured to be executable. This special ready-to-win 2 effect is a effect in which the patterns of the left outer reel 821a, the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c, which constitute the outer reel 821, are aligned and rotated in synchronization.

FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents of special reach 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 113(a), while the inner reel 811 rotates forward at high speed, the outer reel 821 slowly rotates forward (1/3 the rotational speed of the inner reel 811), An effect is executed in which the special display mode 823 is gradually displayed in the display area within the display window 880 . Since the third area where the special display mode 823 is printed is a non-transmissive area in which the inner reel 811 cannot be visually recognized, the display area of the inner reel 811 gradually narrows depending on the rotation state of the outer reel 821, and the outer reel 821 completely covers the inner reel 811, a display pattern indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed as shown in FIG. 113(b).

113(a) and 113(b), while the inner reel 811 is rotating in the forward direction at a high speed, the outer reel 821 is slowly rotated in the forward direction so that the momentum of rotation of the inner reel 811 is increased. shows an effect example in which the special display modes (823a, 823b, 823c) displayed in the third regions (821a3, 821b3, 821c3) of the outer reel 821 are interlocked and rotated so as to be pushed out, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the inner reel 811 and the rotation direction of the outer reel 821 may be opposite to each other. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the inner reel 811 is rotating at a faster speed than before.

113(a) and 113(b) show an example in which the outer reel 821 is driven in one direction at a constant rotational speed. The rotation direction of the outer reel 821 is controlled to be the opposite direction (the direction opposite to the forward direction) from the state shown in FIG. may be configured to continue the rotation of In this case, after passing the state shown in FIG. Again, it is preferable to configure so that the speed until reaching the state of FIG. 113(a) is faster. As a result, it is possible to relatively lengthen the period during which the special display mode is stopped and displayed in the display window 880 .

In addition, in this control example, as described with reference to FIG. 113, each reel (the left outer reel 821a, the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c) forming the outer reel 821 are aligned and rotated. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be driven separately like the inner reel 811 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the contents of the special reach 3 effect (pseudo-fluctuation effect) will be described. FIG. 114(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the decorative symbol display device in the pseudo-variation effect. In this control example, during the dynamic display period (during the variable display period) in which the display symbols for showing the result of one lottery of the special symbols are dynamically displayed, it is as if the results of the lottery were displayed a plurality of times. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation production that looks like it.

In this pseudo-fluctuation effect, a re-fluctuation effect is executed a plurality of times during one dynamic display period, in which the displayed symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then the fluctuation is restarted. It is constructed so that the possibility of winning a big win increases as the number of times this re-variation performance is executed increases.

Here, if it is a pachinko machine 10 using a liquid crystal display device, for example, the number of times of re-fluctuation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect (pseudo consecutive times) is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect to the player. There is a problem that it is difficult to notify (the number of pseudo-runs) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is varied each time a re-variation effect is executed, thereby notifying the player of the number of re-variation effects that have been executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is configured to be varied so that the display area of the decorative pattern display device 800 becomes narrower each time the re-variation effect is executed, and each time the re-variation effect is executed , the number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the active lines to be watched by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the process of stop-displaying the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the big win. .

As shown in FIG. 114( a ), the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a displacement member 670 . Furthermore, lightning LEDs 671, which are light-emitting means composed of LED lamps, are arranged at the four corners of the variable display unit 80. A first lightning LED 671a is located on the lower left side of the variable display unit 80, and a second lightning LED 671a is located on the upper left side. An LED 671b, a third lightning LED 671c on the upper right side, and a fourth lightning LED 671d on the lower right side are arranged. In this control example, when the combination pattern R3 is stopped and displayed at the corresponding position of each lightning LED 671, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5, which are special effective lines, are formed, and the fifth special line L5 is formed. When the special symbol R6 (symbol imitating a black star) stops, an effect (so-called pseudo-fluctuation effect) in which each inner reel 811 rotates again is executed.

Specifically, the rotation (fluctuation) of each inner reel 811 is started corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the combined symbol R3a stops at the upper and lower stages of the left inner reel 811a, and then the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c. And when the combination symbol R3b stops in the lower row, the four lightning LEDs 671 are turned on to form the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4. In this state, the rotation speed of the middle/inner reel 811b gradually decreases, and when the special pattern R6 is stop-displayed on the fifth special line L5, the predetermined symbols on the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5 are displayed. 114(a)), the displacement member 670 changes in the direction of narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811 (see FIG. 114(b)), Each inner reel 811 re-fluctuations (turns) (performs the first pseudo-fluctuation effect).

When the first pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, the display area of the inner reel 811 becomes narrower than usual due to the displacement member 670 being varied, so the number of effective lines of the display pattern is reduced to 5 lines (S1 to S3 and V1, V2) to 3 lines (see FIG. 114(b)). In this control example, the displacement members 670 are arranged above and below the variable display device unit 80, and are variably operated so as to cover the display area of the inner reel 811, thereby narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the effective lines in the horizontal direction (fourth line S4, fifth line S5) formed in the display area during the first pseudo-fluctuation effect are different from the first line S1 to third line S3. formed in position.

Specifically, the fourth line S4 is formed between the first line S1 and the second line S2 (see FIG. 110(a)), and the second line S2 and the third line S3 (see FIG. 110(a)) are formed. ) is formed between them. By varying the position where the effective line of the display pattern is formed in accordance with the size of the display area set in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the display area of the inner reel 811 is variable, a game can be played. The display pattern can be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is easy for a person to understand.

Although detailed description is omitted, the reel MPU 114a that controls the driving of the inner reel 811 receives a command including information indicating the currently set active line type from the sound lamp control device 113, and the received information Based on this, it is configured to control the stop position of the display pattern. Therefore, in a configuration in which the position (vertical position) at which the effective line of the display pattern is formed can be varied, the display pattern can be stopped and displayed at an appropriate position.

In addition to the configuration described above, for example, detection means (sensor) for detecting the actual variable position of the displacement member 670 is provided, and based on the detection result of the detection means, the reel MPU 114a determines the forming position of the pay line. It may be configured so as to discriminate and determine the stop position of the display pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of commands (amount of information) output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and to determine the actual position of the displacement member 670. Even when the member 670 does not operate normally (at the time of failure), the display pattern can be stopped in an appropriate display mode.

In this control example, when the size of the display area is changed by changing the displacement member 670 during the pseudo-variation effect, the forming position of the effective line of the display pattern is changed according to the size of the display area. However, without being limited to this, the displacement member 670 is in the initial position (see FIG. 114(a)). (See FIG. 110(a)) In the formed state, only the effective line forming position may be variably set so that the second line S2 and the third line S3 are effective lines.

Returning to FIG. 114(b), the description is continued. During the first pseudo-fluctuation effect (special reach 3), a display area is formed in which a maximum of two display patterns (see FIG. 108) printed on each inner reel 811 can be visually recognized. In this state, since it is not possible to form a valid line in a diagonal direction, a part of two valid lines (fourth line S4 and fifth valid line S5) are formed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c. The position to stop is set as the stop position of the display pattern. In addition to the positions forming part of the above-described two effective lines (the fourth line S4 and the fifth effective line S5), the middle/inner reel 811b has a position where the fifth special line L5 is formed. Set as position.

That is, during the first pseudo-fluctuation effect, the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c execute a variable display (two-frame fluctuation) for stopping and displaying the display symbols at two positions, and the middle inner reel 811b executes the display symbols. is configured to perform variable display (three-frame variation) for stopping and displaying at three positions.

In this way, even if the display areas of the inner reels 811 are the same size, by making the number of positions where the display symbols are stopped and displayed different, it is possible to vary the variable display mode for each inner reel 811. , it is possible to provide a novel performance to the player. In addition, the number of frames of variable display, that is, the number of positions at which the displayed symbols may be stopped by slowing down the variation speed while the displayed symbols are fluctuating is defined as the number of positions at which the displayed symbols can be stopped and displayed. , the player can easily grasp at which position the display pattern stops in the current variable state of the displacement member 670 .

Further, in this control example, by combining the lightning LED 671 and the combination pattern R3 as described above, the display mode is such that the lightning runs toward the position where the fifth special line L5 is formed (see FIG. 114(a)). ), so that the player can easily watch which display symbols are stopped and displayed on the newly formed active line, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbols can be displayed. It may be configured to be a symbol or pattern.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display pattern printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) provided in the variable display device unit 80 are combined to form a new effective line. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display pattern is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a decorative movable accessory is positioned at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. may be configured. In addition, the display pattern may be stopped and displayed first, and then a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) emits light. In this way, the display patterns that can be variably displayed and the elements other than the display patterns are combined so as to satisfy a predetermined condition to form a new effective line, so that the player can grasp the lottery result of the special patterns. When playing the game, not only the variable display mode of the display pattern but also the light emission mode of the light emitting means and the movement mode of the movable accessory for decoration are observed, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the display contents of the display area of the inner reel 811 during the second pseudo-fluctuation effect will be described. When the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5 during the first pseudo-fluctuation effect explained with reference to FIG. While the display area of the inner reel 811 is changed in a direction to narrow it, each inner reel 811 starts to change (rotate) again. During the second pseudo-fluctuation effect, the display area of the inner reel 811 is reduced to one display symbol, and only one effective line (second line S2) of display symbols is formed.

Then, on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, a red 7 symbol R2 is stop-displayed to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and the middle inner reel 811c is displayed for the player. A variable display is executed in which only the types of display symbols stopped and displayed in 811b are focused.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the flow of operation contents of various devices while the pseudo-fluctuation effect (special reach 3) is being executed will be described. FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices during the pseudo-continuous effect (during the pseudo-fluctuation effect). As shown in FIG. 116, when the pseudo-variation effect (special reach 3) is executed, various devices provided in the variable display device unit 80 (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7 segment display section 1600, displacement member 670 , lightning LED 671) are configured to be driven at predetermined timings.

Specifically, first, each inner reel 811 rotates according to the timing when the variation of the special symbol is executed, and first, the left inner reel 811a is stopped and the left combination symbol R3a is stopped at a specific position. After that, the right inner reel 811c is controlled to stop so that the right combination symbol R3b stops at a specific position. After that, the lightning LED 671 lights up, and four effective lines (first special line L1 to fourth special line L4) are formed. Then, when the special pattern R6 of the middle/inner reel 811b stops on the fifth special line L5 which is effectively determined in the state where the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed (Fig. 114 (a )), the first chance has been established, and the pseudo-fluctuation effect continues.

When the first chance is established, each inner reel 811 starts to move again, and the displacement member 670 moves from the first position, which is the initial position, to the second position (the area of the display surface of the inner reel 811 is the first position). 114(b)), forming a variable display state in which there are three effective lines (see FIG. 114(b)). In this state, regardless of the stop display modes of the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, an effect is executed to draw attention only to whether or not the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line L5. Here, when the special pattern R6 stops on the fifth special line L5, finally, each inner reel 811 starts to move again, and the displacement member 670 is changed from the second position to the third position ( See Figure 115).

When the displacement member 670 is changed to the third position, the effective line becomes one (the second line S2), and both the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c reach the display symbol (third symbol) indicating the winning of the jackpot. The red 7 pattern R2 is stopped and displayed so as to bring about the state (see FIG. 115). As shown in FIG. 116, the upper limit of the effect display time to be executed corresponding to the variable display time of the special symbol is set longer, and the effect to be executed while temporarily stopping the third symbol during the effect display is executed. .

In this control example, the period during which one special symbol variation is performed is used to perform the above-described pseudo-variation effect, that is, the effect of varying the effective symbol row in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured, as another configuration, it may be configured so as to execute an effect of varying the effective symbol sequence across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main control device 110, which will be described later with reference to FIG. It is preferable to determine the lottery result in advance, and to set the effect (continuous effect) so as to span a plurality of special symbol variations based on the result of the prior determination. By configuring in this way, it is possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol a plurality of times during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, so that the player is informed at what timing the special symbol is to be executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the continuous performance has been executed in response to the variable display of .

In addition, in this control example, a configuration is used in which a pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases. For example, a pseudo-variation effect may be executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, the possibility of winning the jackpot increases as the number of re-fluctuations increases (the set fluctuation time increases). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol during the pseudo fluctuation production is a predetermined number of times, the ready-to-win display is displayed, the possibility of winning the jackpot is increased. can be configured to As a result, during the period from the execution of the pseudo-fluctuation performance to the end of the performance, the player can always play the game while having a sense of anticipation for the big win.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 126, the details of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display unit 80, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device. .

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers. In this control example, the payout control device 111 is part of the sub-control device, and various commands are transmitted in one direction from the main control device 110. However, the payout control device is not limited to this. Various commands may be bidirectionally transmitted so that the commands from 111 can be received by the main controller 110 .

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 135) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the right side as the MPU 201. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, and the lighting and extinguishing of a lamp display device (electrical decoration units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, 7-segment display unit 1600, etc.) 227. It controls the setting of the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 in which output and variable effects (variable display) are performed. It drives the drive motors KM (inner reel drive motors KM1a-1c, outer reel drive motors KM2a-2c, displacement member drive motors KM3a-3c) for driving various devices provided in the variable display device unit 80. is. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the drive motor KM, and the frame button 22. FIG.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and based on the determined display mode Drive control of various drive motors KM and light emission control of the 7-segment display section 1600 are executed. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the variable display unit 80 is used to change the display mode of the variable display. , change the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227 during the reach state, or change the target (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7 segment display unit 1600) for which variable display is performed. Vary the contents of the command for

Also, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to receive the detection result of the detection means for detecting the drive result of each drive motor KM, though not shown. Then, based on the detection result of each detection means received, the type of the symbol display that is stopped and displayed can be determined. As a result, it is determined whether or not the display mode determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display mode actually stopped and displayed match. configured to run. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a variable display that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, since this control example has a different variable display mode, for example, when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the operation content of the inner reel 811, a variable display mode that does not use the inner reel 811 (for example, the outer reel 821, and the variable display mode using the 7-segment display unit 1600). As a result, even if there is a problem with one variable display mode, the variable display can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Furthermore, in this case, the switching destination variable display mode may be changed according to the set game state, or the setting may be made by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22). Also good.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described. In the main control device 110, the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol), the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, etc. Perform 10 major operations. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display control conditions in the variable display device unit 80 It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform settings and the like.

For the lottery of special symbols and the condition setting of the display control in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbols and the jackpot type of the special symbols are selected. 1st per type counter C2 used for, stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of removal in special symbols, 1st initial value used for initial value setting of random number counter C1 per A random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 137). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is displayed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. are stored respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 66. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 137).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 120(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special It is divided into two types, one for the period when the pattern is in a high probability state. That is, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 120(a)) is composed of a first winning random number table for low probability and a first winning random number table for high probability. The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a for special symbol low probability and the first winning random number table 202a for special symbol high probability are provided in ROM 202 of main controller 110. FIG.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot when the probability of a special symbol is low. (See FIG. 120(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers that become the big hit of the special symbol. )). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40".

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120(b)). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) is selected, and when it is "40 to 79", the jackpot B (16R Time-saving jackpot) is selected, and when it is "80 to 99", jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot) is selected.

In this embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120(b)) are set to three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but not limited thereto, four types The above jackpot types may be selected, or two types or less, for example, only one jackpot type may be selected. In addition, the types and ratios of the jackpot types selected for the special symbol 1 jackpot and the special symbol 2 jackpot may be set differently.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the variable display device unit 80, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol is not the ready-to-win symbol, and the final stop symbol is "loose reach". Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: (for example, the range of 90 to 99) and "Completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89). The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third pattern displayed on the variable display device unit 80 and the detailed pattern fluctuation mode are determined by the sound ramp control device 113. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 137) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. ing.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 121(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 121(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121(c)). and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121(d)) are set at least. It should be noted that, if the latent state (probability variable with time-saving no state) is set as the gaming state, the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to, and if the time-saving state is set as the game state, it is out The use (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to.

First, with reference to FIG. 121(b), the large winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 121(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 121(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 121(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 121(b) to 121(d), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) allow the player to win a special symbol jackpot. In this control example, the contents of each variation pattern table are defined such that the longer the variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected, the higher the expectation of the big win.

Then, when a variation pattern indicating normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) is set, a variation pattern command indicating this is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. A ready-to-win effect is set based on the variation pattern command that is output and received by the audio ramp control device 113 side. Here, in this control example, a plurality of ready-to-win performance modes are prepared. A pattern ready-to-win production mode in which the symbol R1 or the red 7 pattern R2) is stopped and displayed; It has a rotation reach production mode that makes it possible.

That is, from the main controller 110, as the variable display effect set on the audio lamp control device 113 side, only a command indicating that the ready-to-win effect is to be executed and the variable display period is output, and the audio lamp control device 113 It is configured to select which ready-to-win effect mode is to be set as the ready-to-win effect mode to be executed this time on the side.

When setting the ready-to-win effect mode to be executed this time, the voice ramp control device 113 determines the current game state, the result of the special symbol lottery, whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22, and randomly obtainable values. It is configured to be set based on (the value of the effect counter) or the like. With this configuration, various ready-to-win effects can be provided to the player, so that the ready-to-win effects can be executed at various timings in the process of executing the variable display effect. can prevent the player from getting bored with the game prematurely.

In addition, in this control example, at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, that is, at the start timing of the new special symbol variation, the content of the ready-to-win effect mode to be executed this time is set. , without limitation. For example, the stop display mode (stop display) of the left inner reel 811a that stops the variable display is determined first, and the ready-to-win effect mode to be executed this time may be set according to the determination result. By configuring in this way, the timing for setting the ready-to-win effect mode can be varied. In addition, since the timing of setting the ready-to-win effect mode can be made different from the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbols is started, that is, the timing at which the execution processing concentrates in the pachinko machine 10, various processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a large load is temporarily applied.

In addition, the special reach 3 (see FIGS. 114 and 115), which is a pseudo-fluctuation effect, is terminated in the middle of the effect (so-called fake effect). In the case of "Normal Reach" in which a 30-second variation time is set as , a short false effect is executed in which the variation display ends without the first chance being established, and a 60-second variation time is set as the variation pattern. In the case of "super reach", the first chance is established, but the second chance is not established.

By executing such a fake production, even if the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is not set, the same production mode as the pseudo-variation production can be executed, so the first half of the pseudo-variation production for the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the part, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game without experiencing at least part of the pseudo-variation performance.

Furthermore, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is set, the special symbol is a big win at the timing when the second chance eye in the pseudo-variation effect can be established. A combination of display symbols (third symbols) for indicating that the winning has been won may be stopped and displayed. As a result, after the first chance has been established, the effect of whether or not the second chance will be established (the effect of whether or not the special symbol R6 will stop on the fifth special line), or the blue 7 symbol. The content of the effect can be set so as to execute any of the effects in which the R1 and the red 7 symbols R2 are in the ready-to-win state. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of anticipation for the big win regardless of which type of effect content is set, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is set, after the first chance is established (see FIG. 114(a)), an effect ( (See FIG. 114(b)) may be skipped and an effect (skip effect) for executing the final stage of the pseudo-fluctuation effect (see FIG. 115) may be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. In addition, even in the performance mode other than the special reach 3, it may be configured to execute a fake performance or a skip performance corresponding to the length of the set variable time.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description is continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 66. , is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 120(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number set as the hit set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 120(c)), it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal pattern, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal pattern is variably displayed on the second pattern display device 83. is run for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second prize winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal patterns, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal patterns are variably displayed on the second pattern display device 83. is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore, the opening period of the second winning opening 140 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 140 . A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 140 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 137).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 sets the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80 according to the values of the counters and the like. , the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, contents of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, as shown in FIG. 119(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. A counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a variable probability flag 203g, a time saving medium counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, a time saving flag 203k, a counter buffer 203y, It has at least another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is obtained in accordance with the starting winning, a jackpot lottery with original special symbols is started. Separately, from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted is predicted (estimated). In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information to store the special symbols 1 or 1 in the RAM 233. Of the special symbols 2, the corresponding special symbols are stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. , predict various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize. It should be noted that this prediction (prefetch) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the game state (normal game state or probability variable game state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . As a result, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the starting prize.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a dedicated storage area for the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1 ) is changed to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (variable display unit It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of variable display performed at 80) up to 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S504 in FIG. 131). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 128).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 128 and S505 in FIG. 131). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the variable display device unit 80 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 131, and is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 128). In addition, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of holding variable display in special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 128, S511 in FIG. 131 reference).

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 66 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 66 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S804 in FIG. 127). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 133).

When the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 134: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the variable probability flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203g has an initial value set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variable variable time short no jackpot) When it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), it is referred to determine whether the game state is a variable probability state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and when the next big hit game is started, it is turned off. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 129, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, a special symbol lottery is drawn based on the first per random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the variable probability flag 203g is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability.

In this control example, the timing of setting the variable probability flag 203g to ON is the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R variable variable jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R variable variable time short no jackpot) in the jackpot control process (jackpot However, it may be set so that the lottery of special symbols executed after the end of the big win can be performed in a high probability state. Alternatively, when the condition for executing the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is established, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON by the time the special symbol lottery is executed. can be configured to

Also, the timing to set the variable probability flag 203g to OFF is the case where the jackpot game is started, but it is not limited to this. may be configured to be set to OFF at the timing when is stopped displayed.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state, and when the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This time-saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control processing (of FIG. 138). S1215 reference). Then, it is referred to for determining whether or not it is during the time saving in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 133), and in the special symbol variation process, it is subtracted by 1 each time the variation time elapses. (See S205 in FIG. 128). In addition, when the value of the counter 203h during time saving is larger than 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state and time saving state of special symbols.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state by the jackpot control processing (FIG. 138, S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG.

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state (ordinary symbol high probability state), and if the value of the time saving flag 203k is ON, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol. If the value of the time saving flag 203k is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of normal symbols). This time-saving flag 203k has an initial value set to OFF, and in the jackpot control process, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (the end timing of the jackpot game) based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) , is set to ON (see S1216 in FIG. 138). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), it is referred to determine whether the game state is a variable probability state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and when the next big hit game is started, it is turned off. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the time saving game is given along with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variable with short time no jackpot), although the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON, the time reduction flag 203k remains OFF, and only the probability variable game is awarded.

Here, the latent definite gaming state (probability variable state of special symbols) is set to a high probability that the lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 will be a big win, It is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the current game is a normal game or a latent sure game unless it is suggested that the game is in the latent guaranteed game state by changing the presentation mode. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, since the number of opening times and the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning hole 140 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a time-saving game. is.

Therefore, when the player is given a time-saving game along with the probability variation game based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (when the probability variation game state is set), it can be easily recognized that it is a probability variation game. , When only the probability variation game is given based on the jackpot C (2R probability variation with short time no jackpot), it is difficult to recognize that it is a probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). As a result, the player needs to guess whether the game state is normal game or variable probability game, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 137) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 136) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 135) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(a). The ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an outer reel operation table 222c, an inner reel operation table 222d, a symbol operation table 222e, a special effect scenario table 222f, and a symbol group storage area 222g. ing.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. Based on the content (variation time, variation type (reach, loss, etc.)), more detailed variation contents are determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, description will be made based on the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example. FIG. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 222a in the variation pattern selection table in this control example. In this control example, in addition to the lottery result or the success/failure determination result of the special symbol, when the set variation pattern (variation time) is a long period (long period), the third symbol with reference to the dedicated variation pattern table It is configured to set the variable display mode of.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for long fluctuation 222a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram nominating the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table for long fluctuation 222a3. As shown in FIG. 123, the long variation variation pattern table 222a3 includes the type of variation time (for example, 60 seconds or 90 seconds) set in this special symbol variation, the lottery result of this special symbol variation, An effect mode is set based on the currently set operation scenario (operation pattern) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223j.

The outer reel operation table 222c is a data table in which the operation contents of the outer reel 821 are stored. A plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 are set in the outer reel operation table 222c, and correspond to the variation pattern set in the variation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). An operating scenario is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation contents (motor data) of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c are set in association with the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). Each time the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is executed, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is updated (see S3102 in FIG. 150), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3104 in FIG. 150). ). The drive of each of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c is controlled by the motor MPU based on the motor data set here.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, dynamic display (third In addition to the variable display of symbols), the effect display for driving the outer reel 821 and the inner reel 811 is executed as an effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol.

In other words, the display patterns printed on the display surfaces of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 can be switched between the case of using them as the third pattern and the case of using them as the performance symbols for performance. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which variable display mode (operation display mode) is for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide an unexpected game. .

Further, it is also configured to switch the variable display mode for showing the third symbol during one dynamic display executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the display symbols printed on the inner reel 811 are displayed for the first 30 seconds. The display pattern printed on the outer reel 821 is used as the third pattern for the last 30 seconds. As a result, it is possible to set a variable display mode that is difficult for the player to predict, and to provide a more unexpected game.

In this control example, any one of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display section 1600 is configured to be in a variable display mode for displaying the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a light emitting means (display means) consisting of a plurality of LEDs may be provided at a specific portion of the game board 13, and the variable display of the third pattern may be performed using the light emitting means (display means). . As a result, all the variable display modes using the inner reels 811, the outer reels 821, and the 7-segment display section 1600 can be used as the variable display modes for production, so that the production can be executed with a higher degree of freedom. , can enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, during the variable display period of the special symbols, the above-described light-emitting means (display means) is used to inform that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and only when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the inner reel 811, Either the outer reel 821 or the 7-segment display section 1600 may be used to stop-display the third symbol.

The inner reel motion table 222d is a data table in which motion contents of the inner reel 811 are stored. In this inner reel operation table 222d, a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 are set, corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). An operating scenario is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation contents (motor data) of the inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c are set in association with the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). Each time the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151) is executed, the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q is updated (see S3202 in FIG. 151), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3204 in FIG. 151). ). Based on the motor data set here, the driving of each of the outer reel drive motors KM1a to 1c is controlled by the motor MPU.

The symbol operation table 222e shows the operation of each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 according to the set game state and game conditions. 4 is a data table storing motion information referred to when setting an initial state (motion pattern) of a mode; The pachinko machine 10 of this control example sets a plurality of variable display modes (operation display modes) for indicating the lottery result of special symbols (for example, a variable display mode using the inner reel 811, a variable display mode using the outer reel 821, and a variable display mode using the outer reel 821). mode, or a variable display mode using the 7-segment display unit 1600). For example, when the variable display mode to be executed is changed by setting a different game state, it is necessary to position the various devices in the initial state corresponding to the changed variable display mode. Since the symbol operation table 222e stores the initial state (operation pattern) of various devices corresponding to each variable display mode, drive control to be executed for various devices when the variable display mode is changed is performed. can be executed accurately.

Further, in the symbol operation table 222e, each device provided in the variable display device unit 80 (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, The 7-segment display unit 1600 and the displacement member 670) are configured to execute special operation control, and the symbol operation table 222e stores the initial state (operation pattern) of the special effect.

In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 ) is executed, and the symbol operation table 222e also stores the initial state (operation pattern) of the big win effect.

Here, referring to FIG. 124, the contents stored in the symbol operation table 222e will be specifically described. The reels 811 (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c) are defined to be operable (indicated by “○” in FIG. 124), and the outer reels 821 (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer The reel 821c) is defined as a first region (denoted as “first” in FIG. 124) formed of a transparent member, and the 7-segment display portion 1600 (left 7-segment display portion 1600a, middle 7-segment display portion 1600b, right 7-segment display portion 1600c) is defined as non-display (indicated by “x” in FIG. 124), and displacement members 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 670c) are set to the first position (most open). 114(a))) and an operation pattern (first operation pattern) are stored.

When the first operation pattern is selected, the rotation operation of the inner reel 811 is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol, and the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed as the third symbol. (See FIG. 110(a)).

Next, as a game state, as an operation pattern when the time saving state or the variable probability state is set, the inner reel 811 (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c) can be operated (in FIG. 124 The outer reel 821 (the left outer reel 821a, the middle outer reel 821b, the right outer reel 821c) is defined as the second region (marked as “second” in FIG. 124) in which the light emitting region 822 is formed. , and the 7-segment display unit 1600 (left 7-segment display unit 1600a, middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, right 7-segment display unit 1600c) is operable (indicated by “○” in FIG. 124), and the displacement member An operation pattern (second operation pattern) that defines 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 670c) as the first position (most open state (see FIG. 114(a))) is stored. ing.

When this second operation pattern is selected, the variable display of the 7-segment display section 1600 is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display section 1600 (FIG. 111). (a)). In this control example, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second operation pattern is set. That is, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even in a state where the second area of the outer reel 821 is displayed and the player cannot visually recognize the rotating state of the inner reel 811 .

By configuring in this way, for example, when a problem occurs in the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the display mode of the 7-segment display unit 1600 makes it impossible to notify the lottery result of the special symbol without discomfort, By rotating the outer reel 821, the player can visually recognize the inner reel 811. - 特許庁It is possible to use the inner reel 811 to stop and display the result of the lottery.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description of the contents defined in the symbol operation table 222e is continued. In a state in which the first operation pattern is set as the operation pattern, the contents of the special ready-to-win (first special performance) executed when the first performance condition is established are defined as the operation pattern "operation 3".

In this "operation 3", only the middle and inner reels 811b of the inner reels 811 are set to be operable "○", each of the outer reels 821 is set to the first position, and the left 7-segment display section 1600a of the 7-segment display section 1600 is displayed. and only the right 7-segment display portion 1600c can be displayed, and the left displacement member 670a and the right displacement member 670c of the displacement member 670 can be variably operated in the first position and the middle displacement member 670b in the range of the first position to the third position. Actions are specified. When this action pattern "action 3" is set, the effect (special reach 1) described above with reference to FIG. 112 is executed.

Further, in a state in which the first action pattern is set as the action pattern, the contents of the special ready-to-reach 2 (second special effect) executed when the second effect condition is established are defined, and the first action is defined as the action pattern. The contents of the special reach 3 (third special effect) executed when the third effect condition is established in the state where the pattern is set are defined. In addition, "Action 6" is defined as an action pattern corresponding to the big win effect executed during the big win game.

In the special effect scenario table 222f, operation control details for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670) when special effects are executed are defined in correspondence with the elapsed time. This data table stores operation control contents corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223i which is set when the special effect is executed and which is periodically updated.

Next, referring to FIG. 125, the contents of the special effect scenario table 222f will be described. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special effect scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 125, in the special effect scenario table 222f, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670) are defined corresponding to the elapsed time (the value of the scenario counter 223i). As will be described later, the scenario counter 223i is configured to update the value of the counter every 1 millisecond. In FIG. 125, scenarios are specified in units of seconds (units of S) for convenience of explanation.

First, a special performance scenario with a performance period of 60 seconds (60S) is associated with the special performance (reach) 1, and can be set when a variable time of 60 seconds is set. In this special effect (reach) 1, each inner reel 811 starts rotating at the timing when the remaining variation time is 60 seconds, that is, at the timing when the special symbol variation is started, and each outer reel 821 An operation scenario is defined in which the displacement member 670 is positioned in the first region (first position) so that the player can visually recognize the rotation state of , and the displacement member 670 is positioned in the first position.

After that, the left inner reel 811a is stopped at the timing of the residual variation time of 55 seconds, the right outer reel 821c is stopped at the timing of the residual variation time of 50 seconds, and the middle inner reel 811b is stopped at the timing of the residual variation time of 40 seconds. Stop, that is, all the inner reels 811 are temporarily stopped, and all the 7-segment display portions 1600 are turned on. Then, at the timing of the remaining variation time of 35 seconds, the left 7-segment display portion 1600a and the right 7-segment display portion 1600c are displayed with a pattern imitating "7", and at the timing of the remaining variation time of 34 seconds, the middle and inner reels are displayed. 811b is changed again (see FIG. 112). The operation scenario is defined such that the middle and inner reels 811b are stopped when the remaining variation time reaches 5 seconds.

In this way, when various motion controls are executed for a plurality of devices (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display section 1600, and the displacement member 670), a motion scenario for each device is defined in advance. By doing so, the special effect can be executed smoothly.

The symbol group storage area 222g stores data for limiting the symbol types (“0” to “9”) that can be selected when setting display symbols to be stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600. A display pattern to be stopped and displayed is set using a pattern type included in the set pattern group in the region.

The symbol group storage area 222g is a storage area in which a symbol group referred to when setting the stop display mode of the third symbol is stored. Here, the contents of the pattern group storage area 222g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pattern group storage area 222g.

As shown in FIG. 126, three symbol groups (symbol groups A to C) are defined in the symbol group storage area 222g, and each symbol group has a different number. Specifically, the symbol group A has numbers "0, 1, 7", the symbol group B has numbers "2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9", and the symbol group C has numbers "0 to 9” are stored in association with each other.

This symbol group storage area 222g is a display mode of each stop symbol when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state and the variable display of the third symbol using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (see FIG. 111) is executed. It is used when setting. As described above, in this control example, only one segment (light emitting area 822) that constitutes the seven segments is formed in a different form, and this light emitting area 822 is visible to the player even in the off state with respect to the other segments. It is formed as an easy-to-remove segment.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to suppress misrecognition of the player, a process of setting a stop symbol mode is executed, and the symbol group storage area 222g is used in this process.

Returning to FIG. 122(b), the description is continued. FIG. 122(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a remaining time reduction counter 223g, At least a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, a performance counter 223j, a game state storage area 223k, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stop symbol storage area 223n, a returning flag 223l, a power off flag 223y, and other memory area 223z are provided. It is

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is four areas (first area to fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the variable display device unit 80). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2308 in FIG. 142). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the variable display device unit 80. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. A dedicated display means is used to inform the player of the value of the counter 223b.

In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 reserved in the main controller 110 is up to 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c adds the number of reserved balls by entering the second winning hole 140, and displays special symbol 2 different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of special symbol 1 on a dedicated display means. The only difference is that it is used to display the number of pending balls symbols, and the other is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, the operation contents output to the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are varied. For example, only when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 both reach the upper limit, a special sound or light emitting mode may be provided. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game with the intention of accumulating the reserved balls.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 142), and the fluctuation display in the variable display unit 80 is set (see S2602 in FIG. 145). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S2202) of the main processing (see FIG. 141), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 identifies the device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) that executes the variable display of the third symbol based on the received display variation pattern command, and displays the corresponding MPU ( Display control is executed using the segment MPU 114a and the reel MPU 114b).

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from main controller 110 is received (see S2305 in FIG. 142), and is turned off when the stop type is set (FIG. 145). (see S2609 of ). When the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Also, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. The display control device 114 performs stop display of the variable effect so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80. Control.

In this control example, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) controlled by the display control device 114 are used to perform the third symbol variation corresponding to the above-described special symbol variation display. In addition to the display, it is configured to be able to execute the variable display for suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbols and the variable display for big win performance executed during the big win game. The suggestive effect variable display is a suggestive effect variable display command that is set for a device other than the device that is the target of the third symbol variable display when the display variation pattern command is set by the sound lamp control device 113. is executed when the display controller 114 receives the

Also, when a large winning start command for display set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the variable display for big winning effect is executed based on the contents included in the command. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of executing the third symbol variation display, the suggestive performance variation display is performed using a device that does not perform the third symbol variation corresponding to one special symbol variation. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which device is executing the third symbol variation, and it is possible to provide an unexpected game.

In addition, in a device such as the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 in which display patterns are printed in advance, the display patterns are changed to the third patterns based on the display variation pattern command set by the sound lamp control device 113. Since it is possible to switch between a pattern used as a symbol and a pattern used as an effect pattern for suggestive effect, it is possible to provide a game with more unexpectedness to the player.

The remaining time reduction counter 223g is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol variations until the time reduction state ends. This remaining time reduction counter 223g indicates that the time reduction state has been set in the state setting process (see S2317 in FIG. 144) executed in the command determination process (see S2212 in FIG. 142) of the audio lamp control device 113. (S2506 in FIG. 144: Yes), a value of 100 is set (S2507 in FIG. 144), and in the fluctuation display setting process (see S2606 in FIG. 145), the display fluctuation After setting the pattern command, 1 is subtracted (see S2606 in FIG. 145).

Then, in the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146), the current value is referenced, and when it is determined that the value is 5 or less (S2709 in FIG. 146: Yes), can be executed during the time saving state A remaining number display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) for displaying the remaining number of special symbol variations (remaining time reduction number) is executed, and the remaining time reduction number is displayed on the 7 segment display unit 1600 (FIG. 111 (b )reference).

That is, in this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state reaches five times, the number of remaining time reductions is notified to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the time saving state is suddenly terminated without notifying the player. In addition, it is possible to suppress the situation where the number of times of remaining time reduction is displayed immediately after the time reduction state is set, and the content of the stop display of the third symbol becomes difficult to grasp.

In this control example, the period in which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed is a period in which the number of remaining time reductions is five times or less, but the number of remaining time reductions is not limited to this, and may be a period in which the number of remaining time reductions is ten times or less. In addition, it is not necessary to continuously display the number of remaining time reductions. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to always display the number of remaining time reductions during the period in which the remaining time reduction number of times is displayed. Alternatively, the player may operate the frame button 22 to select whether or not to display the number of remaining time reductions.

The specific remaining period flag 223h is a flag for indicating whether or not it is a period for displaying the number of remaining reduced working hours in the reduced working hours state, and is set to ON when it is a period for displaying the number of reduced remaining working hours. be. This specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON when the remaining number display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) is executed (see S2801 in FIG. 147), and when the value of the remaining short time number counter 223g becomes 0 It is set to off (see S2806 in FIG. 147).

Also, it is referred to in the stop symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) for setting the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the third symbol (see S3406 in FIG. 153), and is determined to be set to ON. In this case (S3406 of FIG. 153: Yes), a stop symbol is set using a numerical value different from the numerical value of the remaining time reduction number displayed (see S3408 of FIG. 153).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the third symbol and the display mode showing the number of remaining time reductions from becoming the same display mode. Information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and information indicating the number of times of remaining time reduction can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

The scenario counter 223i is a counter that is referred to when determining the timing of executing operation control for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) of the variable display device unit 80, and is used for variable display setting. In the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146) executed in the process (see S2213 in FIG. 145), when the operation scenario (production scenario) to be executed this time is set (see S2707 in FIG. 146), the setting A value corresponding to the selected action scenario (effect scenario) is set (see S2708 in FIG. 146).

The set value is subtracted in the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S3005 in FIG. 149), When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 149), operation control details for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) of the variable display device unit 80 is referenced to set the

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, the operation scenario (drawing scenario) defines the contents of operation control corresponding to each device in association with the value of the scenario counter 223i. 149 (see S2211 of 149) is executed, and based on the currently set action scenario (effect scenario), the content of action control to be executed in the current process is determined and determined. Set the operation command (motor data) according to the operation control contents. Then, in the command output processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141), an operation command is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 responds to each device based on the contents of the received operation command. perform an action.

In this control example, when an action scenario (effect scenario) is set, a value corresponding to the time of the action scenario (effect scenario) is set in the scenario counter 223i, and the value of the scenario counter 223i is changed every millisecond. configured to subtract. That is, when a 30-second action scenario (effect scenario) is set, the value of the scenario counter 223i is set to "30000", and each time the action control process (S2211 in FIG. 149) is executed, the scenario counter 223i is configured to subtract 1 from the value of , but any configuration that can determine the progress of the action scenario may be used. , a storage means for storing timing information at the timing at which the action scenario (drawing scenario) is set, and a difference between the timing information stored in the storage means and the current time information kept by the timing means. may be calculated, and the progress of the action scenario (effect scenario) may be determined based on the calculation result.

In addition, in this control example, the operation control contents of the plurality of devices (the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the displacement member 670, etc.) of the variable display device unit 80 are integrated and defined in one operation scenario (performance scenario). By doing so, it is configured so that it is difficult for the operation contents of a plurality of devices to differ, but without being limited to this, it is configured to define an operation scenario (drawing scenario) for each device, A configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated scenario counter is provided for each operation scenario. By configuring in this way, by combining a plurality of operation scenarios, it is possible to increase the number of operation control patterns using a plurality of devices that the variable display device unit 80 has.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selection of various effects (fluctuation patterns, advance notice effects, etc.), various lotteries, etc., in the sound lamp control device 113. to 198 (not shown).

The game state storage area 223k is a data area for storing information indicating the current game state included in various state commands output from the main controller 110. It is used to determine the currently set game state. In this control example, each time a different game state is set by the main controller 110 or each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a state command indicating the current game state is set. Since the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the state command is set, the current game state can be reliably determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In addition, the game state storage area 223k of this control example has an area for storing the currently set game state and an area for storing the previously set game state. For example, just before the end of the big win game (during the big win game), the game state at the time of winning the big win can be discriminated, and the big win is won in the state where the time saving state is set, and again after the end of the big win. It is possible to set different presentation modes in the case of setting the time saving state and the case of winning a jackpot in the state of setting the normal state and setting the time saving state after the end of the big win.

The returning flag 223l is a flag for indicating that the reel operation confirmation process is currently being executed after the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process is being executed. . This returning flag 223l is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process (see S2013 in FIG. 140) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (see FIG. 140). 140 S2104), when the outer reel 821 has moved to the second position (S2102 in FIG. 140: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2113 in FIG. 140).

When determining whether or not a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed from when the reel operation confirmation process is executed until it is detected that the outer reel 821 has moved to the second position (S2105 in FIG. 140), It is determined whether the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103 in FIG. 140). The returning flag 223l indicates that the outer reel 821 has not reached the second position even though 10 seconds have passed since the reel operation confirmation process was executed (S2105 in FIG. 140: Yes). When setting the error command (S2107 in FIG. 140), it is set to OFF. It is also set to OFF when the reel operation confirmation process is normally executed (see S2113 in FIG. 140).

The operation mode storage area 223m stores information for determining the current operation mode (operation pattern). As for the operation mode, if the current game state is a normal state or a latent state, "action 1" is stored, if it is a time-saving state or probability variable state, "action 2" is stored, and if it is during special reach 1, "action 1" is stored. "Movement 3" is stored, "Movement 4" is stored when special reach 2 is in progress, "Movement 5" is stored when special reach 3 is on, and "Movement 6" is stored when big win is in progress. . Each operation mode (operation pattern) is set with reference to the symbol operation table 222e.

In this control example, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 are controlled according to the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223m. ) (initial mode (initial position) before execution of motion control, presence/absence of target of motion control) are made different.

A holding means (backup means) capable of holding the information indicating the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223m even when the power is turned off may be provided. As a result, even after recovery from power failure, it is possible to set appropriate operation modes for the various devices of the variable display unit 80 .

The stop symbol storage area 223n is a storage area for temporarily storing the set display mode of the stop symbol. In this stop pattern storage area 223n, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag is set to ON in the variable display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145) (S2607 in FIG. 145: Yes) Information indicating the stop symbol set in the symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) is stored.

In this control example, the time-saving state is set as the game state (the operation pattern (operation mode) is "operation 2"), and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used to perform the variable display of the third symbol. is established (when the number of remaining special symbol variations (remaining time reduction number) for which the time reduction state is set is 5 times or less), the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used to display the remaining time reduction number.

In the state where the number of remaining time reductions is displayed in this way, if a display mode indicating the same number is displayed for the third symbol stop symbol (a pattern imitating a number) and the value indicating the remaining time reduction number display, There is a problem that it is difficult to understand whether the displayed display mode is for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol or for indicating the number of times of remaining time reduction. Therefore, in this control example, when the number of times of remaining time reduction is displayed, the third symbol stop pattern (symbol imitating a number) is controlled to be different from the value indicating the number of times of remaining time reduction. The stop symbol set in this process is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n.

The outer reel operation counter 223p is a counter that is referred to when determining the period during which an operation instruction is given to the outer reel 821, and is used in the outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150) of the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). When the value of the scenario counter 223i indicates the timing for operating the outer reel 821 in the action scenario (when the outer reel action table is set), the value indicating the period for operating the outer reel 821 (END data) is set (S3107 in FIG. 150).

While the outer reel operation table 222c is set, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is incremented by 1 (see S3102 in FIG. 150) in the main processing (see FIG. 141) of the sound lamp control device 113, and after the addition It is referred to when determining whether the value has reached the END data (see S3103 in FIG. 150). Then, the operations of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c are controlled based on the reference result of S3103 of FIG.

The inner reel operation counter 223q differs from the above-described outer reel operation counter 223p in that the object is changed from the outer reel 821 to the inner reel 811, and furthermore, the counter value is set and referred to. , in that the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is changed to the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151). Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

As described above, in this control example, the operation scenario is managed based on the value of the scenario counter 223i. is configured to operate a dedicated counter. In this way, it is divided into a main counter (scenario counter 223i) for managing a large flow of actions and a sub-counter (outer reel action counter 223p, inner reel action counter 223q) for managing the action of each device. Therefore, the number of items managed by the main counter can be reduced, so that the frequently executed scenario counter 223i can be simplified.

Further, for example, by configuring the sound lamp control device 113 to manage only the counter corresponding to the main counter, and the display control device 114 to manage the counter corresponding to the sub-counter, the sound lamp control device While reducing the processing load of 113, the operations of various devices can be centrally managed, and the operations of various devices can be synchronized.

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff command is sent to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (S2217 in FIG. 141). In the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 139), if the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and data is read, and the power-off flag 223y is set off. (S2010 in FIG. 139). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process at the time of power interruption can be reused by the data reading process in the start-up process at the time of power restoration, and the game information before the power interruption can be used again, and the game can be continued. can be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 142) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 127 to 138. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 399, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the variable display device unit 80 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is accompanied by the passage of the ball. Through gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device This is a process for controlling the variation display (variation time) of the third symbol performed in the unit 80 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the variable display unit 80 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

That is, in this control example, after the stop display indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, until the big win game ends (until the ending period of the big win game ends), new special symbol variations occur. Configured so that it does not start. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a new special symbol variation is started during the big winning game and the player cannot concentrate on the big winning game.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, during the period during which the stop display indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is being executed, or during the ending period of the jackpot game, new special symbol variations or may be set as a period during which a new special symbol variation can be started even during the jackpot game. As a result, the number of executions of special symbol variation can be increased.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variation display in the special (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory for the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 137), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), the special It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), special symbol 1, special symbol 2 Since there is no held ball in both cases, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S208). Incidentally, the special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S213, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S213: Yes), stop setting processing is performed (S215), and this processing ends. Note that the stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed. This is a process for determining the conditions (for example, variable time) regarding the performance pattern (variation pattern) of the variation performance performed by the one-symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device unit 80. FIG.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability is changing (S302). In the processing of S302, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at present.

If it is determined that it is in probability variation (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first per random number table (see FIG. 120 (a)) for high probability Based on the big hit determination value, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers set in the first winning random number table (see FIG. 117(a)). As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player is allowed to win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is not during the probability change (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, so the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120(a)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one "0" is set, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random number value for the special symbol match, the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), a jackpot. (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C). Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80 . Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table. In this first win type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random value is any of "0 to 39" is the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the value is one of "40 to 79". The jackpot type in this case is the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot), and the jackpot type in the case of any one of "80 to 99" is the jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win (jackpot variation pattern) is determined from the variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 121) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307). Specifically, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using the variation pattern table 202d1 for the big win. After that, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is out of the special symbol (S305: No), the display mode at the time of failure corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). ). In the process of S308, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined deviation.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined according to the set game state. Specifically, when the current game state is a normal state or a latent state, the change pattern is determined using the (normal) change pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121 (c)) for loss, If the current game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121(d)). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

In addition, in this control example, the variation pattern is determined using different variation pattern tables according to the special symbol lottery result and the set game state, but this is not the only option. For example, it may be configured to determine a different variation pattern according to the current number of held balls. In addition, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the set game state, the variation pattern is set using the same variation pattern table. , Without being limited to this, even when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit, the variation pattern is determined using different variation pattern tables according to the set game state and the number of retained balls stored. may be configured.

In addition, in this control example, the same variation pattern table (loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2) is used when the normal state is set as the game state and when the potential state is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent state based on the determined variation pattern.

In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, for example, a variation pattern table corresponding to each game state is provided, and a variation pattern table (normal variation pattern table) used during the normal state and The fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern table for latency) used in may be configured so that the contents specified in are slightly different, specifically, the normal variation pattern table and the variation for latency It is preferable to unify the selectable variation pattern types (variation time) in the pattern table and to differentiate the selection ratio of each variation pattern. By configuring in this way, the current game state is not identified by the player from the determined variation pattern type, but the player can predict the current game state based on the selection ratio of the determined variation pattern type. can. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation pattern (loss variation pattern) of the special symbol variation that is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, the special variation pattern type (variation time) that is determined only when using the variation pattern table for potential confirmation may be selected with a low probability (for example, 1%). Thereby, the player can grasp the current game state only when the special variation pattern type is determined. Therefore, it is possible to provide a benefit (information that allows the player to grasp the current game state) that is advantageous to the player for the special symbol variation executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In the processing of S310, set a variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 (S310), set a stop type command (S311), then end this processing special symbol Return to change processing.

Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, the stop display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The display mode of the stopped symbols to be stopped at this time is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. 129 (see S306 and S308 of FIG. 129).

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LEDs are lighted in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lighted, resulting in the jackpot C. If so, turn on the yellow LED. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. The display color and lighting mode of the LED are not limited to those described above, and other lighting modes may be used as long as the type of jackpot and the variation state can be identified.

After the process of S261 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the lottery result of this time is lost (not a big hit) (S262: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269) . When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (larger than 0) (S269: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the time saving counter 203h (S270), and the process proceeds to S265. In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 130, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the processing corresponding to the result of the special symbol variation of this time is immediately executed. For example, the processing of S262 may be executed after a predetermined time (predetermined stop display period) has passed after setting the stop display of the first symbol display device (see S261 in FIG. 130). good. In other words, the special symbols are stop-displayed at the timing when the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the special symbol variation start processing ends, and the stop-display is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the special symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and determines whether or not the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (start winning), This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a process of holding the values when there is a starting prize.

When the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 131) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, there is no winning to the first winning hole 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507.

On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 137), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S505, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S506) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In the processing of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing as in the processing from S501 to S506 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140 as well. The only difference is that the second special symbol is held for the winning of the second winning opening 140, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S507 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole 140 (S507: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S513).

In this look-ahead processing (FIG. 132, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601; No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of variation is probability change (S602), and the game state is variable (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 120(a)) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the game state is not probability change (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120 (a)) (S604), and S605 proceed to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the result of the big hit determination executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is finished. In addition, in this look-ahead processing (S513), not only this embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outlier reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated, and the winning information command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify

In addition, in this control example, the pre-reading process is executed both when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, but either case is executed. It may be configured to execute the prefetching process only, for example, the prefetching process is executed only when the ball wins the second winning hole 140 corresponding to the special symbol 2 for which the special symbol variation start process is preferentially executed. It may be configured to

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and includes the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the first symbol associated with the second winning opening 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 520 and the like.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbols are currently hitting the jackpot (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the variable display unit 80 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 120(c)).

In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 120(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711 is the normal symbol win (S712), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S712: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714: Yes), the special symbols are currently hitting the jackpot. (S715). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 are set.

In the process of S715, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, so the second winning port 140 The opening period of the first electric accessory 520 associated with is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, the opening period of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning hole 140 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S719: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second prize winning port 140 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

In the processing of S702, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S722). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S722, if the variable time has not passed (S722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set as When stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 133) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is set (S725), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the first electric accessory 520 is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1105) of the main processing (see FIG. 137) is executed next, the electric accessory The opening/closing control of is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 134), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

135 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1012.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 137), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 137), first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 are sent to the sub side during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) and the start winning process (see FIG. 131). Further, by this external output processing, the variable display unit 80 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third pattern. Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 131) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the identification A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (large open opening) 65a is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). Details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the first electric role product 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S725 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 133), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129) has ended, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B ends the variation display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S306, S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 129), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A , 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 133), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device End the display, in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal design fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 133), stop design (second design) on the second design display device stop display (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1108, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 135 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting processing (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104 in FIG. 138), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 130) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are turned off (S1202), the opening command is set (S1203), and the processing is terminated as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1204). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display unit 80 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the game is included. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), and a new start is made. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1207), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are satisfied (S1208). If the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not established (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball-throwing time, elapses. Determined as When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the processing of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set to the time saving counter 203h (S1217), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 155, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 139, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S2217 (see FIG. 141) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S2214 in FIG. 141: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S2217. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2217 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1514. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2217 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2217, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . The audio output device 226 may output a sound to inform the RAM 223 of an abnormality, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the variable display device unit 80 to display an error message. may

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S2217 is executed (see S2217 in FIG. 141). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S2217 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2217 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after the power off flag 223y is set to OFF (S2010). , the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S2011). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 . Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S2012), reel operation confirmation processing is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Details of the reel operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2011, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2011), interrupt permission is set. (S2012), reel operation confirmation processing is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Here, referring to FIG. 140, the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), which is one process in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of the reel operation confirmation process (S2013). In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), a process for confirming whether the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 operate normally when the power is turned on is executed.

In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), first, the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the second position (non-transmissive area) (S2101). Here, by moving the outer reel unit 820 to the non-transmissive area (second position), it is possible to make the inner reel operation confirmation process to be executed later invisible. Next, the outer reel unit 820 determines whether or not detection has been made at the origin position of the second position (S2102). When it is determined that the origin of the outer reel unit 820 has not been detected (S2102: No), is the returning flag 223l turned on, that is, is the outer reel unit 820 being moved to the origin at the second position? It is determined whether or not (S2103). If it is determined that the returning flag 223l is not ON (S2103: No), the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2104), and the process returns to S2102.

Returning to the processing of S2102, it is determined whether or not the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin at the second position (S2102). Still, when it is determined that the outer reel unit 820 is not detected at the origin of the second position (S2102: No), it is determined whether the returning flag 223l is set to ON in the process of S2104 (S2103). . When it is determined that the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103: Yes), a predetermined time elapses after the returning flag 223l is set to ON, that is, after starting the return of the outer reel unit 820. It is determined whether (10 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S2105). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of recovery (S2105: No), the process returns to S2102 because recovery is in progress. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has passed since the start of return (S2105: No), an error command is set to notify the abnormality of the outer reel unit 820 (S2106), and the power is cut off. Infinite loop until An abnormality in the outer reel unit 820 is notified by the display lamp 34 . It should be noted that the sound output device 226 may output sound to inform the abnormality of the outer reel unit 820, or the variable display device unit 80 may display an error message.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2102 that the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin position of the second position (S2102: Yes), next, the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 is executed (S2107). . Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation processing of the inner reel unit 810 in S2107 has ended (S2108). If it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 is not completed (S2108: No), the process of S2108 is looped until the operation confirmation process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 has ended (S2108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal operation of the inner reel unit 810 has been confirmed in the process of S2107 (S2109). When the normal operation of the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed (S2109: Yes), the inner reel unit 810 is moved to the initial lost symbol row (S2110), and then the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the first position ( transparent area) (S2111), and the process ends.

In this way, after the normality of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed, the respective reels are moved to their initial positions, so that the start-up process (see FIG. 139) is finished immediately. There is an effect that a game can be started. On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is found (S2109: No), an error command indicating an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is set (S2112), and this processing ends. . An abnormality in the inner reel unit 810 is notified by the display lamp 34 in the same manner as in the outer reel unit 820 . It should be noted that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to inform the abnormality of the inner reel unit 810, or the variable display device unit 80 may display an error message.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2201 was executed (S2201). If not (S2201: No), the process proceeds to S2212 without performing the processes of S2202 to S2211. In the process of S2201, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2202 to S2212 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2212, and S2213. By executing the process of S1511 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2213 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2203 to S2213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2202 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2208 described later (S2203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be

In addition, when the power is restored due to a power failure or the like, an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of the power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 136). . In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the effect permission command including that the special symbol is being changed, the power-on notification processing (S2204) creates a display variation pattern command, and the display control device 114. The display control device 114 determines this variation start command by the simple command determination process (see FIG. 118(b)), and executes the variation display for when the power is turned on based on the variation pattern based on the received command (see FIG. 118(b)). 82(b) or (c)). Since the display variation pattern command created here is for executing a simple variation display, as described above, it is simpler than that selected in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146) described later. It is. As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the player can be notified of the power-on state with good response at the time of recovery from the power-off.

In this control example, in addition to the variable display using the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, the variable display using the 7-segment display section 1600 is configured to be executable. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is preferable to perform the variable display for when the power is turned on by using the 7-segment display unit 1600 regardless of which device is used for the variable display. As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden increase in power consumption since the reel operation, which consumes a large amount of electric power, is not executed after the power is turned on due to the motor operation. In addition, even if the timing (remaining period) until the variable display is stopped is unknown, the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be used to change the third pattern to be stopped and displayed to an arbitrary third pattern at the stop timing. can be made easier.

Furthermore, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 to stop the variable display. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a stop command for display to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. In the display control device 114, the simple command determination processing (see 118(b)) determines that the stop command for display has been received, and the display mode when the power is turned on is determined based on the received command (FIG. 82(b)). or (c)) is stopped.

Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied to the variable display device unit 80 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2205 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 is changed to the initial mode (for example, the mode in which the displacement member 670 is changed to the fourth position). , and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2207). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2208), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display device unit 80 . In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display device unit 80, and the audio output device 226 outputs sound according to the setting.

After the processing of S2209, effect execution management processing is executed (S2210). In the effect execution management process, time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the segment display device 600 based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is set. The lamp editing process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in this effect execution management process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing in S2209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the variable display device unit 80. FIG.

After the performance execution management process, an action control process for controlling the actions of the reels and displacement members is performed (S2211). Details of this operation control process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the operation control process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S2212). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2213. In the process of S2213, a variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the variable display device unit 80 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completion of the variable display setting process (S2213), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2214 (S2214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2216), and the power-off processing is executed (S2217). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S2218), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2215: No), the process returns to S2201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2215: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is broken and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the variable display device unit 80 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2212). This command determination process (S2212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2212), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S2301). When the variation pattern command is received (S2301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2302), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command received this time (S2303), and this process ends. . The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 145) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the variable display device unit 80 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, if no variation pattern command has been received (S2301: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2304). When the stop type command is received (S2304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2306). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2307). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S2307: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2308). In addition, in the processing of S2309, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S2308 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (start winning), or when a lottery of special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S2308. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S2308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the variable display device unit 80 .

In the process of S2307, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2307: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2309). In the process of S2309, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2310: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command (lottery results of special symbols, etc.) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S2310), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received (S2309: No), it is determined whether or not a command relating to the big win has been received (S2311). In the process of S2311, when a command related to a big win is received (S2311: Yes), a big win related process is executed (S2311), and this process ends. Commands related to big wins include, for example, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, processing corresponding to the received command related to the big win includes, for example, processing of setting an opening command for display, a command for the number of rounds for display, and an ending command for display.

Here, with reference to FIG. 143, the jackpot related process (S2312), which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the jackpot-related processing (S2312). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the variable display device unit 80 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S2312), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the command determination processing (S2212) has received the jackpot start command (S2401). When a jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2402), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141). It is sent to variable display unit 80 .

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2403). If the round number command has been received (S2403: Yes), the round number command for display is set based on the round number (S2404), and this process ends. In this embodiment, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data to be transmitted from the control device 110, when information for indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command, an audio lamp control device The RAM 223 of 113 is provided with a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2403 that the round number command has not been received (S2403: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2405). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2405: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2405: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S2406), and the game state after the jackpot is read from the game state storage area 223k (S2407). Next, the operation pattern corresponding to the information read in the process of S2407 is determined from the symbol operation table 222e (S2408). Specifically, after the end of the jackpot, the operation pattern 2 is determined from the symbol operation table 222e (see FIG. 124) because the time saving or probability variation state is set. Next, the variable display unit operation corresponding to the operation mode determined in the processing of S2408 is set (S2409), and this processing ends.

In this control example, as described above, in the probability variation or the time saving state, it becomes a display mode by the segment display device 600 (see FIG. 110(b)). Since the fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 1 second or 2 seconds, if the operation pattern is set after the end of the big win, the outer reel unit 820 will be placed in the visual recognition area of the player from the start to the end of the fluctuation. There is a possibility that the two areas 821a1 to 821c3 cannot be switched. In this control example, by setting the operation pattern of the variable display device unit during the ending, it is possible to switch the outer reel unit 820 before the end of the big win, thereby suppressing problems.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. In the process of S2311, when it is determined that the command regarding the big win has not been received (S2311: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2313). In the process of S2313, if it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2313: Yes), the process of stopping the variable display being executed is executed (S2314), the stop command for display is set (S2315), End this process.

The display stop command set by the processing of S2315 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 141). , is transmitted towards the variable display unit 80 . When receiving the display stop command, the variable display device unit 80 stops the variable effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2313 that the stop command has not been received (S2313: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S2316). In the process of S2316, if it is determined that the status command has been received (S2316: Yes), the status setting process is executed (S2317), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the state setting process (S2317), which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the state setting process (S2317). In the state setting process (S2317), a process for extracting the current game state from the command received from the main controller 110 and setting the operation mode of the variable display unit 80 is executed.

In the state setting process (S2317), first, the current game state is extracted from the information included in the state command received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process (S2212) (S2501). Next, the symbol operation corresponding to the current game state is set using the symbol operation table 222e (S2502). The operating mode of the inner reel 811 is set (S2503), and the operating mode of the outer reel 821 is set (S2504). Next, the operation mode of the 7-segment display section 1600 is set (S2505). In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124, the operation modes of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display section 1600, and the displacement member 670 differ depending on the corresponding game state. , respectively set the operation mode.

Next, it is determined whether the received state command is a command indicating transition to the time saving state (S2506). When it is determined that the command indicates transition to the time saving state (S2506: Yes), the remaining time saving counter 223g is set to 100 (S2507), and the process proceeds to S2508. On the other hand, in the processing of S2506, if it is determined that the received state command is not a command indicating transition to the time saving state (S2506: No), the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223k (S2508) , the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S2316 that the status command has not been received (S2316: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S2318). ) and return to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the variable display device unit 80, the command is sent to the variable display device. A command is set so as to be transmitted to the unit 80 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2213). This variable display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2601). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2601: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2607. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Variation pattern selection processing for selection is executed (S2603).

Here, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the variation pattern selection process (S2603) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing (S2603). In this variation pattern selection process, based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern type is selected according to the effect mode. be.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is long variation (S2702). In the processing of S2702, if it is determined that the current variation is a long variation (S2702: Yes), from the long variation variation pattern table 222a3 (see FIG. 123(b)), the production counter acquired in the processing of S2701 Based on the value of 223j, determine the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command received in the processing of S2303 of the command determination processing (S2212) (S2703). In the processing of S2703, it is possible to perform a variable display corresponding to each effect period of the special reach 1-3 by setting the long variable variation pattern table. Next, the process moves to S2707.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a long variation in the processing of S2702 (S2702: No), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the time saving (S2704). In the process of S2704, if it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (S2704: Yes), in the process of S2703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 142), the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command Based on the type and the production counter 223j, the corresponding variation pattern is selected from the probability variation short time variation pattern selection table 222a2 (S2705), and the process is terminated. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S2604 in FIG. 145).

On the other hand, in the process of S2704, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the time saving mode (S2704: No), the corresponding variation pattern is changed to the normal medium variation based on the extracted variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j. A pattern is selected from the pattern selection table 222a1 (S2706), and the process proceeds to S2707. In this way, by executing the processing of the variation pattern selection processing (S2603), it is possible to perform a variation display according to each presentation period (drawing mode).

Next, an effect scenario corresponding to the variation pattern determined in one of the processes of S2703, S2705 and S2706 is set (S2707), and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set based on the set effect scenario (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining short time counter 223g is 5 or more (S2709). When it is determined that the value of the remaining short time counter is 5 or more (S2709: Yes), the remaining number display processing is executed (S2710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223g is less than 5 (S2709: No), this process ends.

Here, the details of the remaining count display process (S2710) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the remaining count display process (S2710). This remaining number display process (S2710) is executed in the above-described variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146), and is a process for setting a command for displaying the number of remaining time reductions on segment display device 600. FIG.

In the remaining count display process (S2710), first, the specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON (S2801). Next, the value of the remaining short time counter 223g(n) is read out (S2802). Next, the value of n-1 is calculated (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of n-1 calculated in the process of S2803 is 0 (S2804). When it is determined that the value of n-1 is 0 (S2804: Yes), a number command for display indicating "END" is set as the display mode of the number display period (1S) (S2805), and the specified remaining period is set. The flag 223h is set to OFF (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of N−1 is not 0 in the process of S2804 (S2804: No), the display mode of the count display period (1S) is set to the value of “n−1” calculated in the process of S2803. A display count command indicating a value is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2809.

In this control example, after the fluctuation of the time saving state stops as described above, until the next fluctuation starts, the 7-segment display unit 1600 displays the number of remaining time saving times (see FIG. 111(b)). . When the number of remaining time reduction is n, the number of remaining time reduction is displayed after the n-th variation stops, so the number obtained by subtracting 1 from n is the remaining time reduction number. In this control example, the number of remaining time reductions is displayed after the fluctuation stops, but the remaining time reduction number may be displayed before the fluctuation starts.

After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, reading of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern received this time is executed (S2808). Next, in the processing of S2808, it is determined whether or not the read variation time is 1 second (S2809). If it is determined to be 1 second (S2809: Yes), a process of rewriting the determined variation pattern to a shortening variation pattern is executed (S2810). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2809 that the variation time is not 1 second (S2809: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description is continued. Upon completion of the processing of S2603, based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S2603, a display variation pattern command for notification to the variable display device unit 80 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the variable display device unit 80. (S2604). In the variable display device unit 80, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variable display device unit 80 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started. When the processing of S2604 is finished, next, the announcement selection process for setting the announcement effect based on the success/failure determination result corresponding to the current effect mode is executed (S2605).

Here, details of the advance notice selection process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S2605). This advance notice selection process (S2605) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) described above, and is a process for setting the advance notice effect based on the result of determination according to the current effect mode.

In the announcement selection process (S2605), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2901), and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the time saving (S2902). In the process of S2902, if it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (S2902: Yes), the result of determination of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the value of the effect counter 223j , selects the notice effect during the time saving, which is the notice effect of the time saving effect period (S2903), and proceeds to the processing of S2907.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2902, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the time saving mode (S2902: No), the determination result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the performance counter 223j A normal notice effect, which is the notice effect of the normal effect period, is selected (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906.

In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the normal notice effect selected in the process of S2904 is the notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905). In the processing of S2904, when it is determined that the selected normal notice effect is the notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905: Yes), the shutter notice scenario is set (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the selected time notice effect is other than the notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2907. do.

When the processing of S2903, S2905, or S2906 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2907), and this processing ends. The display notice command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is changed during command output processing (S2202) of the main processing (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display device unit 80 . When the variable display device unit 80 receives the forewarning command for display, it displays on the variable display device unit 80 the foretelling effect corresponding to the command.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description is continued. After completing the processing of S2605, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S2606), and then it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S2607). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2607: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S2607: Yes), stop symbol setting processing is executed (S2608).

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the stop symbol setting process (S2608), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S2213), will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol setting process (S2608). The stop symbol setting process (S2608) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80 based on the current gaming state.

In the stop symbol setting process (S2608), first, the current game state is read out from the game state storage area 223k (S3401). The game state storage area 223k is set in the processing of S2508 of the state setting processing (see FIG. 144). Next, in the processing of S3401, it is determined whether or not the read current game state is in the time saving (S3402). When it is determined that the current game state is not in the time saving mode (S3402: No), the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3409.

Here, referring to FIG. 154, the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), which is one process in the stop symbol setting process (S2608), will be described. FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403). The normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) executes a process for setting symbols to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80 when the current game state is normal.

In the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), first, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S3501). Next, the stop symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n are read out (S3502). Next, based on the read stop symbol (previous stop symbol) and the current fluctuation, the display range in which the stop display is possible is set (S3503). Next, the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set from within the display range in which stop display is possible (S3504), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 153, the description continues. In the processing of S3402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (S3402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current variation is a winning variation (S3404). When it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation (S3404: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3405), and S3409. to process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is not a win variation (S3404: No), it is determined whether or not the specific remaining period flag 223h is ON (S3406). When it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is ON (S3406: Yes), the value (n) of the remaining short time counter 223g is read out (S3407). Next, the stop symbol of the middle 7-segment display portion 1600b is made different from the value of n-1, and the stop symbol is set using the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3408).

In this way, by setting the stop symbol and the number of remaining time reductions to be different in the process of S3408, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the stop symbol and the number of remaining time reductions. Next, the set stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n (S3409), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3406, when it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is not ON (S3406: No), the time reduction stop design setting processing is executed (S3410), S3409 is executed, and this processing is ended. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 155, the time saving stop design setting process (S3410) which is one process in the stop design setting process (S2608) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving stop design setting process (S3410). The time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment display device 600 when the current gaming state is during time saving.

In the time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410), first, information is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S3601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the information read out in the process of S3601 (S3602). When it is determined that there is no hit information (no hit information) in the read information (S3602: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group B in the symbol group storage area 222g ( S3603).

As described above, the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g stores the symbols "2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9" (see FIG. 126). , 7-segment display unit 1600, all the symbols are displayed using the light emitting area 822. FIG. In this control example, the outside reel 821 is set in the visual recognition area of the player in order to show the variation result as the display mode by the 7-segment display section 1600 during the time saving. A 7-segment display mode is also shown using a light-emitting region 822 . However, even when the light-emitting area 822 does not emit light, the player can recognize it, so there is a risk of the player mistaking it as a fluctuation result. In this control example, by selecting a symbol that uses all the light emitting areas 822 when showing a variation result of a failure, the player can clearly recognize the symbol. In the present control example, the symbols that use the light emitting area 822 are always used as the missing symbols.

In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the next variation is a win (S3604: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group A in the symbol group storage area 222g (S3605 ). The symbol group A of the symbol group storage area 222g stores the number symbols "0, 1, 7" (see FIG. 126). As described above, in this control example, when showing the variation result of losing during time saving, it is configured to display the pattern that always uses the light emitting area 822, but when showing the variation result of the hit, the light emitting area 822 is configured not to emit light. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the winning symbols and the winning symbols, which is effective in facilitating recognition by the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the next variation is not winning (S3604: No), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3606), and this End the process.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description continues. After executing the stop pattern setting process (S2608), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2609), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated. Then, the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2610). In the variable display device unit 80, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, the details of the operation control process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the operation control process (S2211). This operation control process (S2211) is executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 141), and executes a process for controlling the variable display device unit 80 according to the current effect mode.

In the operation control process (S2211), first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3001). If it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3001: No), it is not the timing to control the variable display device unit 80, so this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3001 that the value of the scenario counter 223i is greater than 0 (S3001: Yes), the outer reel control process is executed (S3002).

Here, the details of the outer reel control process (S3002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2211), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the outer reel control process (S3002). This outer reel control process (S3002) executes a process for controlling the outer reel 821 according to the current effect mode.

In the outer reel control process (S3002), first, it is determined whether or not the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101). When it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p (S3102). Next, it is determined whether the set data is END data (S3103). When it is determined that the set data is not the END data (S3103: No), the motor data corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223j is set (S3104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the set data is the END data (S3104), the outside reel operation table setting area is reset (S3105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is not being set (S3101: No), it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i indicates the start of operation of the outer reel unit 820. (S3106). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i indicates the start of operation of the outer reel unit 820 (S3106: Yes), the value of the operation counter corresponding to the content of the operation is set (S3107), and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S3106, if it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i does not indicate the start of the outer reel operation (S3106: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 149, the description continues. After executing the outer reel control process (S3002), the inner reel control process (S3003) for controlling the inner reel unit 810 is executed. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the inner reel control process (S3003). The inner reel control process (S3202) is different from the above-described outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150) except that the processing target is changed from the outer reel unit 820 to the inner reel unit 810. omitted.

After executing the inner reel control process (S3003), the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing details of the displacement member control process (S3004). In the displacement member control processing (S3004), since the object of processing is only changed to the displacement member 670 in contrast to the outer reel control processing (FIG. 150) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Once the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed, the value of the scenario counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S3005), and this process ends.

In this control example, the variable display device unit 80 is configured to be controlled in the order of the outer reel unit 820, the inner reel unit 810, and the displacement member 670, but the order of control may be changed.

In this first control example, the 7-segment display unit 1600 uses a configuration in which a pattern (third pattern) imitating numbers (0 to 9) is displayed. (including the area 822) may be used to display patterns imitating alphabets and characters. In this case, for example, while the variable display is being performed using the inner reel 811, the displacement member 670 is varied to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 moves to the fourth position. Each outer reel 821 is positioned in the second area (area having the light emitting area 822) while the player is positioned at the position, that is, during the period when the player cannot (difficultly) visually recognize the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. , and when the displacement member 670 returns to the initial position (first position), a variable display effect using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed, and three 7-segment displays are performed. By displaying symbols simulating "S", "E", and "G" from the left of the part 1600, the 7-segment display part 1600 executes the variable display of the third symbol in the middle of the variable display production. After displaying the variable start display mode for informing the user, the variable display effect using the 7-segment display section 1600 may be executed.

In this way, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used for explaining the content of the effect and notifying the game state in addition to the variable display of the third symbol. Outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600), using display means that does not display the third symbol, is used to notify the player of information related to the game other than the lottery result of the special symbol. Since the amount of information that can be notified to the player during the display performance can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game even when the liquid crystal display device is not used.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 198. FIG. In the first control example described above, the variable display device unit 80, that is, the reel display by the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, and the segment display by the 7-segment display section 1600 are displayed as the display means for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. The used pachinko machine 10 was explained. On the other hand, the second control example is different in that a third symbol display device 81 using a liquid crystal display is used as a display means for showing the special symbol lottery result.

Furthermore, the second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the voice output control of the pachinko machine 10 is described in detail. Specifically, in this second control example, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the fluctuating sound (BGM) output during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol) can be varied. , and is configured to vary the stop sound of the third symbol according to the tempo of the fluctuating sound (BGM) to be reproduced.

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third pattern corresponding to the BGM reproduced at different tempos, the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third pattern can be given a sense of unity, resulting in a production effect. can increase

First, referring to FIG. 156, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 156 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 156, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example replaces the variable display device unit 80 provided in the center of the game board 13 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that a third pattern display device 81 is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Second Control Example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be briefly described. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. In the second control example, the configuration of a device for receiving various commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 is different from that in the first control example. Specifically, the difference is that various commands set by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output to the third symbol display device 81 . Other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the display control device 1140 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the audio lamp control device 113 .

As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 incorporates a RAM 303 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPU 301 .

MPU 301 of audio output device 226 is electrically connected to input port 305 and audio synthesis section 306 . When a command designating audio data is received from audio lamp control device 113 to audio output device 226 , the command is input to MPU 301 via input port 305 and bus line 304 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 . For example, audio data corresponding to BGM is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to stop sound is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to warning sound is output to CN3.

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 .

In the second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesizing section is set corresponding to the voice data output from the voice ramp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, multiple types of voice data (For example, audio data for jackpot game, audio data for stop sound) may be configured to be output through the same channel. In this case, it is preferable to set a plurality of audio data to be output to the same channel as audio data that cannot be generated at the same timing. By configuring in this way, the number of channels that the audio output device has can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the performance is read out from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.

Specifically, the audio file storage area 302a stores music data (BGMA, BGMB) related to music (BGM) and stop sound data (stop sound A, stop sound B) related to stop sounds. In this control example, the tempo of a song (BGM) can be changed and executed. When different tempos are set for the same song, the same song data is It is configured to execute processing for varying the data reproduction speed (see S9211 in FIG. 196). With this configuration, it is not necessary to store music data corresponding to each tempo, so the storage capacity of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 158, the RAM 303 has at least a song data group storage area 303a, a song pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a song timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing audio files (music data group) corresponding to sounds to be reproduced (BGM, stop sound, etc.). One piece of music is reproduced by reproducing the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a in the order of the values of the music pointer 303b. In this music data group storage area 303a, a command (audio BGM command) output from the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct reproduction of music, or reproduction of a stop sound of a display pattern (third pattern) is stored. When a command (audio stop sound command) output for instructing is received, the music data group corresponding to the music designated by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a and stored ( See S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 196).

In addition, in this control example, a music data group (audio file) is stored for each type of audio to be reproduced. In other words, the audio file used when playing the BGM and the audio file used when playing the stop sound are stored separately, and the audio to be played is output for each read audio file. It is configured to Then, each audio file is output to a different channel.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which piece of music data in the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is being reproduced. The value of this music pointer 303b is set to "00H" when a music reproduction instruction is given (an audio BGM command is received) (see S9212 in FIG. 196). Along with this, reproduction of the BGM audio data corresponding to the pointer value "00H" is set.

In this control example, a plurality of pointer values are set for one piece of music. , and so on, pointer values are set. As a result, it is possible to easily change the point at which reproduction of a specific piece of music is started according to the value of the pointer that is set first.

In addition, for example, when playing music, the value of the music pointer 303b to be set first, the update order of the music pointer 303b, the fluctuation time of the set special symbol, the set game state, It may be configured to vary according to the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, when the same piece of music is played back, the Since the content of the game can be suggested to the player, it is possible to make the player interested in the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 as well.

On the other hand, when an instruction is given to reproduce a stop sound in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol (a stop sound command for audio is received), a pointer value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is reproduced is set. (See S9206 in FIG. 196).

The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by one each time the reproduction of one piece of music data set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed. Further, when the pointer value is updated while the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of music, the value is updated to "00H". That is, when the music has been reproduced to the end, the music is reproduced again from the "A melody".

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. Therefore, when a music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and music reproduction is set, the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 196).

The music timer 303d is a timer that counts the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. A timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the new music data is set to the music timer 303d each time the reproduction of new music data is set. It should be noted that the reproduction time of each piece of music data is defined in association with the type of music data in the music data group storage area 303a. During the reproduction of music, whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed is determined based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown, the song timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

In the second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesizing section is set corresponding to the voice data output from the voice ramp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, multiple types of voice data (For example, audio data for jackpot game, audio data for stop sound) may be configured to be output through the same channel. In this case, it is preferable to set a plurality of audio data to be output to the same channel as audio data that cannot be generated at the same timing. By configuring in this way, the number of channels that the audio output device has can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a game ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). be. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 14-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 1140, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this control example, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 159(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 9 types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is configured to imitate the numbers "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a rear pattern imitating an animal and a number "1" to "9" attached thereto.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and after the variable display is finished, the big win. is configured to occur. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side of the .

The main display area Dm displays upper, middle, and lower three pattern rows L1, L2, and L3. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a downward-sloping line and an upward-sloping line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. In addition, when the combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this control example) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third pattern is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening performance) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first prize winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that a ball does not enter the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 even though the player shoots the balls continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) is caused by the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games because the player has quit the game. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the third Variation display of the pattern is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This secondary display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. . In this control example, while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbols is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball is placed in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. When winning a prize, the number of entering balls is reserved up to 4 times in each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, and is displayed in the sub display area Ds. is also shown in the small region Ds1 of . The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls whose variable display is currently reserved. In this control example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that they can be reserved, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are provided to the player. In order to make it easy to grasp, the display mode of the first reserved design indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special design and the display mode of the second reserved design indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special design are displayed differently. It is configured to

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 159(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 159(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbols and three parts of the sub symbols are displayed. It shows the lottery result of the special design. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, three third symbols in a simple manner, each consisting of only one of the numerals "1" to "9", are varied and displayed. Also in this small area Dm1, a big win is started by stop-displaying three third symbols composed of the same number.

Thus, in the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, the variation display ( main variable display) and a variable display (sub-variable display) executed in a small area Dm1 of the main controller 110 in a smaller size than the main variable display. As a result, for example, even if the decorative movable member provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is moved to a position covering the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the display is executed in the small area Dm1. A player can be surely notified of the lottery result of the special symbol by the sub-variation display.

In addition, for example, in the main variation display, a part of the third symbol combination to indicate that the jackpot has been won is displayed in a ready-to-win state (a state in which two of the three symbol rows have stopped changing). state), and when the main variable display is temporarily turned off in order to greatly change the aspect of the effect executed in the main display region Dm, only the sub-variable display in the small region Dm1 is left. , the player can be made aware that the special symbols are currently displayed in a variable manner.

In this control example, the display position of the small area Dm1 is fixed above the central position of the main display area Dm, but the position where the small area Dm1 is formed may be variable. In this case, it is preferable to vary the display depending on whether or not the movable member for decoration is movable, and the mode of presentation executed in the main variable display. Also, the size of the small area Dm1 may be varied, and a period during which only one of the sub-variation display and the main variation may be performed may be provided.

In the small area Ds1 in the secondary display area Ds, the same number of first reserved symbols imitating a bird's face as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second reserved symbol imitating an egg is displayed in the second The same number as the number of reserved balls in the special pattern is displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the respective reserved balls, the reserved symbols enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the held ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

In this control example, the number of balls entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 is suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

The display control device 1140 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 1140 performs the variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 1140 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 1140. As shown in FIG. The display control device 1140 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 1140 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 1140 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 1140 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 1140. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 180) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 166) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 1140, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 1140 are resident in resident video RAM 235 . Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 1140 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 1140 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long period of time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variable image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 by means of a fluctuation effect when a ball is detected to enter the main controller 110 .

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 180).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 161 . FIG. 161 shows the power on display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 1140 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 1140 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 1140 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 161(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 1140 executes the command shown in FIG. 161(b). As shown in FIG. 161( c ), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a “○” pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a “○” at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 1140 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140, 161(b) and 161(c) are alternately drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the three-symbol display device 81 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. While the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the ball is detected in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can be displayed immediately.

Returning to FIG. 160, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 162, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 162(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage." . Also, FIG. 163 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 162, the back images corresponding to the respective backs A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 so as to be longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When a change in the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface. First, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between position a and position a′ of the image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 163, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 163(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 163(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 163(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. 163(a) to 163(a) to 163(c) are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 again.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 162(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 1140 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Also, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 163(a), and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 163(a) to 163(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a stage change is determined by a lottery at the start of fluctuation, the resident video RAM 235 can be stored on the back side of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. It can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

163(a) to 163(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. 163(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 163(b)-(c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 163(b)-(c) and 163(c)-(a) can be normally used while the images of FIGS. 163(a)-(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 163(b) to (c) and FIGS. 163(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in normal-use video RAM 236 for rear surfaces B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-surface images provided in image storage area 236a of normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 160). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 160, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 159(b)) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. be. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, but the third symbol display device 81 To suppress the occurrence of a state in which a variable performance is not immediately started.

Further, image data corresponding to the main symbols with no numerals "1" to "9" are also resident in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "young man" and a "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 1140 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 234, but the character data in the resident video RAM 235 is changed. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display controller 1140 is notified by an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 1140 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 1140 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In this pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 1140 displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 1140 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is jackpots A to F. In either case, a stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the back face type, when specifying to display a back face image different from back faces A to E, information specifying which back face image is to be displayed is also described.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 164) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 1140 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 1140 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 1140 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 165). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 165).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 165, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 1140 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 180). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 192(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 182(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 192(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 192(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 193) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 166) that describes the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 182(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 166), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 1140, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 167, which will be described later, various sprites for creating a vertical scroll display screen (vertical scroll display data group) and a horizontal scroll display screen (horizontal scroll display data group) are displayed. ) and various sprites for creating display screens (common display data) commonly used in vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Here, in the drawing list of this control example, as shown in FIG. 166, the sprite to be drawn first becomes the sprite related to the vertical scroll display data group, then the sprite related to the horizontal scroll display data group, and finally the common display data. It is configured to be a sprite related to The rear image in the horizontal scroll display data group (the image arranged on the rearmost side in the horizontal scroll display data group) is the image of the vertical scroll display data group created on the rear side of the rear image. It is set so that the person is invisible.

Thereby, when the horizontal scroll display is executed, the vertical scroll display formed behind the display data for the horizontal scroll display is not displayed. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the player is allowed to visually recognize the vertical scroll display, a process (transparency process) is executed to display all the sprites of the horizontal scroll display data group in a transparent manner. The vertical scroll display formed on the back side of the screen is configured to be visually recognized by the player.

In this way, a plurality of variable display modes are always drawn, and depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable display mode displayed so as to be visible to the player can be changed, thereby providing a variety of displays to the player. Since a variable display mode can be provided, it is possible to enhance the performance effect. In addition, since a plurality of variable display modes are always created, for example, even if the variable display mode is configured to vary according to the player's operation, the variable display mode can be varied smoothly. .

Furthermore, in this control example, as described above, the common display (for example, the reserved ball symbol display) that is displayed in common both when the vertical scroll display is performed and when the horizontal scroll display is performed is performed. Since it is formed on the frontmost side, common display can be executed without being affected by other display data (regardless of the presence or absence of transparency processing for horizontal scroll display data).

In this example of control, the data for vertical scrolling display and the data for horizontal scrolling display are completely independent of each other to create a drawing list. For sprites that can be shared (e.g. effects), the information is written only in the display data on the front side (horizontal scroll side), and the sprites (e.g. effects) are drawn when the scroll direction is changed. Only the display position coordinates of (sprites for scrolling) may be changed to values corresponding to the scroll direction. This can reduce the amount of sprites in the entire draw list.

As described above, in this control example, vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display can be set as variable display modes for displaying the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 (one liquid crystal display), By constructing the image data for displaying each variable display mode in parallel, even if it is not decided which variable display mode is to be displayed at the start of the variation of the third symbol ( For example, even when the variable display mode to be displayed is varied based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the variable display of the third symbol, the variable display mode can be varied smoothly. However, other than this, it is also possible to use a configuration that can smoothly change the variable display mode by creating image data relating to a plurality of variable display modes in parallel.

Furthermore, in this control example, the configuration is such that different variable display modes can be executed without varying the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, as in the first control example described above, the third A part of the display area of the display means (the third pattern display device 81 in the second control example) for variably displaying the pattern is covered by the display area shielding means (for example, the movable role) so as to be difficult for the player to see. object, light guide plate, or organic EL), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific variation pattern is set), the display area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is changed, and the variable Alternatively, a variable display mode corresponding to the display area may be set.

In this way, when the size of the display area in which the third pattern is variably displayed is varied and the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display area is set, the third pattern is displayed in the same direction. To make it easier to reduce the amount of sprites in an entire drawing list by allowing a player to think that a different variable display is being executed even if a variable display mode to be varied is set corresponding to a display area. can be done.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 193). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 193). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 1140 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified rendering target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the rendering list (see S7802 in FIG. 194).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 182(b)) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the contents of image display in this control example will be described. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on the drawing list. As shown in FIG. 167, in this control example, one display image is created by superimposing images (layers) in the order of types shown in the drawing list described with reference to FIG. A common display data group (common layer group) for displaying common information such as pending ball number patterns and error patterns is formed on the front side (player side), and a horizontal scroll display data group is formed behind it. (horizontal scroll layer group) is formed, and the vertical scroll display data group (vertical scroll layer group) is formed on the innermost side.

Furthermore, it is configured such that all images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group can be subjected to transparency processing (processing to make all color information colorless). According to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, normally, the back image formed at the innermost position of the horizontal scroll layer group is used to create an image on the back side, that is, for vertical scrolling. All images belonging to the horizontal scroll layer group are subjected to transparency processing when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the player operates the frame button 22). As a result, the player can visually recognize the vertical scroll display that has been displayed on the far side (rear) of the horizontal scroll layer group.

Next, referring to FIG. 168, the contents of the display screen during the performance executed by the third symbol display device will be described. FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen using the variable display layer 1 (horizontal scroll layer group), and FIG. group) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen using.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the third pattern is normally variably displayed by horizontal scroll display, and during horizontal scroll display, as shown in FIG. 159(a) , 5 effective lines (V1 to V5) are used to variably display the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol.

During this horizontal scroll display, when a reach state (so-called double reach state) occurs on the effective lines V4 and V5 (see FIG. 168(a)), when the player operates the frame button 22, the switching flag 223aa is displayed. is set to ON, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 switches to the vertical scroll display shown in FIG. 168(b). As shown in FIG. 168(b), in the vertical scroll display, only one active line is displayed, and the main symbols imitating the numbers "2" and "3" in the horizontal scroll display. The display switches from the double reach state of , to the reach state of only the number "3".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, it is more advantageous for the player to win big with main symbols imitating odd numbers than to win big with main symbols imitating even numbers. As shown in FIG. 168(a), during the horizontal scrolling display, the player cannot know which main symbol will result in a big win until the timing when the main symbol stops. However, by switching to the vertical scrolling display shown in FIG. can give.

In this way, by switching to variable display with different scrolling directions and varying the number of effective lines of the main symbols, the content of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbols can be changed to make the player tired. It is possible to provide a game that does not come. In this control example, the scroll direction is changed to reduce the number of effective lines to provide different variable display modes. The number of effective lines may be increased by increasing the number of effective lines. In this case, it is preferable to set the ready-to-reach state by switching to the vertical scroll display even though the ready-to-reach state is not set during normal horizontal scroll display. As a result, the game can be played while the player has a sense of anticipation for the big win until the end of the variable display.

Further, in this control example, the method of establishing the switching condition for switching the scroll direction is defined as the player operating the frame button 22, but is not limited to this. It may be configured so that it always switches when set, or it may be configured so that the scroll direction is not changed by the player's operation of the frame button 22 .

In addition, in this control example, the display control device 1140 is configured to generate both a horizontal scrolling variable display image and a vertical scrolling variable display image. Even if it is established, the direction of scrolling can be switched immediately, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, a horizontal scroll display variation pattern and a vertical scroll display variation pattern are set as variation patterns for indicating the lottery result of one special symbol, and a display image is formed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the main symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed in one scroll display, the main symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed in the other scroll display. The screen may be continuously displayed, and the effect image during the jackpot game may be displayed on the other scroll display side. By configuring in this way, the current big winning pattern can be easily confirmed by operating the frame button 22 and switching the display screen at any timing during the big winning game.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed in one scroll display, and the other scroll is executed. It may be configured to perform a variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the display.

In this control example, when the display screen showing the variable display is switched, the variable direction of the third symbol is switched. The configuration is not limited to the configuration of this control example as long as it is configured to notify the user of the winning combination. The other display screen may be configured to show the lottery result of the big win only in the stop display mode of one symbol, or the one display screen may display a variable display mode simulating reels, and the other display screen may display. It may be configured such that a variable display mode imitating 7 segments is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, a configuration is used in which two display screens can be displayed in one liquid crystal display device. It may be configured to switch to a different variable display mode by variably operating the device.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the aspect of the special symbol confirmation stop sound in the second control example will be described. As will be described later, in this second control example, two types of BGMA and BGMB are set as the BGM that is output during the period in which the special symbols are varied. In the voice ramp control device 113, at the timing when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (the timing when the variation pattern command is output from the main control device 110 and received by the voice ramp control device 113), the value of the voice effect counter 223ab described later is obtained, and the type of BGM is determined by the obtained value and the lottery result (hit or miss) of the special symbol. The type of BGM is determined not only by the content of the BGM (BGMA, BGMB) but also by the tempo of the BGM.

In this embodiment, by varying the output tempo even with the same BGM, the player can be made to feel that various BGM are being output, and the problem of early boredom with the game can be suppressed. . Furthermore, by varying the tempo of the BGM, even if the variation display (dynamic display) is performed with the same variation pattern, different variation patterns are executed according to the tempo of the BGM that is output accordingly. It can make you think, and you can feel various variations of special symbols.

Here, as the fluctuation of the special pattern, mainly after the fluctuation display (scroll display) of all the pattern rows is started, the pattern is scrolled at high speed, and then in the order determined in advance by the fluctuation pattern. After the respective pattern rows are changed from the high-speed scroll display state to the low-speed scroll display state in order, they are stopped and displayed. Specifically, in an example of three symbol rows, the left, middle and right symbol rows are scrolled at high speed, the left symbol row is scrolled at low speed, and then the right symbol is displayed. After the low-speed scrolling state is entered in the order of the row and the medium pattern row, the left pattern row is stopped and displayed, the right pattern row is stopped and displayed, and the middle pattern row is stopped and displayed. After that, after the left, middle, and right symbols that have been stopped become a shaking fluctuation state (a state in which they are displayed slightly fluctuating up and down at a predetermined cycle) indicating that they are temporarily stopped, the fluctuation period elapses, and the main Based on the reception of the confirmation command output from the control device 110, the confirmation stop display (static display) is performed.

Here, at the timing when each pattern row is stopped from being scrolled and displayed, an effect sound called a pattern stop sound (for example, darn) is output to inform the player that the symbols are to be stopped and displayed. Output separately from BGM. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the symbols have been stopped, and the player can understand what kind of determination result the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row will represent. can be expected.

However, as in this control example, by using various types of BGM or changing the tempo of the BGM, the state and tempo output at the timing of the design stop of the output BGM and the design stop sound can be changed. does not match the music, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Specifically, by outputting a pattern stop sound with a slow tempo even though the BGM is fast in tempo, the BGM and the stop sound do not match, giving a sense of incongruity as a special pattern fluctuation effect, or giving a special effect. It is conceivable that the BGM that has been output at the timing when the pattern stops is stopped, resulting in a poorly sharpened BGM. In addition, in this control example, the variation period of the special symbol (the variation period of the variation pattern) is set in various ways, but the BGM that is output is repeatedly outputting music (songs or phrases) shorter than that period. , is configured to output music in the required output period. With such a configuration, the output BGM does not always have a sharp timing at the timing when the symbols are stopped, so that the player is likely to feel uncomfortable.

Here, in this control example, the type of the stop sound to be output is changed and set according to the tempo and type of the BGM being output. As a result, it is possible to output a symbol stop sound in accordance with the tempo and type of the BGM, and it is configured to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player at the symbol stop timing.

Referring to FIG. 169, an example in which tempo 120 (BPM 120) is selected and an example in which tempo 80 (BPM 80) is selected as BGM output when variation pattern A (12 seconds) is executed are shown. A stop sound to be output will be described in comparison with each other. In the variation pattern A, the left pattern row is stopped after 8 seconds from the start of the variation, the right pattern row is stopped after 10 seconds, and the middle pattern row is stopped and displayed after 12 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 169, the BGMA (tempo 120) consists of BGM in which four quarter notes are played in one bar of two seconds, and the one bar is controlled to be repeatedly output. In BGMA (tempo 120), one quarter note is output every 0.5 seconds (one quarter note is played every 0.5 seconds). The BGMA (tempo 120) is set so that the stop sound A is output as the stop sound. The stop sound A is configured such that the stop sound of eighth notes is output at a tempo of 120 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the stop sound B is composed of a sound "dah, dah" and is configured to be output for about 0.5 seconds in total. Here, in BGMA (tempo 120), as shown in FIGS. 169(a) and 169(b), at the timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the output of the quarter note indicated by α1 is actually started. However, since it is the output timing of the stop sound, the stop sound A is output instead of that sound. In this way, in reality, the BGMA (tempo 120) stops the output of the BGM at the timing when the sound corresponding to the quarter note is output. is started, it is possible to make the player feel that the stop sound A is output in accordance with the timing at which the sound is actually output, thereby reducing discomfort. Similarly, at the right symbol row stop timing 10 seconds after the start of the variation, the stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α2 is output in the BGM, and the middle symbol row stop timing 12 seconds after the variation start. Then, the stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α3 is output.

In this way, in BGMA (tempo 120), by repeatedly outputting music of one bar that is short for two seconds, the player quickly learns the pattern of the music and becomes conscious of the type of sound to be output next. However, at the pattern stop timing, the stop sound A is output in accordance with the output timing of the sound set in the BGM, so that the problem that the BGM is not sharp can be suppressed. After the stop sound A is output at the timing of stopping the left pattern and the right pattern, the output of the BGM is output according to the passage of time. Specifically, the BGM reproduction process is continued even when the pattern is stopped, and the BGM output channel is set to mute during the period in which the stop sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 169(c), in BGMA (tempo 80), the structure of one bar similar to BGMA (tempo 120) is output so as to be played in 3 seconds. In the BGMA (tempo 80), the stop timing 8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is not the timing at which a new note is output, but the timing at which the previously set note continues to be output. In the BGM of BGMA (tempo 80), 8.25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the timing actually comes to output the sound corresponding to the new note (β1). Here, in BGMA (tempo 80), as shown in FIG. 169(c), a stop sound B composed of triplets is output based on the left pattern stop timing 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation. It is Since this stop sound B is output at a tempo of 80, the sound of a new note is output after 0.25 seconds, and the sound corresponding to the new note is output after 0.25 seconds. With this configuration, the sound corresponding to the note in the stop sound B ( The second note of the triplet) is output, so even if the sound that should have been output at BGMA (tempo 80) is not output due to the output of stop sound B, it will be output at that timing by stop sound B. Since sound is output, it is possible to suppress discomfort felt by the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 169(c), in the stop sound B output at the stop timing of the right symbol row 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the timing at which the sound in the stop sound B is output (the third in the triplet) ) coincides with the output timing of the sound corresponding to the note β2 that is output 10.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the BGMA (tempo 80), so the BGMA (tempo 80) and the stop sound B can be combined to suppress the player's sense of incongruity. Furthermore, at the stop timing of the middle symbol row 12 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the output timing of the notes in the BGMA (tempo 80) and the output timing of the stop sound B match, so that the output of the stop sound is uncomfortable. can be suppressed.

In this way, even when the tempo of the BGM is changed and output, the stop sound is selected and output in accordance with the change in tempo, so that the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match can be suppressed. Also, even when the tempo of BGM is flexibly changed by lottery or the like, the stop sound is set so as to match the reference tempo by converting the stop sound according to the change of the tempo and outputting it. If this is done, it can be configured to easily output a matching stop sound.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery ratio of the tempo of the BGM to be selected according to the lottery result is set to be variable. It can be expected early that the result is a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 170, output contents of various voices for variation pattern B (18-second variation) in which a variation time different from variation pattern A (12-second variation) described above with reference to FIG. 169 is set. give an explanation. FIG. 170(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of variation pattern B (18-second variation), and FIG. FIG. 170(c) is a timing chart schematically showing output timings of sounds, and FIG. 170(c) is a timing chart schematically showing output timings of each sound when BGMB is reproduced for variation pattern B. be.

As shown in FIG. 170(b), when variation pattern B with a variation time of 18 seconds is set, the stop timing of each symbol row is set at a different timing from variation pattern A with a variation time of 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 170(a), the left symbol row stops after 14 seconds from the start of variation, the right symbol row after 16 seconds from the start of variation, and the middle symbol row after 18 seconds from the start of variation. is set to It should be noted that the stop timing of each symbol row is set corresponding to each variation when the variation time is different, or when the execution mode is different even if the variation time is the same. The stop timing shown in FIG. 170(a) is just an example. Further, the order in which the symbol rows are stopped and the interval at which each symbol row is stopped are set according to the effect mode to be executed. It may be configured so as to be stopped based on the user's operation of the operation means (frame button 22).

According to the example shown in FIG. 170(b), the timing at which each symbol row stops is different from the example shown in FIG. 169(b), but similar to the example shown in FIG. 169(b), A stop sound A (beamed eighth note) can be output (reproduced) in accordance with the stop timing of each pattern row.

Thus, by setting the type and tempo of the stop sound to be output (reproduced) in accordance with the stop timing of the pattern row based on the content (rhythm) of the BGM to be reproduced and the reproduction speed (tempo), Since a stop sound that matches both the timing of hitting the beat in the BGM being reproduced and the timing of stopping the pattern row can be reproduced, the image and the sound with a sense of unity are produced for the player. can be provided, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(c), the type of the stop sound is determined in correspondence with the content (rhythm) of the BGM to be played back, and then the tempo of the stop sound is varied. The reproduction timing (beating timing) may be configured to coincide with both the timing of beating the BGM being reproduced and the timing of stopping the pattern sequence.

Also, as shown in FIG. 170(c), when the timing of BGM beats and the timing of stop sound beats completely match, both sounds may be output. In this case, only when it is determined that there is a slight difference between the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats, muting of the BGM sound is performed. should be configured. As a result, only when the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats completely match, it is possible to output an emphasized voice without impairing the rhythm of the voice being reproduced. It is possible to emphasize and notify that the pattern has stopped.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170(c), the BGMB is configured to repeatedly reproduce a rhythm using triplets of eighth notes in place of quarter notes for the BGMA. As a stop sound (stop sound B) corresponding to set.

Then, in accordance with the timing when the left pattern row stops (14 seconds after the fluctuation starts), the stop sound B is reproduced, and the beats β1 and β2 of the BGMB that overlap with the stop sound B (γ1, γ2) are set to mute. do. According to the example shown in FIG. 170(b), it is determined that the output timing of the BGM beat β2 and the beat next to the stop sound B beat γ2 completely matches. , to output (emphasize output) the sound for any beat. As a result, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the left symbol row has stopped in accordance with the tempo of the BGMB.

Similarly, at the timing when the right pattern row stops (16 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the beats β3 and β4 of the BGMB that overlap the beats γ3 and γ4 of the stop sound B are set to mute, and the beats in between are set to mute. Emphasize output. Finally, when the middle pattern row is stopped and displayed (when the variable display period ends), the reproduction of the BGM ends at the timing when the variable display period ends. The output of the stop sound B (triplet) is output after the end of the variable display period, that is, over the fixed period. can let

In this control example, the reproduction of the BGM is started based on the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and the reproduction of the BGM is finished at the fluctuation stop timing (final period arrival timing). As a result, the reproduction position of the BGM at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbols can be always fixed, so that the timing of stopping each symbol sequence and the type of the BGM being executed can be easily determined at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbols. It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the stop sound, but as a configuration other than this, a configuration is used in which a specific BGM is always played in a loop regardless of the fluctuation situation of the special symbol. can be In this case, means for discriminating the stop timing of each symbol sequence corresponding to the currently set variation pattern at the start timing of the fluctuation of the special symbols, and means for discriminating the reproduction position of the BGM being reproduced at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols. , and the type of stop sound may be set after determining the playback status of the BGM near the stop timing of each pattern row.

In addition, it is also possible to change the type of BGM or change the tempo of the BGM while the special symbols are changing. In this case, the timing for setting the type of stop sound is not at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, but at a predetermined time when the stop timing of each symbol row arrives (the BGM cannot be changed again until the stop timing arrives). It suffices to perform a process of determining the type and tempo of the BGM being reproduced before the time (about a period of time). As a result, it is possible to smoothly cope with a sudden change in BGM.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of reserved balls discriminating means for discriminating the number of reserved balls of special symbols and the discrimination result of the discriminating means discriminate that the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), In a pachinko machine constructed so as to easily set a variation pattern in which a variation time is set shorter than when it is determined that the number is less than a predetermined number, the tempo of BGM to be reproduced is changed according to the number of held balls. may be configured so that BGM with a fast tempo can be easily set when the number of held balls is large.

Further, in this control example, the type of the stop sound to be voice-output corresponding to the stop timing of the third symbol is selected from predetermined data defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. However, without being limited to this, for example, a BGM discriminating means for discriminating the tempo or rhythm of the reproduced BGM may be provided, and a stop sound may be generated according to the discrimination result of the BGM discriminating means. In this case, for example, beats set as stop sounds are set according to the rhythm of the BGM (for example, a stop sound of 2 beats, a stop sound of 3 beats), and the stop sounds set according to the tempo of the BGM are reproduced. It suffices to execute the processing for setting the speed. In addition, the output period of the stop sound may be varied according to the determination result of the BGM determination means.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the stop sound overlaps with the BGM at the stop timing of the third symbol, the stop sound is output with priority over the BGM. may be used, for example, a success or failure determination means for determining the lottery result of this special symbol, and a variable means for varying the setting of voice output when it is determined that the determination result of the success or failure determination means is a big hit. Alternatively, when the audio output setting is changed by the variable means, the BGM may be output with priority over the stop sound. By configuring in this way, it is possible not to output the stop sound at the timing at which the stop sound is normally output, that is, at the stop timing of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute a production that gives a sense of incongruity that is different from usual.

In this control example, when the stop sound and BGM overlap, in order to output only one of the sounds, the other sound is muted. Alternatively, overlapping voices may be synthesized and output. In this case, it is preferable to provide a determination means for determining whether or not to synthesize overlapping voices according to the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol according to whether or not the overlapping voice is synthesized.

In addition, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a timekeeping means (for example, RTC) having a backup power supply capable of continuously measuring the current time is provided, and the timekeeping means detects a predetermined time (for example, noon ) is clocked, in a pachinko machine 10 provided with a time performance execution means capable of executing a performance at a specific time, one stop sound from a group of stop sounds corresponding to BGM reproduced during the time performance. can be set. In this case, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 with the same specifications are arranged side by side, the pachinko machines 10 are manufactured so that the stop sounds set from the same group of stop sounds are different for the adjacent pachinko machines 10. It may be configured such that different stop sounds are set according to the numbers.

By configuring in this way, the same BGM can be reproduced simultaneously for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by time production, and further, it corresponds to the same BGM and has different aspects (for example, scale, rhythm, (tempo, period) can be reproduced by the adjacent pachinko machine 10, so that a sound presentation full of realism, which is difficult to be realized by a single pachinko machine 10, can be executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation time (variation pattern) of different length is set according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol is displayed until the first predetermined period elapses. When each variation pattern is configured to perform high-speed variation (high-speed variation at which the third symbol cannot be stopped and displayed) and then low-speed variation (low-speed variation at which the third symbol can be stopped and displayed) is performed. , regardless of the length of the set fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern is set so that the period of low-speed fluctuation is constant, and then the stop sound and BGM processing described above is executed. You can In this case, it is preferable to determine BGM for low-speed variation at the timing of switching from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, and to determine the type of stop sound based on the determined BGM.

By configuring in this way, even if it is possible to set a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times, the stop timing of the third symbol can be shared, so the stop sound and BGM are set. Processing can be simplified.

In addition, in this control example, as the plurality of sounds to be output from the pachinko machine 10, processing for BGM and a stop sound is described, but the output timing and output of other sounds are not limited to this. The aspect may be adjustable. Specifically, the type of sound (operation sound) output when the frame button 22 is operated can be varied according to the type of BGM being played, Alternatively, the abnormal sound for notifying the pachinko machine 10 of an abnormality may be set at a timing different from the beat of the sound being reproduced. It may be configured to be As a result, it is possible to prevent the beat of the abnormal sound from being absorbed by the beat of the BGM being played back on the pachinko machine 10 and failing to hear that the abnormal sound is being output.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG. This second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a variation pattern 2 table 202aa is used instead of the variation pattern table 202d, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 172, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202aa will be described. FIG. 172(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 172(a), the variation pattern 2 table 202aa is provided with a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 for the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) of the first control example described above. is different. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 selects a variation pattern in the case where a probability variation state and a time saving state in which special symbols are shortened variation are set as the game state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. This is a data table that is referred to when the operation is performed, and defines a variation pattern of different variation times based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the determined stop type.

Here, with reference to FIG. 172(b), the contents of the outlier (variable probability) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 will be described. FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), when the stop type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is "completely out" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190", "Short Miss (12 seconds)" is selected, and if it is in the range "191-198", then "Short Miss (18 seconds)" is selected. Then, when the stop type is "reach" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 190", "normal reach various (30 seconds)" is selected, and when it is "191 to 197" , "various types of super reach (60 seconds)" are selected, and when "198", "various types of special reach (90 seconds)" are selected.

Here, when "short time out (12 seconds)" or "time out (18 seconds)" is selected, the BGM and stop sound setting process described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170 is executed. . 169 and 170 described above, the setting processing of the BGM and the stop sound when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost has been described as an example, but when a variation pattern other than that is set, A similar setting process is also executed.

When various variation patterns are selected with reference to the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern 2 table 202aa1, a variation pattern command for indicating the variation pattern is set and output to the sound ramp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands. be done. When receiving the variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the effect mode to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the received variation pattern command.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. In the second control example, the target (device) for executing the variable display of the third symbol, the operation of which is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, is different from that in the above-described first control example. Specifically, in the above-described first control example, the variable display device unit 80 is used to variably display the third pattern, whereas in this second control example, the third pattern display device 81 is used to display the The difference is that the three symbols are variably displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 173(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 173(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 173(a), the ROM 222 of the second control example has an outer reel motion table 222c, an inner reel motion table 222d, a symbol motion table 222e, a special effect, and a The difference is that a scenario table 222f and a pattern group storage area 222g are deleted, and a BGM type selection table 222aa and a stop sound selection table 222ab are added. Furthermore, it is different in that the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a are made to correspond to various effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the specific contents (contents indicating the mode of presentation) specified in the variation pattern selection table 222a are the same as those of a well-known game machine using a liquid crystal display device, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The BGM type selection table 222aa is a data table for selecting BGM to be reproduced during the variable display of the third symbol executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. Here, the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 174(a). FIG. 174(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 174(a), in this control example, different BGM types (BGMA, BGMB) and , different tempos (BPM 80, BPM 120) are configured to be selected.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “win (big win)” and the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is in the range of “0 to 69”, “BGMA (BPM 120)” is selected as the BGM. If the range is '70 to 89', 'BGMA (BPM 80)' is selected, and if the range is '90 to 99', 'BGMB (BPM 120)' is selected. are doing.

Then, when the result of the suitability determination is "off" and the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is in the range of "0 to 89", "BGMA (BPM 80)" is selected, and the range of "90 to 99" is selected. , "BGMA (BPM 120)" is selected.

That is, in the second control example, the BGM type and tempo to be reproduced during the variable display are made different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, the BGM (BGMB (BPM 120)) that is selected only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the BGM (BGMA (BPM 120)) is provided. With this configuration, the player can predict the lottery result of the current special symbol based on the BGM reproduced during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol). It is possible to make the player interested not only in the presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 but also in the voice output from the voice output device 226.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the BGM with a fast tempo is more likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to enhance the sense of elation for the player. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, as a factor in selecting BGM, the remaining period of the time-saving state is determined, and the selection ratio of the BGM type is varied based on the determination result. Specifically, when it is determined that the remaining period of the time saving state (number of remaining time saving times) is 10 times or more, it is configured so that BGM with a slow tempo is easily selected, and the remaining period of the time saving state (number of remaining time saving times) ) is less than 10 times, BGM with a fast tempo is likely to be selected. As a result, it is possible to arouse the fact that the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is coming to an end. In addition, by changing the selection ratio of the BGM type according to the number of remaining time reductions, for example, when BGM with a fast tempo is selected in a state where the number of remaining time reductions is large, this special symbol lottery is a big hit. Then, the player can be given a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since common processing can be executed for the BGM tempo selected according to the number of times of remaining time reduction and the BGM tempo selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the processing of the sound lamp control device 113 load can be reduced.

In this control example, the type of BGM and the playback speed (tempo) are selected according to the lottery result of special symbols and the remaining period of the time saving state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a table for selecting the type of BGM and a table for selecting the tempo of BGM may be different, and one element may be selected from each table according to different conditions. As a result, the BGM to be reproduced is determined by combining the elements selected from each table, so that the BGM can be diversified. In this case, the type of BGM can be selected by using an operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, and the tempo of the BGM can be variably selected depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. .

In addition, in this control example, the tempo of the BGM tends to be faster when the jackpot is won. , BGM with a slow tempo may be easily reproduced. Furthermore, in this control example, a specific tempo is selected as the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced, but the tempo may be changed during reproduction of the BGM. In this case, for example, the BGM is reproduced at a common tempo until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the BGM is reproduced, and after that, the BGM is reproduced according to the selected BGM reproduction speed. should be configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the lottery result unpredictable by voice immediately after the special symbol variation is started, so that the player is interested in various performances during the special symbol variation. can be done.

Furthermore, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display information for indicating the type of BGM being executed this time and the reproduction speed (tempo). As a result, the player can visually recognize the information about the sound that is currently being reproduced, so that the game can be more easily understood.

The stop sound selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting the type of sound (stop sound) to be reproduced in accordance with the timing of stopping the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this control example, the type of stop sound is made different according to the type and reproduction speed of the BGM reproduced during the special symbol variation, or the set variation pattern. As a result, the stop sound corresponding to both the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM output from the audio output device 226 can be reproduced. It is possible to enhance the sense of unity with the voice production.

Here, the contents of the stop sound selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 174(b), in this control example, different stop sounds are generated according to the BGM type selected using the BGM type selection table 222aa and the currently set variation pattern (symbol stop timing). configured to be selected.

Specifically, when the BGM type is "BGMA (BPM 120)", the symbol stop timing is timing A (see FIG. 169(a)) or timing B (see FIG. 170(a)). When sound A (eighth note with beam) is selected (see FIG. 169(b)) and it is "BGMA (BPM 80)", the pattern stop timing is timing A (see FIG. 169(a)) and timing B. (See FIG. 170(a)), the stop sound B (triplet) is selected (see FIG. 169(c)), and if it is "BGMB (BPM 120)", the pattern stop timing is timing A. (See FIG. 169(a)) and timing B (see FIG. 170(a)), the stop sound B (triplet) is selected.

Returning to FIG. 173(b), the description continues. FIG. 173(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. Compared to the RAM 223 of the first control example, the RAM 223 of the second control example has a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, a returning flag 223l, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stop symbol storage area 223n, and an outer reel The difference is that the action counter 223p and the inner reel action counter 223q are deleted, and the switching flag 223aa and the sound effect counter 223ab are provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The switching flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that a switching condition for switching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and is set to ON when the switching condition is satisfied. Specifically, in this control example, when the game state is waiting, by operating the frame button 22, the scroll mode of the third symbols executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. It is configured to be switchable, and when the switching condition is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the standby (when the frame button operation for varying the scroll mode is executed), it is turned on. When the variation pattern command of the special symbol variation is received while the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, that is, when executing a new special symbol variation, the switching command for switching the scroll mode is set.

As described above, in this control example, when an operation for changing the scrolling mode is performed while waiting in the game state, a variable display with a variable scrolling mode is executed from the special symbol variation executed after that. Configure. In this control example, even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a specific variable display (when the player operates the frame button 22), the scroll mode is also variable. Since the scroll mode is changed immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, the switch flag 223aa is never turned on.

A timer is provided for measuring the elapsed time after the ON state of the switching flag 223aa is set. may be configured to be set to off. As a result, even if the player who has been playing the game before stops the game by performing an operation to turn on the switching flag 223aa when stopping the game, the next player is displayed in a variable scroll mode. It is possible to suppress the situation in which a game is played. Further, it may be configured to display information for indicating the currently set scroll mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in standby.

The sound effect counter 223ab is a counter used when selecting the BGM type in the sound lamp control device 113, and is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 99 in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141). (not shown).

Next, contents defined in the ROM 302 and RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 302 of the audio output device 226, and FIG. 175(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226. is.

The contents of the voice file storage area 302a defined in the ROM 302, the music data group storage area 303a defined in the RAM 303, the music pointer 303b, the maximum value storage area 303c, and the music timer 303d are as follows: Since it has been described above with reference to FIG. 158, it will be omitted.

The confirmation flag 303e is a flag for indicating that a command indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed has been received from the sound lamp control device 113, and is a command for indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. is received (see S9217 in FIG. 196). Then, in the audio setting process (see S9002 in FIG. 198), it is referred to at the end timing of the music data being reproduced (S9403 in FIG. 198), and if it is set to ON (S9403 in FIG. 198: Yes) , is determined to be normal and set to OFF (S9404 in FIG. 198). On the other hand, if it is set to OFF in the process of S9403, the process of setting the value of the music pointer to 00H is executed again (see S9405 in FIG. 198).

That is, in this control example, music data is set in advance according to the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol is confirmed and displayed at the end timing of reproduction of the music data, that is, at the end timing of the fluctuation time. If it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received, and if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received, that is, even though the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol fluctuation has not ended When it is determined, the music is configured to be played back in a loop. As a result, when the variation of the special symbol does not end due to a problem, it is possible to suppress the situation in which only the reproduction of the music ends first, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. .

<Control processing executed by the audio ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179, control of the sound ramp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. Note that the points that are changed from the first control example will be described, and the illustration and description of the same control will be omitted.

FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable display setting process 2 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. In the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S2263), the fluctuation pattern selection process (Fig. 145: S2603) is changed to the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S2653) in contrast to the fluctuation display setting process (Fig. 145: S2213) in the first control example. The difference is that the audio setting process (S2651) is added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), which is one process in the variation display setting process 2 (S2263) of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the contents of this variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653).

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), the details of the variation pattern are determined based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and if the switch flag 223aa is set to ON, (vertical scroll to horizontal Timing of switching from scrolling or horizontal scrolling to vertical scrolling) A process for outputting a command necessary for the switching setting is executed.

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and the acquired value of the effect counter 223j and the extracted variation pattern type (variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command ), the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern 2 table 202aa (S2751). After that, it is determined whether or not the switching flag 223aa is ON, and if the switching flag 223aa is ON (S2752: Yes), a display switching command and an audio switching command are set (S2753). Here, if vertical scrolling is currently set, a display switching command and an audio switching command for instructing a change to horizontal scrolling are set. On the other hand, if horizontal scrolling is currently set, a display switching command and an audio switching command for instructing a change to vertical scrolling are set. If it is determined in the process of S2752 that the switching flag 223aa is off (S2752: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the audio setting process (S2651), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (S2263), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the contents of this audio setting process (S2651). In this sound setting process (S2651), the process of determining the type of BGM to be output during the variation of the special symbol and determining the type of stop sound of the special symbol based on the determined type of BGM is executed.

In the sound setting process (FIG. 178: S2651), the value of the sound effect counter 223ab is obtained (S3701). Based on the obtained value of the voice effect counter 223ab and the result of determination (result of determination of whether the special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command is appropriate), the BGM type is determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa (see FIG. 174(a)) ( S3702). An audio BGM command corresponding to the selected BGM type is set (S3703). The stop timing of each symbol row is extracted (analyzed) from the variation pattern of this time (S3704). Based on the determined BGM stop type and each symbol row stop timing, the stop sound type is determined from the stop sound selection table 222ab (see FIG. 174(b)) (S3705). A stop sound type command for audio corresponding to the determined stop sound type is set (S3706). Voice commands necessary for other effects are set (S3707), and this process ends.

In this way, the type of BGM is determined based on the result of winning/failure determination, so that the result of winning/failure determination can be predicted at an early stage by the BGM to be output, and expectations for success can be given.

In this control example, it is configured to determine the BGM type of the special symbol that changes based on the result of the winning/failure determination by lottery. It may be configured such that the background is set, the background is determined by lottery, and the BGM corresponding to the background is selected. In such a configuration, for example, a background in the morning and a background in the evening are set, and BGM with a fast tempo is output for the background in the morning, and BGM with a slow tempo is output for the background in the evening. , it is possible to output BGM with an impression that matches the background even if the BGM is the same.

In this control example, the same BGM is set at different tempos. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and different BGM is output at different tempos, and the stop sound is set according to the tempos. It may be configured as Furthermore, a plurality of BGMs are set and switched during the variation of 1, and output by switching, and a stop sound is selected and output in accordance with the tempo of the BGM output at the timing of stopping the pattern. may be configured.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2257) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2257). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2257), the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the frame button 22 is operated (waiting (waiting) or executing a specific effect (reach display mode of W reach) middle)) executes a process of switching and setting the setting for switching between vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (FIG. 179: S2257), first, it is determined whether an operation on the frame button 22 has been detected (whether the frame button 22 has been operated (depressed)) (S3801). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3801: Yes), it is determined whether the state of the pachinko machine 10 is waiting (waiting) (S3802). When it is determined that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is waiting (S3802: Yes), the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (S3803), and this process ends.

Here, when the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, the vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling settings are switched and changed when the special symbols are newly started to fluctuate from the standby state. As a result, when the player plays the game, the player can play the game in the scrolling direction that matches the player's preference.

On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that the game is not on standby (S3802: No), it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed (S3804). Here, the specific effect indicates the effect period during which the special symbol is displayed in the W reach display mode in the fluctuation pattern of the W reach. Note that the specific effect is not limited to W reach, and may be other effects.

In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (S3804: Yes), if the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scrolling is issued. , voice switching commands are set (S3805). On the other hand, if horizontal scrolling is currently set, a display switching command and an audio switching command for instructing a change to vertical scrolling are set. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (S3804: No), other frame button processing is executed (S3705), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3801: No), this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 1140 in the second control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 180, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 1140 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 is lengthened, as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first data in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234 d 1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 1140 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 181, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used as a processor, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, following the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is cancelled, , a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 180). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 181, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 192(b)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 161 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 182(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 182(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 1140 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 1140 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 182(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display image setting processing (S6351) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187. FIG.

In the display image setting process (S6351), when a switching command is received in the command determination process (S6302), a process for transmitting the image information of the variable display layer 1 is executed. Details of the display image setting process (S6351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the display image setting process (S6351), the display setting process (S6303) is then executed. In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the rear image after change is sent to the image controller 237 . A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 1140 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the stop type command for display is detected, it corresponds to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to F, front and back reach, reach other than front and back, complete loss) Then, the stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187, details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. First, FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 183, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S6451). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S6451: Yes), the invalid flag 233k is set to ON (S6452), and the process returns to S6401.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display switching command (S6451: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpot A to F, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 185(a). FIG. 185(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 185(b), details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 185(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 187(a), details of the back image change command process (S6415) will be described. FIG. 187(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .

Further, in task processing (S6304), if it is specified to display either back face A or B depending on the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S7102 is determined. , the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202. Processing is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the type.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 184(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 184(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, details of the display image setting process (S6351), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing this display image setting process (S6351).

In the display image setting process (S6351), first, it is determined whether an invalid flag (not shown) is set to ON (S7151). This invalid flag is set to ON in the process of S6452 when it is determined in the command determination process (S6302) that the display switching command has been received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In the process of S7151, if it is determined that the invalid flag is set to ON (S7151: Yes), image information of the horizontal scroll display data among the variable display data set in the display data table buffer is displayed. is rewritten with transparent information (S7152), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the invalid flag is off (S7151: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 189 . After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 191 . FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). Time data corresponding to the presentation time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404). Next, the process proceeds to S7405.

In the process of S7405, the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7505 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 189, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and for each sprite, Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 1140 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. First, FIG. 192(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described with reference to FIG. 192(b). FIG. 192(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)), the command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S7501: No in FIG. 192(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 1140 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 1140. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a), S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 189). The information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 1140 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 166) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 182(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device 226 in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198. FIG. In this second control example, the audio command set by the audio lamp control device 113 is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141). is configured to output voice data corresponding to the received voice command.

Thus, various display commands output to the display control device 1140 and voice By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of production modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (a production display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (visual display mode) and effect sound mode (auditory sound mode) output from the speaker via the audio output device 226) can be set centrally. Therefore, when a plurality of performance modes are executed to show the lottery result of the special pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each performance mode and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, the above-described visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols. It is sufficient if it executes the production for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand that operates an operation handle) or an olfactory presentation mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It is also possible to suggest and inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. In this way, by performing one performance by appropriately combining a plurality of types of performance modes, it is possible to set various performance modes to be executed for showing the lottery result of special symbols.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). Details of this command determination processing (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for outputting the sound that has been received is executed. After the process of S9001, the audio setting process is executed to reproduce the audio data and update the value of the music pointer (S9002). Details of this audio setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power failure occurrence information (S9003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off processing is executed (S9006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S9007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 195(b). FIG. 195(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 195(b)) is processing executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the read command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the command determination process (S9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 195(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S9001). In this command determination process (S9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the command determination process (S9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201). End the determination process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S9202). , the command type is analyzed (S9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is an audio stop sound command for outputting a sound (stop ON) at the timing of stopping each third symbol (S9204), and the audio stop sound command is determined. If it is determined that there is a sound command (S9204: Yes), the sound file (stop sound data group) corresponding to the stop sound notified by the command is read from the sound file storage area 302a of the ROM 302 and read out. The voice file (stop sound data group) is stored in the song data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, a value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is reproduced is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the stop sound data is set to the music timer 303d (S9206).

When the process of S9206 is finished, next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207), and voice synthesis is performed. The CN (channel) 2 of the unit 306 is set to reproduce stop sound data (S9208), and the process proceeds to S9209.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9204, if it is determined that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include the audio stop sound command (S9204: No), or if the processing of S9208 described above is executed. If so, it is then determined whether or not there is an audio BGM command among the commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9209). In the processing of S9209, if it is determined that there is an audio BGM command (S9209: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received audio BGM command is read from the audio file storage area 302a. Then, the read voice file (music data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

After the processing of S9210 is completed, the reproduction speed corresponding to the tempo of the BGM indicated by the received audio BGM command is set (S9211). Next, "00H" is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the BGM data is set to the music timer 303d (S9212). Next, BGM correction processing (S9213) is executed.

Here, in this control example, even when the same BGM is reproduced, the tempo of the reproduced BGM can be changed. Specifically, the audio file storage area 302a corresponds to songs with a standard tempo (for example, BPM (beats per minute) 80, that is, a tempo at which quarter notes beat 80 times per minute). The audio data read out from the audio file storage area 302a and indicating the standard tempo music is the tempo corresponding to the information indicating the tempo (tempo information) included in the music BGM command received this time. It is configured to vary the playback speed of the audio data so that the

In this way, by varying the playback speed of the audio files stored in the storage means (audio file storage area 302a), different tempos can be set. It is possible to eliminate the need to store files in storage means (sound file storage area 302a).

Here, the BGM correction process (S9213), which is one process in the command determination process (S9001) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described with reference to FIG. In the BGM correction process (S9213), when the output period of the BGM and the stop sound overlap, the process of creating a corrected audio file is executed. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the contents of the BGM correction process (S9213).

In the BGM correction process (S9213), first, the audio file of the stop sound data stored in the music data group storage area 303a is read (S9301). The stop sound data read in the process of S9301 is stored in the process of S9205 of the command determination process (S9001 in FIG. 196). Next, the audio output period (the period during which the stop sound is reproduced) is extracted from the read audio file (S9302), and the extracted audio output period of the stop sound data and the audio output period of the BGM data are compared (S9303). . Next, in the process of S9303, as a result of comparing the stop sound data and the BGM data, it is determined whether or not there is an overlap period in which the sound output period overlaps (S9304). If it is determined that there is an overlapping period between the stop sound and the BGM (S9304: Yes), a corrected audio file is created by correcting the BGM data corresponding to the overlapping period to mute (S9305), and the music data group storage area. The BGM audio file stored in 303a is rewritten with the corrected audio file created in the process of S9305 (S9306), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that there is no overlapping period between the audio output periods of the stop sound data and the BGM data (S9304: No), there is no need to create a correction audio file, so this process ends. .

As described above, in this control example, the BGM (music, tempo) corresponding to the special symbol variation is set by the audio ramp control device 113, and the stop sound corresponding to the mode of the set BGM is set. It consists of As a result, even if the tempo of the BGM is changed, the stop sound corresponding to the tempo can be reproduced. In addition, when the timing of stepping on the beat of the set BGM (timing of hitting the beat) does not match the stop timing of the third symbol executed in correspondence with the special symbol variation, as the type of stop sound, the reproduction period A long stop sound is set, and a stop sound that beats at both the set BGM beat timing and the third pattern stop timing is set. With this configuration, even if the tempo of the BGM is changed, the stop sound corresponding to both the set tempo of the BGM and the stop timing of the third pattern can be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode in which sound and display are combined without causing the player to feel uncomfortable, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, the audio output device 226 outputs an audio file of the stop sound reproduced in accordance with the timing of the stop of the third symbol, and an audio file of the BGM reproduced corresponding to the special symbol variation, It is configured so that it can be set separately, and when reproducing each set audio file, the BGM sound is set to be muted at locations where the audio reproduction timing overlaps.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sound of the BGM and the sound of the stop sound are output at the same time, and the volume is partially increased. Furthermore, even if the timing of striking the BGM and the timing of striking the stop sound are slightly different (for example, 0.05 seconds), the sound can be reproduced without giving the player a sense of discomfort. .

Returning to FIG. 196, the description continues. After executing the BGM correction process (S9213), the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9214), The reproduction of the BGM data is set to CN1 of the voice synthesizing unit 306 (S9215), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9209 that the audio BGM command has not been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9209: No), it is determined whether or not there is an audio confirmation command (S9216). If it is determined that there is an audio confirmation command (S9216: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9217), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9216 that there is no audio confirmation command (S9216: No), it is determined whether or not there is an audio switching command (S9218). If it is determined that there is an audio switching command (S9218: Yes), the audio file data is set to switch (S9219), and the process returns to S9201. On the other hand, in the processing of S9218, if it is determined that the switching command for sound has not been received (S9218: No), processing according to other commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S9214). , the process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command for instructing reproduction of a sound effect, reproduction of the type of sound effect specified by the command is set. Also, if the command is for instructing the reproduction of a warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type specified by the command is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed in the main process (see FIG. 195(a)) by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing this audio setting process (S9002).

In this audio setting process (see FIG. 198), first, it is determined whether or not BGM is being reproduced (S9401). This means that a warning sound or the like is being reproduced, or no audio is being output, and there is no possibility of switching to other audio data during audio reproduction, so this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9401 that BGM is being reproduced (S9401: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to end the music data being reproduced (S9402). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the music timer 303d has become 0, and if it is determined that it is not the reproduction end timing of the music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9402: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S9402, if it is determined that the end timing of the music data being reproduced has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9402: Yes), In the data group storage area 303a, a process for setting reproduction of music data subsequent to the music data whose reproduction has ended this time is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9403). If it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is ON (S9403: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to OFF (S9404), and the process proceeds to S9406. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is not ON (S9403: No), the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to 00H (S9405).

That is, normally, the value of the music timer 303d corresponding to the BGM is set in accordance with the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, and the BGM is also stopped at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbols stops. However, due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 cannot receive the stop command for indicating the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols output from the main control device 110, the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON. BGM is played back from the beginning. Thereby, when the variation of the special symbols is not stopped (when the command for indicating that the variation of the special symbols is stopped cannot be received), it is possible to suppress the problem that only the BGM is stopped first. can be done.

Next, in the process of S9406, it is determined whether or not the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9406). ).

In the process of S9406, if it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. and update (S9407), and the process proceeds to S9409. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9406 that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is changed to " 01H" (S9408), and the process proceeds to S9409. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b through the process of S9408, music can be reproduced in a predetermined order.

<Regarding another example of the second control example>
Next, another example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. This example differs from the above-described second control example in that the variable display device unit 80 used in the above-described first control example is provided instead of the third pattern display device 81 . The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this example is a combination of the configuration of the first control example and the configuration of the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 is varied according to the tempo of the set BGM, in contrast to the operation control of the inner reel 811 described in the first control example. . In this way, by varying the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 according to the tempo of the BGM to be played back, it is possible to perform realistic effects by the sound and the rotation state of the inner reel 811 . Specifically, the faster the tempo of the BGM, the faster the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 199, the contents of the audio setting process 3 (S2671) executed in this example will be described. This sound setting process 3 (S2671) is performed by the sound setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 178) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the second control example described above. The tempo (BPM) of the type is discriminated (S3751), and if it is discriminated that the tempo (BPM) of the determined BGM is 120 (S3751: Yes), high speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3753), and determination is made. When it is determined that the tempo (BPM) of the received BGM is not 120 (that is, it is 80) (S3751: No), the difference is that a low reel rotation speed is set (S3752). Since they are otherwise the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

With this configuration, drive control is performed so that the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 corresponds to the BGM determined using the BGM type selection table 222aa in order to suggest the player the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In this example, the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 is varied according to the set BGM. can be configured to

The timing at which the player grasps the tempo of the BGM to be executed this time and the timing at which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 to be executed this time are the same. It is good to configure to execute control. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 before the BGM is reproduced, and thus grasps the current lottery result.

Further, in this example, the rotational speed of the inner reel 811 is varied according to the tempo of the set BGM. Well, for example, depending on the type and tempo of BGM, the rotation of the inner reel 811 may be temporarily stopped, the rotation speed may be temporarily increased or decreased, or the rotation direction may be temporarily varied. can be By configuring in this way, it is possible to achieve an effect with a sense of unity with the set BGM by using not only the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 but also the rotation mode.

Furthermore, in this example, a configuration is used in which the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 of the variable display unit 80 used in the above-described first control example is varied in accordance with the tempo of the set BGM. In addition, for example, the variable display speed of the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the variable display speed of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to be variable.

Further, in this example, the variation speed (rotational speed of the inner reel 811) of the third symbol (symbols that are variably displayed to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol) is varied according to the tempo of the set BGM. However, by varying the variation speed of the third symbol, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to stop the predetermined stop symbol of the third symbol.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, for example, it is preferable to set the stop display mode of the third symbol based on information for varying the variation speed of the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to display the stop symbols corresponding to the set variation speed of the third symbols, so that the variation display can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Further, as another countermeasure, when a plurality of third symbols are stopped and the lottery result of the special symbols is displayed by combining the plurality of stopped and displayed third symbols, the timing of stopping each of the third symbols is determined. It may be configured so as to be determined corresponding to the set fluctuation speed of the third symbol. Further, the variation speed of the third pattern during the high speed variation is set to a low speed, and the variation of the third pattern is continued at the low speed variation speed for a predetermined period, thereby stopping the third pattern in a predetermined stop display mode. It may be configured as follows.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of display means (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display section 1600) capable of variably displaying identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is provided, The display areas (areas visible to the player) of the plurality of display means are arranged so as to overlap, and by switching the operation mode of each display means, various variable display modes can be set. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide various variable display modes to the player, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the first control example, display means (inner reel 811, outer reel 821) using a medium on which the third pattern is printed in advance and display means (7-segment display section 1600) using seven segments are used. However, any other configuration may be used as long as it is display means capable of displaying the third symbol to the player. The third pattern display device 81 may be used as one of the display means, or a specific display can be achieved by irradiating light from the side of a transparent acrylic plate having a stamp for indicating a specific display mode. A display means using a light guide plate for allowing the player to visually recognize the mode, or a display means using an organic EL may be used as one of the display means. Furthermore, as in the second control example described above, a plurality of image layers may be created for one liquid crystal display, and the image layer to be actually displayed may be switched.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, since the display means for executing the variable display of the third symbol is switched according to the set game state, the variable display mode being executed is grasped. This allows the player to easily grasp the currently set game state. In addition, without being limited to this, the variable display mode may be set so as to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set game state.

In the above-described first control example, a double reel structure in which reel-type display means are overlapped is used. , the reel (inner reel 811) provided inside the double reel structure forms an area (first area) where the player can see and an area (second area, third area) where the player cannot see, and the inner When executing variable display of the third symbol using the reel 811, the outer reel 821 is variably operated to the first area, and when executing variable display of the third symbol using the outer reel 821, It is configured to be executed using the second area and the third area of the outer reel 821 .

Thereby, it is possible to easily set a plurality of variable display modes using the double reel structure. Furthermore, in this control example, since it is configured to set the variable display mode of the third symbol using both reels of the double reel structure, more variable display modes can be set, resulting in a production effect. can increase

In this control example, in addition to the reel display by the above-described double reel structure, the 7-segment display using the segment display device 600 is also configured to inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols in more diverse display modes, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is varied according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the special symbol lottery result by stopping the reels, unlike the conventional gaming machine that displays the special symbol lottery result using the liquid crystal screen. It consists of In such a game machine, like a conventional game machine, information other than the lottery results of special symbols is displayed on a liquid crystal screen, for example, a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which the expectation of winning a jackpot increases as the sequence continues. Since there is no display area for informing the player of the information indicating the number of times that is executed, there is a problem that it is difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for the continuous effect. On the other hand, in this control example, by operating the displacement member 670 to vary the display area visible to the player, the player is notified of the process of the continuous effect (the number of times the continuous effect is executed). Configure. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 does not have a liquid crystal display device, the process of continuous performance can be easily recognized by the player.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the player is notified of the continuous production process by varying the display area of the reel display. It may be configured to notify. Specifically, depending on the number of times the continuous effect is executed, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) can be changed, and the sound effect during reel operation can be changed. may be configured.

Further, in this control example, when the above-described continuous effects are executed in the pachinko machine 10, the reel display area is gradually narrowed according to the number of times the continuous effects are executed. By configuring in this manner, the narrower the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the expectation of the big win, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. .

In addition, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines for displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) ), the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special symbols.

In this first control example, the time (fluctuation time) from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed is different according to the game state to be set. Specifically, in the gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the lottery of special symbols is likely to be executed, a short fluctuation time is likely to be set in order to increase the number of lotteries of special symbols executed per unit time. In a game state (normal state) in which the lottery of symbols is difficult to execute, a long variation time is easily set in order to reduce the period in which the lottery of special symbols is not performed (period in which the special symbols are not changed). are doing.

In this control example configured in this way, the speed at which the third symbol displayed in the display area is changed in a game state (normal state) in which a long variation time is likely to be set is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) reel display to execute 7-segment display at a high speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) to change the pattern displayed in the display area in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) where a short fluctuation time is likely to be set Configure. Thus, even when a plurality of display methods with different variable speeds of the third pattern are used, the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is surely stopped and displayed after the predetermined fluctuation time elapses. can be made

In this control example, during the dynamic display period (during the variable display period) in which the display symbols for showing the result of one lottery of the special symbols are dynamically displayed, it is as if the results of the lottery were displayed a plurality of times. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation production that looks like it.

In this pseudo-fluctuation effect, a re-fluctuation effect is executed a plurality of times during one dynamic display period, in which the displayed symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then the fluctuation is restarted. It is constructed so that the possibility of winning a big win increases as the number of times this re-variation performance is executed increases.

Here, if it is a pachinko machine 10 using a liquid crystal display device, for example, the number of times of re-fluctuation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect (pseudo consecutive times) is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect to the player. There is a problem that it is difficult to notify (the number of pseudo-runs) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is varied each time a re-variation effect is executed, thereby notifying the player of the number of re-variation effects that have been executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is configured to be varied so that the display area of the decorative pattern display device 800 becomes narrower each time the re-variation effect is executed, and each time the re-variation effect is executed , the number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the active lines to be watched by the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the process of stop-displaying the combination of the display symbols corresponding to the big win. .

In this control example, the period during which one special symbol variation is performed is used to perform the above-described pseudo-variation effect, that is, the effect of varying the effective symbol row in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured, as another configuration, it may be configured so as to execute an effect of varying the effective symbol sequence across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main control device 110, which will be described later with reference to FIG. It is preferable to determine the lottery result in advance, and to set the effect (continuous effect) so as to span a plurality of special symbol variations based on the result of the prior determination. By configuring in this way, it is possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol a plurality of times during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, so that the player is informed at what timing the special symbol is to be executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the continuous performance has been executed in response to the variable display of .

In addition, in this control example, a configuration is used in which a pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases. For example, a pseudo-variation effect may be executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, the possibility of winning the jackpot increases as the number of re-fluctuations increases (the set fluctuation time increases). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol during the pseudo fluctuation production is a predetermined number of times, the ready-to-win display is displayed, the possibility of winning the jackpot is increased. can be configured to As a result, during the period from the execution of the pseudo-fluctuation performance to the end of the performance, the player can always play the game while having a sense of anticipation for the big win.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display pattern printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) provided in the variable display device unit 80 are combined to form a new effective line. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display pattern is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a decorative movable accessory is positioned at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. may be configured. In addition, the display pattern may be stopped and displayed first, and then a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning LED 671) emits light. In this way, the display patterns that can be variably displayed and the elements other than the display patterns are combined so as to satisfy a predetermined condition to form a new effective line, so that the player can grasp the lottery result of the special patterns. When playing the game, not only the variable display mode of the display pattern but also the light emission mode of the light emitting means and the movement mode of the movable accessory for decoration are observed, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. can do.

In this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions is less than five times, the number of remaining time reductions is notified to the player using 7 segments. As a result, since it is possible to inform in advance the period until the game state advantageous to the player (time saving state more advantageous than the normal state) ends, the time saving state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. You can control what you give.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbols, first, the display symbols for showing the lottery result of the special symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110(a)), and then the number of times of remaining time reduction is displayed. It is configured so that Then, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special pattern is set so that the display pattern showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction number is not displayed in the 7 segments that display the remaining time reduction number. Configure.

By configuring in this way, the display pattern for showing the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the remaining time reduction number display showing the remaining time reduction number can be made different, so that the remaining time reduction for the player. The number of times can be reliably reported.

Furthermore, in this control example, after the display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped and displayed, if there is no need to display the remaining short time number display indicating the number of remaining short time times, that is, the special pattern jackpot is won. In this case, the display pattern is set regardless of the numerical value of the number of remaining time reductions displayed next, so that the display pattern mode for indicating the winning of the jackpot can be set without limitation. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display pattern to be stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the number of prize balls, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) given by the winning jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the middle 7 segment display unit 1600b is used to display the number of remaining time reductions. The number of remaining time reductions may be displayed using the segment display section 1600a or the right 7 segment display section 1600c. In this case, for example, when the left 7-segment display unit 1600a that is first stop-displayed is used to display the number of remaining time reductions, the game can be played while knowing in advance the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed next. By doing so, when the same numerical value as the number of times of short remaining time to be displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the left 7-segment display part 1600a, the lottery result of this time is a big hit. can be known in advance. In addition, the 7-segment display section 1600 that displays the number of remaining time reductions may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in this control example, it is configured to display the variable display of the special symbol and the number of times of remaining time reduction within one variable display period (including the symbol confirmation time). , It is configured to execute the remaining time reduction number display for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation time of the set special symbol. Therefore, for example, if the variable time of the set special symbol is 2 seconds, the variable display of the special symbol is performed for 1.5 seconds regardless of whether or not the display of the number of remaining time reductions is executed, and then 0.5 seconds. However, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether the remaining time reduction number display is executed or not, and if the remaining time reduction number display is not executed, 1 second In contrast to the execution of the special symbol variation, when the state is to execute the display of the number of times of remaining time reduction, the shortening variation of 0.5 seconds is executed as the special symbol variation, and then the number of times of remaining time reduction of 0.5 seconds is displayed. configured to run By configuring in this way, both the variable display of the special symbols and the display of the number of remaining time reductions can be performed within one variable display period of the special symbols.

In this control example, as described above, the variable display of special symbols and the display of the number of remaining time reductions are executed together within one variable display period of special symbols. You may comprise so that a remaining time reduction frequency display may be performed so that a special design variation may be straddled. In this case, for example, regardless of the set variation time, the special symbol variation display is performed for a certain period of time, and the remaining time, which is the difference between the period during which the variation display is performed and the set variation time, is shortened. It is good to set it as the time to display the number of times. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbols can be made constant, a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified. can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for executing the remaining time reduction number display is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the set variable time is a predetermined time (for example, 0 5 seconds), it is preferable to perform the display of the number of remaining time reductions across the period during which the next special symbol variation is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of remaining time reductions with certainty. However, in this case, since the variation of the special symbols is started while the remaining time reduction number display is being performed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that a new special symbol variation has started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol variation has started by blinking the area not used for the display of the number of remaining time reductions (in the example of FIG. 111(b), the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a). Or, by varying the luminescent color of the display mode of the remaining time reduction number display (the display mode imitating "4" in FIG. 111(b)), the player is notified that the special symbol variation has started. should be configured to As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a new special symbol variation has started while executing the remaining time reduction number display.

When executing the above-described processing, it is preferable to specifically provide the following configuration in the audio lamp control device 113 . First, a variation time extracting means for extracting a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbol variation from information included in a variation pattern command output from main controller 110, and variation of the third symbol within the variation time of special symbol variation. A setting means for setting a third symbol variation display time for executing display and a remaining time reduction number display time for executing remaining time reduction number display, a third symbol variation display time set by the setting means, and a variation time extraction means extract Calculating means for calculating the difference between the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) calculated by the calculation means, Lower limit determining means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculating means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and Lower limit determining means When it is determined that the time is equal to or less than the lower limit variation time, a continuation flag is set to ON to indicate that the display of the number of remaining time reductions will not end within the current variation pattern period.

This continuation flag is configured to be set to OFF at the timing when the display of the number of remaining time reductions ends. When a new variation pattern is set, a variation start display mode may be set to indicate that a new pattern variation is to be executed during the display of the number of remaining time reductions.

Furthermore, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for executing the display of the number of remaining time reductions, and even if the shortest time among the plurality of different times is set, the display of the number of remaining time reductions is the current fluctuation pattern period. The continuation flag may be set to ON when it is determined that the processing will not end within this time. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set, the third pattern variation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different between when the remaining time saving number of times display is executed and when not executed, and the remaining time saving state is set. When the number of times display is executed, it may be configured such that the shorter third symbol variation display time is likely to be set than when it is not executed.

In addition, in this control example, the period during which the special symbols are variably displayed (symbol variation period) and the period during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed (symbol determination period) are included in the special symbol variation time. However, without being limited to this, the special symbol symbol fluctuation period and the symbol fixed period may be divided and controlled. In this case, for example, if the remaining time short number display period is set in advance to be the same as the symbol determination period, and the third symbol fluctuation display time longer than the symbol fluctuation period is set, or the remaining time short number display period is set in advance to be longer than the pattern confirmation period, and if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number display cannot be performed during the pattern fluctuation period, it will not end within this fluctuation pattern period. continuation flag may be set to ON.

In this control example, when executing the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 (variable display by 7 segments), the pattern display mode for showing the third pattern is variably displayed. Without being limited to this, it is possible to variably display while changing the display mode (for example, the display mode in which only one segment is lit among the 7 segments) different from the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. can be configured to By configuring in this way, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third pattern, a specific third pattern is stopped and displayed by an afterimage of light. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a person is misunderstood.

In addition, as a variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, there is a high-speed variable display period during which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual pattern display modes that are variably displayed, and a high-speed variable display period in which the individual variably displayed pattern display modes are visually recognized by the player. A simple low-speed fluctuation display period is set, a display mode different from the third pattern is variably displayed during the high-speed fluctuation display period, and a pattern display mode showing the third pattern is variably displayed during the low-speed fluctuation display period. You can As a result, it is possible to suppress the sudden stop of the third symbol while suppressing the misrecognition that the third symbol is displayed stopped due to the afterimage of the light during the high-speed fluctuation. .

In the second control example described above, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the fluctuating sound (BGM) output during the variable display of the special symbols (during the variable display of the third symbols) is configured to be variable. It is configured such that the stop sound of the third symbol is variable in accordance with the tempo of the fluctuating sound (BGM) to be reproduced.

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third pattern corresponding to the BGM reproduced at different tempos, the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third pattern can be given a sense of unity, resulting in a production effect. can increase

In the second control example described above, even if the BGM is the same, the output tempo can be varied to make the player feel as if various BGM are being output, resulting in a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game. can be suppressed. Furthermore, by varying the tempo of the BGM, even if the same variation pattern is displayed (dynamic display), different variation patterns are executed according to the tempo of the BGM that is output accordingly. It can make you think, and you can feel various variations of special symbols.

Also, when the tempo of the BGM is changed and output, the stop sound is selected and output in accordance with the change in tempo, so that the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match can be suppressed. In addition, even when the tempo of BGM is flexibly changed by lottery or the like, the stop sound is set so as to match the reference tempo by converting the stop sound according to the change of the tempo and outputting it. If this is done, it can be easily configured to output a matching stop sound.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery ratio of the BGM tempo to be selected according to the lottery result is set to be variable. It can be expected early that the result is a hit.

In addition, in the above-described second control example, the above-described visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of production modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, but it is not limited to this. , it is sufficient to execute an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol to the player. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand that operates an operation handle) or an olfactory presentation mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It is also possible to suggest and inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. In this way, by performing one performance by appropriately combining a plurality of types of performance modes, it is possible to set various performance modes to be executed for showing the lottery result of special symbols.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. for example,
Once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times), including the pachinko machine (commonly known as double-rights and triple-rights). ) may be implemented. Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, arepachi, majang balls, slot machines,
It may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
When a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixed display is performed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of stopping is a specific one. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever,
For example, due to the operation of a stop button or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. is generated, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player on the lower receiving tray. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 500 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and formed to be displaceable, the guide member is a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to contact a game ball rolling on the guide surface; A game machine A1 characterized in that the game machine A1 is arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the guiding direction.

A game machine is known which has a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is formed to be displaceable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of feather members having a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, is disposed across the ball entrance, and is rotatably pivoted at the base end side. In this case, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 20
Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one blade member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other blade member. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions,
Even when game balls are guided (rolled) simultaneously on the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member, each game ball is moved in different directions (one side is the glass plate side and the other side is game board side) can be biased. Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance. However, the conventional technique described above has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. Also, a game ball entering from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass through from the other side of the guide member. There was a problem that interest was lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the guide member has a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the guide surface. Since the setting portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projecting portion. By doing so, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, the pair of protruding portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the game ball entering from one side of the guide member is protruded. can be brought into contact with the part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance and rotatably pivoted at the base end side, and the pair of feather members approach or separate at the tip end side. By rotating in the direction to allow the game ball to pass through, a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass or an open state through which the game ball can pass is formed. The projecting portion of one of the pair of feather members and the projecting portion of the other feather member are in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is arranged in different positions.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance and rotatably supported at the proximal end side, and a pair of protrusions. The protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface of each of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion of one wing member and the protruding portion of the other wing member of the pair of wing members extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces are brought into contact with the protruding portions, so that the game balls can be reliably moved. can be biased to resulting in,
A ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, the projecting portion of one feather member and the projecting portion of the other feather member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the feather member). When a game ball entering the guide surface of one wing member reaches the guide surface of the other wing member, the game ball is moved to the other wing member. It can be brought into contact with the projecting portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one feather member from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine A2, the projecting portion projects from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the protruding part protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member, so that it is guided by the guide surface. A rolling area can be secured before the game ball comes into contact with the protruding part. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball by that amount, so that the ball can enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In addition, since the protruding part protrudes from the protruding surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the feather member, the course of the game ball that is biased by contacting the protruding part is changed to the ball entrance. It is possible to suppress returning to the course before the deviation until reaching the front of (end of the guide surface). In other words, the game ball can be easily thrown from the guide surface to the ball entrance while being biased.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the feather member, and the game ball guided in the first region is not in contact. The projecting portion is formed with a size, and the first region of the guide surface of one blade member of the pair of blade members and the first region of the guide surface of the other blade member A game machine A4 characterized in that the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine A4, in the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first region that is continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing member, and the game ball guided in the first region is unaffected. Since the protruding portion is formed with a size that allows contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first region, the rolling speed of the game ball can be prevented from decreasing, You can smoothly enter the ball into the entrance.

In this case, the first area of the guide surface of one of the pair of feather members and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the first area of the guide surface of one feather member and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member, respectively However, the game balls can be biased in mutually different directions, and can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

Any one of the game machines A2 to A4, comprising a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, the base member comprising a restricting portion that contacts the wing member and restricts the rotation of the wing member, The game machine A5 is characterized in that the projecting portion of the feather member abuts against the regulating portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A5, any one of the game machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member comes into contact with the wing member to regulate the rotation of the wing member. Since the regulating portion is provided and the projecting portion of the wing member abuts against the regulating portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the projecting portion is a portion projecting from the wing member (guide surface), the portion of the wing member whose rigidity is relatively high can be used as a stopper for contacting the restricting portion of the base member. Damage to the feather member can be suppressed accordingly.

In the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion has a side surface that is substantially flush with the side surface of the base end of the feather member, and is substantially flush with the side surface of the base end of the feather member in the closed state. A gaming machine A6, wherein a side surface of the protruding portion to be formed is in contact with at least the restricting portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, the side surface of the projecting portion is formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the side surface of the base end side of the wing member Since the side surface of the protruding portion formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member abuts at least the restricting portion of the base member, the portion far from the rotation axis (side surface of the protruding portion) is the restricting portion of the base member. As long as it can be brought into contact with
The reaction force input from the restricting portion to the blade member can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the blade member can be suppressed. Further, for example, compared to the case where the protruding tip surface of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, the restricting portion of the base member can be separated from the ball entrance, and the flow to the ball entrance can be prevented. You can secure a space for the road. In addition to the side surface of the projecting portion, the proximal side surface of the feather member may also be brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member. In this case, the contact pressure can be reduced, and damage to the blade member can be further suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, an intervening wall positioned between the opposing projecting portions in the closed state is provided, and the pair of feather members are configured so that the projecting portion is not formed when viewed in the rotation shaft direction. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the facing interval of the guide surfaces in the area where the guide surface is positioned is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing interval of the projecting portion is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of feather members are arranged at a position where the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to pinch the game ball. In this case, when the protruding portion is protruded from the guide surface, the pair of feather members are further spaced apart by the protruding height of the protruding portion so that the game ball is not caught between the protruding portions. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, it is provided with an intervening wall positioned between the opposing protruding portions in the closed state, and the pair of feather members are connected to the rotating shaft. When viewed from the direction, the interval between the guide surfaces facing each other in the area where the projecting portion is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the interval between the projecting portions facing each other is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of feather members begin to close (even if the transition to the closed state starts) in a state where the game ball is guided (rolled) on the guide surface, the intervening wall will remain between the opposed projecting portions. By positioning, the game ball can be ejected from between the projecting portions facing each other, and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the projecting portions.
A game ball ejected from between the opposing projecting portions by the intervening wall is positioned between the opposing guide surfaces in the area where the projecting portion is not formed. , the game ball is not caught. As a result, the distance between the projecting portions facing each other can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of feather members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for arranging a conventional product that does not protrude from the guide surface.

In the game machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Because of this position, a game ball guided by the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and can be made to enter the ball entrance by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of feather members is arranged at the position forming the closed state and the other feather member is arranged at the position forming the closed state A gaming machine A9 characterized in that the timing to be played is different.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is arranged at the position where the wing member forms the closed state and the other wing member Since the timing to be arranged at the position forming the closed state is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to be caught between the pair of feather members (guide surfaces), so that the opposing interval between the pair of feather members can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of feather members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entrance, thereby making it impossible for a game ball to enter the ball entrance, and a posture in which the guide surface faces upward. The guide surface of the guide member is formed to be rotatable between an open position and an open position that allows a game ball that projects toward the front side of the ball entrance and rolls on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. The pair of projecting portions are formed to have a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entrance when viewed from the front. Also, the game machine A10 is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the game machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the game ball is retracted below the ball entrance to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance, and a posture in which the guide surface is an upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is slidably displaceable between an open position and an open position that allows game balls rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. The pair of protruding portions are formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry opening, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball entry opening in a front view. , a gaming machine A11 characterized in that they are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

According to the game machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface with a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance. formed,
The pair of protruding portions are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are positioned at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since it is arranged, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface into contact with the projecting portion, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In addition, one projecting portion and the other projecting portion are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, one side in the width direction (
or the other side) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the game ball is made to enter the ball entrance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Port Unit 500 as an Example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members arranged on both sides of the ball entrance, and driving means for applying a driving force to the pair of feather members to open or close them. Then, when the pair of feather members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged in the allowable position for permitting entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the driving force of the driving means causes the pair of feather members to a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for regulating entry of a game ball into the ball entrance when the wing members are closed, wherein the pair of wing members is closed or the pair of wing members is closed; A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the regulating means is formed so as to be able to be maintained at the regulating position in a state in which the wing members are released from the outside.

Here, a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members disposed on both sides of the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of feather members to open or close. a drive means for causing
When the pair of feather members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged at the allowable position for allowing the entry of the game ball into the entrance, and the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the driving means. and a regulation means arranged at a regulation position for regulating entry of a game ball into a ball entrance is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of feather members are released by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of feather members is inserted into the entrance. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is placed at the restricting position, so that when the pair of feather members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate what is entered.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted,
For example, after forcibly releasing the pair of feather members from the outside, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the permissible position. There was a problem that it was inadequate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the arrangement of the regulating means can be maintained at the regulating position when the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. Displacement of the means to the permissible position can be suppressed. Therefore, illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance can be easily regulated.

It should be noted that the restriction position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the entrance means that it is sufficient if the game ball is stopped at a predetermined position. That is, in the case of providing a ball entrance and a passage through which a game ball flowing in from the ball entrance passes, the regulating position (the position where the game ball is stopped) by the regulating means is positioned closer to the ball entrance than the ball entrance. It may be upstream or downstream of the ball entrance (that is, in the middle of the path flowing in from the ball entrance and passing through the passage). In the latter case, the regulating position by the regulating means may be upstream of the detecting means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage for detecting the passage of the game ball. It may be downstream of.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, and the transmission mechanism is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means. and the slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position by sliding displacement to the open slide position to open the pair of blade members, and is closed by sliding displacement to the closing slide position of the slide transmission member. a rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position to close the pair of blade members; the regulation means is disposed on the slide transmission member; When the means is placed at the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slidably displaced to the closed slide position, the regulating means is placed at the regulated position, and with the slide transmission member placed at the closed slide position, the When the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. Gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are arranged. Since the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated by the engagement of , it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the ball entrance.

That is, when the closed pair of feather members are illegally opened from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position. In this state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. It is possible to suppress illegal forced displacement to the position from the outside). As a result, even if the pair of feather members are forcibly released from the outside and the game ball is passed through between the pair of feather members, the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance is restricted by the restricting means. can.

In the game machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member has a sliding groove extending therefrom and a sliding projection projecting from the other, and the sliding projection slides along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member, and the slide projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby releasing the slide transmission member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to a sliding position is regulated.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member is extended with a sliding groove and the other is provided with a sliding projection, and the sliding projection slides. By sliding along the drive groove, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member. Since the sliding displacement of the member to the open slide position is restricted, it is possible to make it difficult to release the restriction while achieving a size reduction.

That is, means for restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position can be formed by utilizing the slide groove and the slide protrusion for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member to rotate it. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, it is possible to reduce the size accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access to the engaging portion from the outside can be made difficult.
The regulation (engagement) can be made difficult to be released.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, and the transmission mechanism is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means. and the slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position by sliding displacement to the open slide position to open the pair of blade members, and is closed by sliding displacement to the closing slide position of the slide transmission member. a rotation transmission member that can be rotated to a rotation position to at least close the pair of blade members, wherein the restricting means is disposed on the rotation transmission member, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position; When the regulating means is placed at the allowable position and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the regulating means is placed at the regulating position, and the slide transmission member is placed at the closed slide position and the rotation. In a state in which the transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member is engaged with the slide transmission member, thereby restricting rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, when the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member By being engaged, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that illegal entrance of the game ball into the entrance can be easily restricted.

That is, from a state in which the pair of blade members are closed, for example, the pair of blade members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotation transmission member is directly operated to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position. Even if an attempt is made to cause the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member to engage,
Since the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted, the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (that is, the restricting means can be prevented from being illegally forcedly displaced to the allowable position from the outside). As a result, the restricting means can restrict illegal entry of the game ball into the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine B4, a projecting portion projecting from one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member so as to be able to engage with the projection. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protrusion protrudes along the direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the projecting portion projecting from one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member and the other of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member are engaged with the projection portion. and the protrusion protrudes along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide transmission member. and disengagement thereof can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) with which the projection can come into contact, or a hole or recess (the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) into which the projection can be inserted. It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a recess formed in one of the members. That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the contact of the protrusion with the engagement portion. In this case, it is preferable that the engagement portion be a hole or a recess. Since the projection is inserted into the engaging portion, the space required for arranging the projection can be reduced, and the size can be reduced. This is because it can be shielded from the outside and can make it difficult to illegally access such a protrusion from the outside.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member includes an opening side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of feather members when rotated toward the open rotation position, and a contact portion that rotates toward the closed rotation position. A game machine B6 characterized by comprising a closing side abutting portion that abuts against and closes the pair of feather members when the game machine B6 is closed.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member includes an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of feather members when rotated toward the open rotation position. and a closing side abutting portion that abuts and closes the pair of blade members when rotated toward the closing rotation position, so that the pair of blade members can be prevented from being illegally forced open from the outside, Unauthorized access from the outside to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing-side abutment portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member tends to rotate toward the open rotation position.
In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of feather members from being illegally forcibly released from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside.

In game machine B4 or B5, biasing means for biasing the pair of blade members in the closing direction is provided, and the rotation transmission member contacts the pair of blade members when rotated toward the open rotation position. a game machine characterized by comprising an opening-side abutting portion for opening by pressing, wherein when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closing rotation position, the pair of feather members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means. B.
7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, it is provided with biasing means for biasing the pair of feather members in the closing direction, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position is provided with an opening-side abutting portion for contacting and opening the pair of blade members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of blade members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means, When the pair of blade members are illegally forcibly released from the outside, the pair of blade members do not come into contact with the rotation transmission member, and the external force due to such forced release can be avoided from acting on the rotation transmission member. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the pair of blade members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member.

As the biasing means, a spring (
a torsion spring or a coil spring), or a magnet that biases a pair of feather members in the closing direction by an attractive force.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulation position of the regulation means is located downstream of the detection means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by regulating a game ball at a position detectable by a detecting means.
.

According to the game machine B8, any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulation position of the regulation means is downstream of the detection means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detection means, for example, when the wing member is forcibly opened and the game ball illegally flows in from the ball entrance, the detection means detects the game ball. The state can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether or not the detection by the detection means has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have entered illegally.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Decorative Design Display Device 800 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotatably formed first reel and a rotatably formed second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel, the first reel is a cylindrical reel. and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall. The second reel is cylindrically shaped and has an outer surface a second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and projecting radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the second outer peripheral wall, the outer surface of which is the inner surface of the first side wall and a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to the other side. Machine C1.

Here, a rotatably formed first reel and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and rotatably formed are provided (that is, a double reel structure is employed). ) is known (for example, JP-A-2003-230693). Also known is a technique for removing and cleaning dust adhering to the display surface of the reel by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (for example, JP-A-2009-28241).

However, the double reel structure has the problem of being difficult to clean. Namely
In the double reel structure, a space for arranging the rotating brush described above cannot be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel). The outer peripheral surface of the reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel has a cylindrical first outer peripheral wall,
and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall. and a second side wall projecting radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the second outer peripheral wall and having an outer surface facing the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined interval. Since the erected portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other, the erected portion is provided between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. A wind pressure is generated by being displaced in the circumferential direction, and the wind pressure can be used to flow air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. As a result, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction.

Here, when at least one of the first side wall and the second side wall has an opening or is partially divided in the circumferential direction, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall may be separated from each other. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction escapes through the openings and the divided portions, weakening the wind pressure and correspondingly increasing the pressure between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. It becomes difficult to move the air between them.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction. , the wind pressure generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall are separated from each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall. The air between the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is rotatably pivoted at its center and includes a first support wall that supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably pivoted at its center. A gaming machine C3 comprising a second supporting wall that supports and supports the second side wall, wherein an opening is formed in at least one of the first supporting wall and the second supporting wall.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the supporting wall that supports the first side wall or the second supporting wall that supports the second side wall. Through the opening, the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or the air is introduced from the outside to between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. can inhale. That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be made to flow (outflow or inflow) more easily. As a result, the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall are separated from each other by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall. The air between the outer surface can be easily made to flow.

In the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel A gaming machine C4 characterized in that at least the opening is formed in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or the second reel Since the opening is formed at least in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, the effect of reducing the flow resistance by exhausting or sucking air through the opening can be easily exhibited. . That is, when one of the first reel and the second reel on which the erected portion is erected is rotated, the other reel on which the opening is formed is stopped, so that the air flow through the opening is stopped. flow(
exhaust or intake) resistance can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the standing portions are erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction. C5
.

In the game machine C5, in any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the inner surface of the first side wall and the second
Since the standing portions are erected on the outer surface of the side wall at different positions in the radial direction, the inner surface of the first side wall and the inner surface of the first side wall are aligned with the second reel regardless of whether the first reel or the second reel is rotated. Wind pressure can be generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the outer surfaces of the two side walls. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall in the performance caused by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have a light transmissive property, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being arranged along the circumferential direction and having the erected portion erected on the second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have light transmittance, and the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel is formed. Since a plurality of symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel through the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel that rotates more times than the first reel. , the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased in the performance by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted, and a transparent member that transmits light emitted from the light-emitting means, the transparent member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light-emitting means are connected to the transparent member. A gaming machine D1, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the gaming machine arranged along the curve.

Here, a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, and the transmitting member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are formed by bending the transmitting member. A game machine arranged along is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at regular intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, in the game machine described above, since the distance between adjacent light emitting means is narrow in some of the plurality of light emitting means, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. As a result, heat tends to concentrate on a part of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means can be made constant, and the heat emitted by the light emitting means can be distributed. can be equalized. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on a part of the light emitting means, and to extend the life of each light emitting means.

The game machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of division surfaces that are divided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. , the game machine D2, wherein the division widths of the transparent members of the plurality of division surfaces are set to be substantially the same when viewed from the front.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the transmissive member, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals when the transmissive member is viewed from the front. The Rukoto. That is, when the transmissive member is viewed from the front, an area where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and an area where the distance between the light emitting means is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, it has a reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means. Since a plurality of demarcation planes are provided, and the demarcation widths of the plurality of demarcation planes in the front view of the transparent member are set to be substantially the same, the light amount of each demarcation plane visually recognized in the front view of the transmission member is approximately can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Since diffusibility can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section plane.

In addition, the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the light-emitting surface having a rectangular shape in front view means that the shape of the encapsulating resin (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

In the game machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged such that one side of the light emitting surface is arranged along a tangential direction of the curved shape of the transmission member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is oriented along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transmissive member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the partition surface is formed as a curved surface facing the rear surface of the transparent member and recessed on the side away from the rear surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is arranged to face the transparent member. The game machine D5 is characterized in that it faces the space between the member and the division surface.

According to the game machine D5, in any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the partition surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the rear surface of the transparent member and is recessed on the side away from the rear surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means faces the space between the transmissive member and the partition plane, the substrate can be arranged in a posture orthogonal to the transmissive member. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit composed of the transmissive member, the substrate and the reflective member. In this case, since the demarcation plane is arranged in such a manner as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means in a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the demarcation plane is directed to the back surface of the transmissive member. The light can be incident uniformly. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a connecting surface that is connected to the partition surface and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the connecting surface projects toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface that becomes

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a continuous surface that is connected to the partition surface and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. Since it is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface of , the light reflected by the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the rear surface of the transmissive member. As a result, it is possible to uniformize the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmissive member and visually recognized.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
a plurality of rotatably formed drums arranged side by side at predetermined intervals; and a decorative member disposed along between the plurality of drums and at least a portion of which is light-transmitting. a substrate disposed on the rear side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, wherein the substrate is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means are mounted being substantially orthogonal to the rear surface of the decorative member; The game machine E1 is provided with a reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a plurality of rotating drums are formed rotatably and are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals; A decorative member and a substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted are provided on the back side of the decorative member, and the substrate is arranged so that the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. A game machine provided with a game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this game machine,
Not only can the space between the spinning drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern is formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light-emitting means transmitted through the decorative member, and the pattern of the decorative member is It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the pattern integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the board is arranged so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently transmitted to the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member is provided, the posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member is adopted. Even in the case where the substrate is provided, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the decorative member with the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that the decorative member and the reel can be united.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum, and is formed by extending an outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum in a front view. Characterized game machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is positioned closer to the front than the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum, and the outer edge extends to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum in a front view. Since it is formed to protrude, the axial end surface of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized). In addition, since the design of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum can be brought closer, the decorative member and the spinning drum can be brought closer together. You can easily create a feeling.

In the game machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the region of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the design of the decorative member are aligned. A gaming machine E3, wherein the rear surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the spinning drum as it goes from the decorative member toward the substrate.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby reducing the area of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted. and the area where the pattern is formed in the decorative member, and the back surface of the reflective member,
Since the decorative member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the drum as it goes toward the substrate, the back surface of the decorative member can maintain the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means. can be brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary drum, and the rotary drum can be inserted deep into the back surface of the decorative member (the rotary drum can be brought close to the substrate). As a result, the axial end face of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the spinning drum can be easily formed.

A gaming machine E4 in which the light emitting means are mounted on both one side and the other side of the board in the gaming machine E2 or E3.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, since the light emitting means are mounted on both one side and the other side of the board, the light emission mounted on one side is Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member by the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of substrates arranged between the drums arranged side by side can be reduced to one. Therefore, the space required for arranging the substrate can be reduced, so that the spinning drum can be inserted into the rear side of the back surface of the decorative member (bringing the spinning drum closer to the substrate). As a result, the axial end face of the spinning drum can be easily shielded from the player (difficult to be visually recognized), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the spinning drum can be easily formed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member which are arranged oppositely and displaceable in directions of approaching or separating, respectively, and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. , the base member, and the first displacement member and the second
A first support mechanism and a second support mechanism are provided for displacing each of the displacement members, wherein the support mode of the first support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and the first displacement member The second displacement member that is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposing side of
A game machine F1 characterized in that the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the displacement member.

Here, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged to face each other and are formed so as to be displaceable in directions of approaching or separating, respectively, and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other.
A game machine with a displacement member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106844)
. According to such a game machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the opposing sides abut against each other, an object (for example, , a liquid crystal display device and a production member), and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be viewed. You can perform a production to do. Further, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, the shielding of the target is maintained. , it is also possible to perform an effect before the shielding is released (an effect to focus on the action of releasing the shielding).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed in the If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the presentation effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, it comprises a base member, and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member, respectively,
The support mode of the first support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that abuts against one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing sides of the second displacement member, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first The support mode of the support mechanism and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to mutually opposite sides (sides rotated 180° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the support state is biased to one side, for example, one side and the other side have different rigidity of the constituent members (the dimensions of the constituent members, the number of arranged members, the material, etc.), and the one side and the other side have different rigidity. The driving force transmitted between the two sides (e.g., magnitude, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, and the state of connection between components on one side and the other (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the number of connecting parts, etc.) The amount of slamming, etc.) is different, and the easiness of displacement to the other side between one side and the other (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity,
Examples include those with different displacements (such as resistance during sliding and rotation), and combinations of these.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism align their own higher rigidity side (lower side) with the opponent's lower rigidity side (higher side). ). Therefore, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (advances) the other on the high-rigidity side, On the side with low rigidity, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes first driving means for generating driving force, a pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and the pair of first connecting members. The first driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to each other and has a different configuration from each other
The second support mechanism includes a one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member, and the second support mechanism includes second driving means for generating driving force and a pair of second couplings for coupling the second displacement member to the base member. a member;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member that transmit the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively, and have different configurations. F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member. , a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member that transmit the driving force of the first driving means to the pair of first connecting members, respectively, and have different structures, the second support mechanism is a second driving means for generating a driving force; a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member; Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member having different configurations are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be formed between the opposing sides. It can be suppressed from being formed.

That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism each have, for example, a large driving force side and a driving force transmission timing. A state can be formed in which the forward side pushes the opponent (advance), and the side where the driving force is smaller or the driving force transmission timing is later receives the opponent (retreats). resulting in,
The opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as a mode in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are configured differently from each other, for example, the rigidity of the constituent members (configuration Examples include those with different member dimensions, number of arrangements, materials, etc.), those with different connection states between constituent members (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the amount of looseness at the connecting parts, etc.), and those with a combination of these. be done. That is, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different due to the difference in configuration, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the game machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is the base member. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being coaxially and rotatably supported on the same axis.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are connected to the member and the other end side is coaxially rotatably supported by the base member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are caused to reciprocate in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. In fact, even when the bias of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

In the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on opposite sides. a gaming machine F4, wherein the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when the two are in contact with each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state. When the second displacement member is caused to reciprocate in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the bias of the support mode is used.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first supporting mechanism includes a first supporting mechanism that generates a driving force.
a pair of first connecting members driven by the first driving means and connecting the first displacement member to the base member; The second support mechanism includes a first biasing member and a first biasing member. A pair of second connecting members for connecting members to the base member, and a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member for applying different biasing forces to the pair of second connecting members. A game machine F5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the first driving means driven by the first driving means.
a pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member for applying different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, second
The support mechanism includes second driving means for generating a driving force, a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of second connecting members. Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the members are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between them.

That is, in a state in which the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (moves forward) the other on the side where the biasing force is large, for example. ), the side with a smaller biasing force can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration.
That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be different by different positions at which the biasing forces are applied or by different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first supporting mechanism includes a first supporting mechanism that generates a driving force.
a driving means, a pair of first connecting members driven by the first driving means and connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and applying a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. The second support mechanism includes a second driving means for generating a driving force, and the second supporting mechanism is driven by the second driving means and connects the second displacement member to the base member. A game machine F6 comprising a pair of second connecting members and a second biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes the first driving means for generating the driving force, and the first driving means driven by the first driving means.
The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and attached to one of the pair of second connecting members. Since the second biasing member that applies a force is provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism, for example, pushes the other on the side to which the biasing force is applied ( advance), and the side on which the biasing force is not applied can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In the game machine F3 or F4, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is connected to the second
A first torsion spring is provided for applying a biasing force in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. At least one of a connecting position between one leg of the torsion spring and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion. Game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member.
Since the first torsion spring is provided to apply an urging force in a direction to bring the displacement member closer to the second displacement member, when displacing the first displacement member in a direction to approach the second displacement member, the first connecting member can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the resting state to the abutment position where the first displacement member is in contact with the second displacement member from the retracted position away from the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. can.

In this case, as the first connecting member rotates in the direction in which the first displacement member approaches the second displacement member, the connecting position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the position of the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied increases, and the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction to make it move. Therefore, for example, when stopping the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. Further, the first displacement member and the second
When reciprocatingly displacing the displacement member in the same direction, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be increased, and the performance effect can be improved.

In the game machine F7, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the direction in which the second displacement member approaches the first displacement member one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. and the second connecting member or at least one of the connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the game machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the game machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Become. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (positioned in the direction of gravity), and the contact position between the two is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the distance between the two is the highest (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity. The configuration of the game machine F8 is particularly effective when the position (retreat position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

A game machine F9 characterized in that, in the game machine F7, the first displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity so as to approach the second displacement member.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F7, the first displacement member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity to bring it closer to the second displacement member, so that the first displacement member moves downward in the direction of gravity. The biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction can be increased as the position of the first displacement member increases (that is, the higher the position of the first displacement member in the gravitational direction, the greater the biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction. can weaken the urging force).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the first displacement member upward in the gravitational direction from a stopped state, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and the raised first displacement member is stopped. In some cases, the displacement can be reliably stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the urging force. As a result, damage due to collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed.
On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened so that the biasing force is made to oppose the action of gravity that attempts to continue the descent. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reliably stop the first displacement member.

In the game machine F9, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the direction in which the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member The second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by upward displacement in the direction of gravity, and the second displacement member is moved by the first displacement member As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching the second
At least one of a connecting position between one leg of the torsion spring and the second connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion. Game machine F10.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F9, one leg formed as a torsion spring is connected to the second connecting member, the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is moved to the second position. a second torsion spring that applies a biasing force in a direction to move away from the first displacement member;
Since the displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, when the second displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the first displacement member, that is, the second displacement member is moved in the direction of gravity. The driving force of the second driving means required to rotate the first connecting member when it is necessary to displace (raise) against the force can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring.
Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, the connecting position of one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the position of the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connection positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the distance from the winding portion to the force acting position. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction of increasing the weight (the direction of lifting upward in the direction of gravity). Therefore,
For example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

<Characteristic group G> (Independent drum in front of the drum)
Judgment means capable of executing judgment, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and when the identification information for showing the specific judgment result is displayed on the display means and privilege granting means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player, wherein the identification information is composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols, and the gaming machine includes: A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising: dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing a row; and switching means for switching operation contents dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (designs) for indicating the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for indicating the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A game machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of executing a variable display by rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675 publication). The above-described gaming machine notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating the medium on which the actual patterns are printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since the variable display can only be executed in a predetermined display mode (display mode in which only the printed patterns are displayed), the variation of the effect display becomes poor, so that the player can not enjoy the game. There was a problem of getting bored early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of the game by diversifying the variations of the variable display in the above-described gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the switching means can switch the operation content of dynamically displacing the symbol row, the effect by the dynamic displacement of the symbol row can be switched variously, and the player can quickly get bored with the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that is caused.

In the gaming machine G1, the identification information consists of a first symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and a second symbol row that can be arranged on the front side or the back side of the first symbol row. The dynamic displacement means dynamically displaces the first symbol row and the second symbol row in different directions, and the switching means comprises: The game machine G2 is characterized in that the operation contents are switched by switching the visual recognition state between the first symbol row and the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the switching means can switch the viewing state, so that the player can switch between the first symbol row and the second symbol row and visually recognize them. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by showing the dynamic displacement that displaces in different directions.

In the gaming machine G1, the first symbol row is arranged on the rear side of the second symbol row, and the second symbol row has a transparent portion that allows the first symbol row to be visually recognized. The game machine G3 is characterized in that the switching means changes the action content visible to the player by changing the position of the second symbol row.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, by changing the position of the visible transparent part, the visible state of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be changed, and various displays can be obtained. has the effect of being able to

In either gaming machine G2 or G3, a plurality of the first symbol rows are arranged, and the determination result is notified by a combination of symbols of each symbol row when the plurality of symbol rows are stopped. The second symbol row is composed of one symbol row, and the determination result is notified by one symbol when the symbol row is stopped. A gaming machine G4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, since the number of symbol rows is different between the first symbol row and the second symbol row, the player is provided with different notification modes of determination results. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Drums at normal time, 7 segments at time saving)
determination means capable of executing determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means, and dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the identification information displayed on the display means; a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, wherein a plurality of different game states are displayed. A settable game state setting means, and a dynamic displacement mode determination means for determining a mode of dynamic displacement by the dynamic displacement means corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means. The identification information is composed of a plurality of different symbols, and indicates the determination result by combining the plurality of different symbols. When one game state is set, the plurality of different symbols are displaced in a predetermined order to be dynamically displaced, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it can be dynamically displaced by displacing one symbol among the plurality of different symbols to any other symbol.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (designs) for indicating the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for indicating the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A game machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of executing a variable display by rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675 publication). The above-described gaming machine notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating the medium on which the actual patterns are printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since the variable display can only be executed according to the order of the printed symbols, the player can easily predict the game result (identification information (symbols) to be stopped and displayed). There is a problem that the player gets bored with the game early. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the game machine H1, since the contents of symbol displacement differ depending on the game state, it is possible to switch between the case where the type of symbol to be displaced next can be predicted and the presentation in which the prediction is difficult. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine H1, the identification information is composed of a symbol row in which the plurality of different symbols are arranged and a display symbol in which a part of the plurality of different symbols is illuminated. The displacement means dynamically displaces the symbol row in the first game state, and dynamically displaces the display symbols by lighting control in the second game state. Game machine H2 to play.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the symbol row is dynamically displaced in the first game state, and the displayed symbols are dynamically displaced by lighting control in the second game state. In the second game state, dynamic displacement can be performed in a short time, and there is an effect that it is possible to perform a short-time performance.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the dynamic displacement mode determination means determines that the dynamic period is longer when the first game state is set than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being configured to facilitate determination of a dynamic displacement mode.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, a dynamic period longer than the second period is likely to be determined in the first gaming state. There is an effect that the dynamic displacement of the symbols can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic group I> (variable size of display area)
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance, a performance means having a performance execution area in which the performance is executed by the performance execution means, and a benefit that is advantageous to a player when the specified performance is executed are provided. A game machine having privilege giving means, comprising: variable means for varying the effect execution area; and variable control means for varying the effect execution area by the variable means in accordance with the effect to be executed. A gaming machine I1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in order to execute an effect display for indicating the jackpot lottery result on the game board, a medium on which identification information (design) for indicating the jackpot lottery result is printed ( For example, there has been proposed a game machine equipped with a display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of executing a variable display by rotating a reel or a belt (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-144675 Gazette). The game machine described above was able to make the player interested in the variable display. There is a problem in that it is more difficult to change the effect mode of the variable display than in the conventional game machine used, and the amusement of the game cannot be improved. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the game machine I1, since the performance execution area is varied corresponding to the performance to be executed, the performance being executed can be discriminated also by the performance execution region, and the performance being executed is made easy to understand. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine I1 has an effect period determining means for determining an effect execution period to be executed by the effect executing means, and the effect executing means has a plurality of consecutive effects within the effect executing period determined by the effect period determining means. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a continuous effect in which an effect is executed, and the variable control means changes the effect execution area according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, since the performance execution area is varied corresponding to the number of times of execution of the continuous performance, it is possible to identify the number of times of execution of the continuous performance by the performance execution region. Thus, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be played.

The game machine I1 or I2 has determination means capable of executing determination, and the effect execution means dynamically displays a combination of a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged, and then stops and displays them, The result of determination by the determining means can be indicated by a combination of symbol rows stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the activated line corresponds to the effect execution area being varied by the varying means. A game machine I3 characterized by being set by increasing or decreasing by

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the number of effective lines increases or decreases in accordance with the performance executed by the performance executing means, so that the player can expect various wins. There is an effect that it can be held and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature J Group> (Direction to create an effective line)
Judgment means capable of executing judgment, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and a case where the identification information for showing the specific judgment result is displayed on the display means and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, wherein the identification information is configured to be able to indicate the determination result by combining a plurality of symbols, and Dynamic display means capable of statically displaying the plurality of symbols on a predetermined effective line after dynamically displaying the plurality of symbols in combination for indicating the determination result, and when a specific condition is established. and a valid line setting means capable of setting a specific valid line different from the above-mentioned valid line in the case of the game machine J1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of printed identification information (symbols) for indicating the jackpot lottery result is printed on the game board surface in order to execute an effect display for indicating the jackpot lottery result. Equipped with a display device (e.g., reel type display device, belt type display device) capable of performing variable display by rotating a medium (e.g., reel or belt), and a plurality of pieces of identification information displayed stopped at a specific display position ( A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the player of the result of the lottery of the big win by combining the symbols (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). In the above-described gaming machine, since the specific display position where the identification information (symbol) is displayed stop-displayed to indicate the lottery result of the jackpot is fixed, the result of the game (the identification information (stop-displayed)) is given to the player. There is a problem that the pattern )) is easily predicted, and the player gets bored with the game early. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine with improved interest in games.

According to the gaming machine J1, when the specific condition is established, the specific activated line different from the predetermined activated line is set by the activated line setting means, so that the predetermined determined activated line has a specific determination result. In addition to the fact that the symbol for indicating is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition will be satisfied, which has the effect of improving the amusement of the game.

The game machine J1 has a pattern display means capable of displaying patterns in addition to the plurality of patterns, and the activated line setting means is configured to display the pattern display means and some of the plurality of patterns. are combined to form a specific combination, the game machine J2 is characterized in that a specific effective line is set as the establishment of the specific condition.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means satisfies a specific condition. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine J2, the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are configured such that dynamic display is started when a specific symbol among the plurality of symbols is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine J3 characterized by:

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, the dynamic display is started when the specific symbols are stopped and displayed, so that the expectation of the stop display of the specific symbols improves the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine J3, the symbol display means is configured to dynamically display the symbols by switching between a lighting state and a non-lighting state.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are dynamically displayed by switching between the lit state and the extinguished state. There is an effect that it is possible to make a target display.

<Characteristics K group> (7-segment display shows the number of times of time reduction)
Judgment means capable of executing judgment, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and a case where the identification information for showing the specific judgment result is displayed on the display means and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player, in a game machine capable of setting a specific game state in which determination by the determination means is likely to be executed during a period until a specific condition is established. and a notification means for notifying the player of information corresponding to the remaining period until the specific condition is satisfied, using at least part of the identification information. Game machine K1 to play.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a display means (7-segment display means) that performs lighting control and extinguishing control for seven segments in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A game machine having a display device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-11180). In addition, in a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display, a function that enables the setting of a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state) for a predetermined period of time, and displays the remaining period during which the time-saving state can be set on the liquid crystal display. (For example, a game machine having a short remaining time display function) has also been proposed. By the way, the game machine equipped with the above-described 7-segment display device can only inform the player of information using the seven segments. Since the amount of information that can be notified is reduced, there is a problem that it is difficult to notify the player of, for example, the number of times the remaining time can be shortened. Moreover, if a dedicated display means for displaying the number of remaining time reductions is provided, there is a problem that the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine increases. To provide an easy-to-understand game for a player by using a 7-segment display device that executes an effect display for showing the lottery result of a big win in the above-described gaming machine so that the number of times of remaining short time can be notified. and

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine K1, the display means has a 7-segment display section, and the identification information is composed of a pattern displayed by the 7-segment display section.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, after dynamic display of the identification information, dynamic display means for stop-displaying in a manner for indicating the determination result, and a period during which the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information. and a dynamic display period determining means for determining a.

Regulation for setting a regulation period for regulating the dynamic display of the identification information after the identification information is stopped and displayed until the next dynamic display of the identification information is started in the gaming machine K3. A gaming machine K4 characterized by comprising a period setting means.

In the game machine K3, after temporary stop display is performed in the mode for indicating the determination result by the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the mode for indicating the determination result is changed to the A game machine K5 characterized in that the display is switched to a mode showing information.

<Characteristic group L> The number of effective lines is varied by rotation of the shutter. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, the identification information is a combination of a plurality of symbols. The determination result can be displayed, and after the plurality of symbols are dynamically displayed, the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in combination for indicating the determination result. A gaming machine L1 characterized by having dynamic display means capable of

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (designs) for indicating the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for indicating the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A game machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel-type display device, a belt-type display device) capable of executing a variable display by rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675 publication). The above-described gaming machine notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result by operating the medium on which the actual patterns are printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since the variable display can only be executed in a predetermined display mode (display mode in which only the printed patterns are displayed), the variation of the effect display becomes poor, so that the player can not enjoy the game. There was a problem of getting bored early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of the game by diversifying the variations of the variable display in the above-described gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine L1, after dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols, a plurality of symbols can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined activated line in a combination for indicating the determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to have the player hold it and that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 has a variable member capable of varying the size of the display area of the display means, and by varying the size of the display area by varying the variable member, the effective A gaming machine L2 characterized in that lines are increased or decreased.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the variable member is varied to increase or decrease the effective line. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic group M> (The BGM (stop sound) when the pattern stops is set to a clear BGM (stop sound))
A gaming machine comprising: determination means capable of executing a determination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. means, at least audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means and setting means, wherein the sound type setting means sets the sound type according to the stop timing of the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that it

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to execute an effect display for showing the lottery result of a big win, and responds to the effect display. There was a thing that played back the sound that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize the reproduced sound (timing to beat) are different. I had a problem with it. Thus, when the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound differ, it becomes difficult to clearly notify the player of the timing to pay attention to in the effect to be executed. There is a problem that the production (display of production) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine M1, the type of sound can be set according to the stop timing of the identification information, so that the sound can be output in accordance with the stop timing of the identification information, and the player can be provided with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. There is an effect that it can be set.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display means can dynamically display a plurality of symbol strings formed from a plurality of pieces of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means can display the plurality of symbol strings differently. A dynamic display mode for stop display is set at a timing, and the sound type setting means sets the same sound type at each timing for stop display of the plurality of symbol rows. Gaming machine M2.

According to the game machine M2, the same type of sound can be output in accordance with a plurality of stop timings set by the dynamic display mode setting means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a performance with a bodily sensation.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the sound output means can output a second sound different from the sound set by the sound type setting means, and the sound set by the sound type setting means can be output. , output timing determining means for determining the timing at which the second sound is output, and correction means for correcting the output mode of the second sound based on the determination result of the output timing determining means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by:

According to the game machine M3, the output mode of the second sound can be corrected based on the determination result of the output timing of the second sound and the sound output based on the stop timing of the identification information. There is an effect that the sound output based on the stop timing of the can be output with priority over other sounds.

In the gaming machine M3, the correction means prevents the second sound from being output when the output timing of the sound overlaps with the output timing of the second sound by the output timing determination means. A gaming machine M4 characterized by being prohibited.

According to the gaming machine M4, when the sound output in accordance with the stop timing of the identification information overlaps with another sound, the output of the other sound is prohibited. There is an effect that the player can easily hear the voice that is played.

When the game machine M4 has volume adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output by the sound output means or the second sound, and the output of the second sound is prohibited by the correction means: is a gaming machine M5 characterized in that the volume of said second sound is adjusted to mute by volume adjusting means.

According to the game machine M5, it is possible to give priority to the player to hear the first sound only by adjusting the volume corresponding to the second sound, so that the processing of the correction means can be simplified. be.

The game machine M6 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the second sound is a piece of music that is continuously output during at least a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M3 to M5, since the music is output as the second sound during the dynamic display period of the identification information, it is possible to enhance the performance effect. There is

In the game machine M6, the output timing determination means determines the timing of outputting the voice and the timing of the beat of the music.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M6, the timing of outputting the sound and the timing of the beat of the music are discriminated by the output timing discriminating means. There is an effect that it is possible to discriminate effectively, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In any one of the game machines M1 to M7, the sound type setting means sets the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means when the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that the type of the sound output at a timing different from the stop timing of the identification information included in the game machine M8 is set.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, when the judgment result of the judging means is a predetermined judgment result, the output timing of the sound is intentionally changed from the stop timing of the identification information. Since it is possible to shift, it is possible to notify a game result advantageous to the player with an unnatural effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

<Feature N Group> (BGM with different tempo changes drum scroll speed)
A gaming machine comprising: determination means capable of executing a determination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. means, at least audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means setting means; and audio type determination means for determining the audio type set by the audio type setting means, wherein the dynamic display mode setting means is based on the determination result of the audio type determination means. , a game machine N1 characterized in that the dynamic display mode of the identification information is set differently.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to execute an effect display for showing the lottery result of a big win, and responds to the effect display. There was a thing that played back the sound that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize the reproduced sound (timing to beat) are different. I had a problem with it. Thus, when the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound differ, it becomes difficult to clearly notify the player of the timing to pay attention to in the effect to be executed. There is a problem that the production (display of production) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, the dynamic display mode can be changed based on the determination result of the sound type determination means, so that the dynamic display mode is set so as not to make the sound output by the sound output means uncomfortable. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine N1, the sound type setting means can set at least a first sound type and a second sound type having a faster tempo than the first sound type as the sound types, and The dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the identification information differently according to the tempo of the sound type set by the sound type setting means. .

According to the gaming machine N2, since the dynamic display speed can be varied in accordance with the tempo of the sound output from the sound output means, a sense of unity can be achieved between the output sound and the set dynamic display mode. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine N1 or N2, the game machine N3 is characterized in that the sound type setting means sets the sound type based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine N3, it is possible to make the player predict the judgment result of the judging means according to the type of sound to be output, so that the player can be interested in the form of the sound to be output. effective. Furthermore, since the dynamic display mode is set according to the sound type set based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the determination result of the determination means can be easily predicted.

In any one of game machines N1 to N3, stop display mode setting means for setting a stop display mode of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is provided, and the dynamic display mode setting means determines the sound type. a first dynamic display mode set based on the determination result of the means; and a second dynamic display for statically displaying the identification information dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode in the static display mode. A gaming machine N4 characterized by setting at least a mode and a mode.

According to the game machine N4, even if a dynamic display mode is set according to the set sound type, the identification information can be reliably stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means. , the determination result of the determining means can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine N4, the dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the second dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display speed set as the first dynamic display mode. A gaming machine N5 characterized by:

According to the game machine N5, even if the dynamic display speed is set according to the set sound type, the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means. There is an effect that the determination result of the means can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic group O> (Derivation of control that makes the BGM (stop sound) at the time of symbol stop a sharp BGM (stop sound))
A gaming machine comprising: determination means capable of executing a determination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. means, at least audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means and setting means, wherein the sound type setting means sets the sound type according to information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. A gaming machine O1 characterized by:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to execute an effect display for showing the lottery result of a big win, and responds to the effect display. There was a thing that played back the sound that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize the reproduced sound (timing to beat) are different. I had a problem with it. Thus, when the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound differ, it becomes difficult to clearly notify the player of the timing to pay attention to in the effect to be executed. There is a problem that the production (display of production) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine O1, since the type of sound can be set according to the set dynamic display mode, it is possible to output the sound in accordance with the dynamic display mode, thereby providing an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity. has the effect of being able to set

<Feature P Group> (Matching the BGM when the symbols are stopped by making the tempo of the song the same, setting the stop sound according to the tempo of the song and the timing when the symbols are stopped)
A gaming machine comprising: determination means capable of executing a determination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display mode setting for setting the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. means, at least audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means setting means; audio type determination means for determining the audio type set by the audio type setting means; and timing when the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means satisfies a predetermined display condition. and specific sound setting means for setting the specific sound to be output by the sound output means based on the result of determination by the timing determination means and the result of determination by the sound type determination means. A gaming machine P1 characterized by:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine uses a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the game board to execute an effect display for showing the lottery result of a big win, and responds to the effect display. There was a thing that played back the sound that was played. Furthermore, a game machine has been proposed that allows the player to set the desired sound by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display part of the identification information to indicate the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize the reproduced sound (timing to beat) are different. I had a problem with it. Thus, when the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound differ, it becomes difficult to clearly notify the player of the timing to pay attention to in the effect to be executed. There is a problem that the production (display of production) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine P1, the specific sound can be set based on the determination result of the timing determination means and the determination result of the sound type determination means. It is possible to set a specific sound corresponding to any of them, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display means can dynamically display a plurality of symbol rows formed from a plurality of pieces of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means can display the plurality of symbol rows differently. A game characterized in that a dynamic display mode for stopping and displaying at timing is set, and the timing determination means determines the timing at which the pattern row stops as the timing at which the predetermined display condition is satisfied. Machine P2.

According to the game machine P2, since the specific sound can be set in accordance with the timing at which each pattern row stops, the specific sound suitable for the dynamic display mode to be executed can be set, and the production effect is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine P2, the sound type setting means sets any one sound type from a plurality of sound types in which the beat timing of the output sound is different, and the sound type discrimination means A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it determines the beat timing of the sound type set by the sound type setting means.

According to the gaming machine P3, it is possible to set the specific sound in accordance with the beat timing of the sound output from the sound output means.

In the game machine P3, the specific sound setting means sets a specific sound corresponding to the timing determined by the timing determination means and the beat timing of the sound type determined by the sound type determination means. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that it sets the .

According to the game machine P4, as the specific sound, beats corresponding to the stop timing of each symbol row and the beat timing of the sound are set. There is an effect that it is possible to have a game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine P4 has specific sound storage means for pre-storing a plurality of the specific sounds, and the specific sound setting means selects the specific sound corresponding to the sound type set by the sound type setting means as the specific sound. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is set by reading from a storage means.

According to the gaming machine P5, by pre-storing the specific sound corresponding to the sound type in the specific sound storage means, it is possible to simplify the process for setting the specific sound.

In the game machine P5, the specific sound storage means stores a plurality of specific sounds having different intervals between beats of the specific sounds.

According to the gaming machine P6, since the specific sound can be set in accordance with the interval between the timing of stopping the symbol row and the timing of the beat of the sound, there is an effect that the characteristic sound can be easily set.

A gaming machine P5 or P6, wherein a plurality of specific sounds having different output period lengths are stored in the specific sound storage means.

According to the game machine P7, by varying the length of the period during which the specific sound is output, it is possible to prevent the specific sound from being output for an unnecessarily long period.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The game machine K3 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines described above, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, an advantageous privilege game is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes a determination means capable of executing a determination, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. dynamic display mode setting means for setting the dynamic display mode of; audio output means capable of outputting audio at least during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means; and audio output thereof sound type setting means for setting the type of sound output by means; sound type determination means for determining the type of the sound set by the sound type setting means; and set by the dynamic display mode setting means Based on the timing determination means for determining the timing when the dynamic display mode satisfies a predetermined display condition, the determination result of the timing determination means, and the determination result of the audio type determination means, the audio output means outputs an output. It has specific sound setting means for setting a specific sound.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol strings formed from a plurality of pieces of identification information; The target display mode setting means sets a dynamic display mode in which the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at different timings. It is determined as the timing when the condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the sound type setting means selects one sound type from a plurality of sound types in which beat timings of the sound to be output are different. and the voice type discriminating means discriminates the beat timing of the voice type set by the voice type setting means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the specific sound setting means sets the timing determined by the timing determination means and the sound type determined by the sound type determination means. It sets a specific sound for which the beat corresponding to the timing of the beat is set.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, further comprising specific sound storage means for pre-storing a plurality of the specific sounds, wherein the specific sound setting means is set by the sound type setting means. The specified voice corresponding to the selected voice type is read out from the specified voice storage means and set.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is provided a judging means capable of executing a judgment, and a privilege for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the judgment result executed by the judging means is a predetermined judgment result. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and dynamic display of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. dynamic display mode setting means for setting a mode; audio output means capable of outputting audio at least during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means; sound type setting means for setting the type of sound to be played; sound type determination means for determining the type of the sound set by the sound type setting means; and the dynamic display set by the dynamic display mode setting means Timing discrimination means for discriminating the timing when the aspect satisfies a predetermined display condition, the specific voice output by the voice output means based on the discrimination result of the timing discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the voice type discrimination means. It has specific voice setting means for setting.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display means can dynamically display a plurality of pattern strings formed from a plurality of pieces of identification information, and the dynamic display mode setting means stops the plurality of pattern strings at different timings. A dynamic display mode to be displayed is set, and the timing discriminating means discriminates the timing at which the pattern row stops as the timing at which the predetermined display condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are obtained. That is, the sound type setting means sets any one sound type from a plurality of sound types in which the beat timing of the output sound is different, and the sound type determination means selects the sound type It determines the beat timing of the sound type set by the setting means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, the specific sound setting means sets the specific sound in which beats corresponding to the timing determined by the timing determination means and the beat timing of the sound type determined by the sound type determination means are set. It is a thing.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, the following effects are obtained. That is, it has specific sound storage means for pre-storing a plurality of the specific sounds, and the specific sound setting means selects the specific sound corresponding to the sound type set by the sound type setting means from the specific sound storage means. It is read and set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
80 variable display unit (display means)
81 third pattern display device (display means)
S305 determination means
S2211 dynamic display means

Claims (1)

determination means capable of performing determination;
display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine comprising a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means,
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern;
variable means capable of changing between a first state and a second state different from the first state;
variable control means capable of executing variable control for varying the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern;
The game machine is
The operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means as a production pattern for indicating the determination result of the determination means. and can be determined based on the determination result of at least one of the determination means,
When the 1 determination result is the specific determination result, it is possible to determine the production pattern in which the variable pattern is a specific variable pattern,
It is possible to make it more difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means when the variable means is in the second state than when the variable means is in the first state. and
When the determination result is the specific determination result, it is easier to determine the effect pattern in which the variable means is varied than when the determination result is other than the specific determination result,
The specific variable pattern is a variable pattern that can notify the specific determination result by changing the variable means from the first state to the second state while the identification information is dynamically displayed. ,
In the game machine , the variable control means is included in the production pattern by operating the operation means operable by the player in a situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information cannot be executed based on a predetermined operation pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to bring the variable means into a variable state in a variable manner.

Images